Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.

P65

A
LL
EN
Physics Gutka
1
2 Physics Gutka

EN
LL

© All rights including trademark and copyrights and rights of translation etc. reserved and vested
exclusively with Allen Career Institute®. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, adapted,
A

abridged or translated, stored in any retrieval system, computer system, photographic or other system or
transmitted in any form or by any means whether electronic, mechanical, digital, optical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, or stood in any retrieval system of any nature. Any breach will entail legal action and
prosecution without further notice.
This study material is sold/distributed by Allen Career Institute® subject to the condition and undertaking given
by the student that all proprietary rights (as defined under the Trademark Act, 1999 and Copyright Act, 1957)
of the Study Materials and/or Test Series and/or the contents shall belong to Allen Career Institute's Tests and
neither the Study Materials and/or Test Series and/or the contents nor any part thereof shall be reproduced, modify,
re-publish, sub-license, upload on website, broadcast, post, transmit, disseminate, distribute, sell in market, stored
in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means for reproducing or making multiple copies
of it. Any violation or infringement of the propriety rights of Allen shall be specifically punishable under Section-
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.P65

29 & 52 of the Trademark Act, 1999 and under Section- 51, 58 & 63 of the Copyright Act, 1957 and any other Act
applicable in India. All disputes are subjected to the exclusive jurisdiction of courts, tribunals and forums at Kota,
Rajasthan only.
Note:- Due care and diligence has been taken while editing and printing this book/study materials. Allen Career Institute shall not
hold any responsibility for any mistake that may have inadvertently crept in. Allen Career Institute shall not be liable for any direct,
consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use of this book.
 Physics Gutka 3

Always start any work with smiling face.

Life is battery
Smile is electricity

EN
“ , ”
LL

{= , “5C Continuity Control Concentration

) ( =. ) (, )
Concept”

;
A

100% confirm Cheerfulness Confidence

) )

Negative Marking Pattern Exam 3 Questions subject

1. Fuse questions : Question Language > )
(Immediately) ,
2. Confuse Questions : Questions Language > Options confusing )
Mark Second/next round ,
3. Easy going Questions : ( <+ Question language Options No confusion)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.P65

In any paper
Testing of (XI + XII)

2/3 = 67%
4 Physics Gutka

TEST PAPER QUESTIONS

s itive a
Real testing questions po t

itu
with
%

tde
% questions
<+ syllabus So keep smiling

(Language) ( ) % Question <+

Question framer Helper (question) ;[

EN
LL
A

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 5

REVISION

REVISION <+
<+ , % REVISION
<+ + ?
REVISION <+ ;

RAPID REVISION FOR PHYSICS

Follow the following steps for Physics

Step–1

Step–2
EN
Do Marked Questions of Exercises and questions which asked in your's Test Paper or/and
of that unit.
Questions Articles
Class notes <+
questions ]
Step–3 Class – Notes register
LL

Step–4 Unit IIT-JEE/

AIEEE/AIPMT/State PET or PMT Previous Papers
Unit Questions [
%
A

Special Phase Papers, Major time ,]

State PMT/ PET / AIEEE / Board Syllabus
Note
Topics Extra Class : %

ALLEN Career Entrance Exam

<+ [
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.P65

Semi final Final [

So be prepared 100% for Major Tests.
Major Test ] ] ] ] ] ]
6 Physics Gutka

For any exams : Always keep smiling face & keep positive thinking in your mind.

– It's the part of study.

Exam ; 100% Questions attempt ;

(So do your's 100% and give your 100% of preparation or potential)

attempted Questions conceptual mistake 0% Part of exam

Questions attempt ] ; EN , paper attempt approach
Qualitative Not Quantitative
100% confident
[ Patience & Accuracy /;
pattern paper perfect time management maximum return
Best Method
• Don't decide order of subject. • Don't do breakage of time for each subject
Simple & Sweet method : First easy round marks , Easy (Selective select )
LL

Second round –– Struggle ) Question +& +

( ; –– Rank Improvement ,)
(For any objective pattern Exam)
<+ , Topic question connected 5 steps
A

Read Carefully –– Use Best method to read the question. Stop, Look & Go (Most Important)
Result Question Framer helper
Think Conceptually –– Each question fresh <+ ; Answer direct apply
Patience
Read all options with the analysis. What is requested? ) Question Related
Tick the firm answer patiently at proper order with 100% confidence
Fill the proper answer in OMR sheet properly and patiently. /; OMR sheet
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\01 NOTE.P65

(Mirror) selection % OMR ;

 Physics Gutka 7

b± b2 4ac
Quadratic equation ( }? ) ax2+bx+c=0 solutions ( )x =
2a
Note : b2 – 4ac < 0 roots imaginary ( ) , ; b2=4ac roots equal
Sum of roots = x1 + x2 = –b/a, Product of roots = x1 x2 = c/a
Exercise : Solve : 10x2 – 27x + 5 = 0 Ans. x = 5/2, x = 1/5
Binomial Theorem ( ;)
n(n 1) 2 n(n 1) (n 2) 3
(1 + x)n = 1 + nx + x + x + .....
2! 3!
if x <<< 1 [x, 1 ] (1 + x)n 1 + nx
Trigonometry ( ) EN
a 1
sin2 + cos2 = 1 sin = =
a 2
b 2 cosec
b 1
1 + tan2 = sec2 cos = 2 2 =
a b sec
a sin 1
1 + cot2 = cosec2 tan = = =
b cos cot
LL

sin 2 = 2 sin cos cos2 = cos2 – sin2 = 1 – 2 sin2 = 2cos2 – 1

radian = 180° 1 rad 57° & 1° = 60' ( ) ; 90° = /2 rad.

sin( ) sin
sin (– ) = –sin ; cos (– ) = +cos tan (– ) = = = –tan
cos( ) cos
A

sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B cos (A + B) = cos A cos B – sin A sin B

sin (A – B) = sin A cos B – cos A sin B cos (A – B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B

Electric current ( / ) is not a vector

[Although it has both magnitude and direction but it does not follow triangle rule of addition]
Addition of vectors ( ; )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\02 NOTE.P65

R = R = A B = A2 B2 2A.B = A2 B2 2AB cos R A B

B Bsin
B
B sin
(Resultant) A (Angle) tan =
A B cos
A sin A
(Resultant) B (Angle) tan = Bcos
B A cos

A = B R = 2Acos /2 tan = tan = tan /2 [or = = /2]

8 Physics Gutka

Subtraction of vectors ( ? )

R A B A ( B) R = A2 B2 2AB cos( ) = A2 B2 2AB cos

; A=B R = 2A sin tan = tan = cot or

2 2 2 2

(vector) positive scalar ( ) magnitude )

3A ] A magnitude, A magnitude

Negative scalar multiply direction opposite 4 A 4A A

A 4

Dot (Scalar) product [ ( ) ]

A.B AB cos (a scalar)

A A xˆi A y ˆj A z kˆ , B B xˆi B y ˆj B z kˆ A.B A x Bx + A y By + A z B z

Cross (Vector) product [

ˆ
(
(a vector)
EN ) ]

A B AB sin n

n̂ unit vector perpendicular to both A and B ( A B , )

ˆi ˆj kˆ
LL

Ax Ay Az
A B= = i [AyBz – ByAz] – j [AxBz–BxAz] + k [AxBy–BxAy]
Bx By Bz

A B = i (AyBz – ByAz) + j (AzBx – BzAx) + k (AxBy – BxAy) ;

A

A B = x (AyBz – ByAz) + y (AzBx – BzAx) + z (AxBy – BxAy) , ;

Ex. If A = 2 i – 3 j + 4 k and B = –3 i + 6 k then calculate A B

Sol. A B = i [(–3)(6) –(0)(4)]+ j [(4) (–3)–(6)(2)]+ k [(2)(0)–(–3)(–3)]= –18 i –24 j – 9 k

Right hand thumb rule

A×B vector A ( ) fingers ( )

vector B angle
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\02 NOTE.P65

? thumb ( ) direction A B
A A direction
Note : B A = – A B
B B
( direction opposite )
 Physics Gutka 9

Plane angle 1 degree = 60 minute = 3600 second = 2 /360 radian = 1/360 revolution
( ) 1 radian = 57.3°, 1 revolution (1 ) = 360° 2 radian

Length 100 centimeter = 1 metre = 1000mm ; 1 inch = 2.54 cm

( ) 1 foot=30.48 cm, 1 mile (1 )=1609 m, 1Å=10–10 m, 1 fermi=10–15 m
1 nautical mile (1 )=1852 m, (Note : 1 knot=1.852 km/hr), 1 yard (1 )=3ft
1 parsec 1 light year (1 = } , ) = 9.46 × 1012 km
> 1 light year 1 parsec (1 ) = 3.26 light year
> 1 AU
1AU (astronomical unit) = 1.496 × 1011m ~ 1.5 × 1011 m = ,
1 bohr radius = 0.529 Å, 1 mil = 10–3 inch, 1 nm = 10–9m,
1 m = 10–6m, 1 mm = 10–3m, 1 pm = 10–12 m

Area ( ) 1 cm2 = 10–4 m2, 1 barn = 10–28 m2, 1 hectare=104 m2 = 2.47 acres ( +)
Speed ( ) 1 km / hr = 5/18 m/s, 1 mile/hr = 0.45 m/s
Volume ( ) 1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 106 cc = 1000 litre = 35.31 ft3 ( )
Mass ( )
EN
1 atomic mass unit (a.m.u.) = 1.66 × 10 kg = 1u
1 pound = 453.6 g, 1 ounce = 28.35 g
–27

1 slug = 14.6 kg, 1 ton = 907.2 kg, 1 metric ton = 1000 kg

*Chandra shekhar limit = 1.4 MS where MS = Mass of sun
Force 105 dyne = 1 newton = 0.225 lb (1 lb = 4.45 N)
( ) 1 gram-force = 980 dyne, 1 kilogram force (1kgf) = 9.8 N
LL

Acceleration ) g = 9.8 m/sec2 (MKS unit) 980 cm/sec2 (CGS unit) 32 feet/sec2 (FPS unit)
Pressure 1 atm (1 ; )=1.013 × 106 dyne/cm 2 =1.013 × 105 N/m 2
( ) = 1.013 × 105 pascal=76 cm Hg=760mm Hg { 1pascal = 1newton/m2}
1 bar = 105 N/m2 = 106 dyne/cm2 ; 1 torr = 1 mm Hg
Density (? ) 1 kg/m3 = 10–3 g/cm3
A

1
Time ;) 1 day = 86,400 second, 1 year = 365 days = 3.16 × 107 second
4
Energy & Power 1 Btu (British thermal unit) = 1055 joule; 1 joule = 107 erg , 1 cal = 4.18 J
) 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J, 1 horsepower (hp) = 746 watt
Electric charge 1 coulomb 2.998 × 109 statcoulombs (or esu) of charge ~ 3 × 109 stC
) 0.1 abcoulomb (or emu of charge)
(Note : esu – electrostatic unit, emu – electromagnetic unit)
Electric current 1 ampere 2.998 × 109 statampere (or esu of current)
/ ) 0.1 abampere (or emu of current)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\02 NOTE.P65

Electric potential 1 volt 3.336 × 10–3 statvolt 1 × 108 abvolts

) 1 statvolt = 300 volts
Electric field 1 volt per meter 3.336 × 10–5 statvolt/cm 1 × 106 abvolt/cm
{ =)
Magnetic field 1 T = 104 G, 1 Wb = 108 maxwell, 1T=1 Wb/m2, 1G = 1 maxwell/cm2
; { =)
10 Physics Gutka

Relative Density or Specific Gravity ( ? ; )

Density of substance ( ? ) ML 3
= = = M0L0T0 No dimension ( )
Density of water ( ? ) ML 3

Mechanical Equivalent of heat ( ; )

Mechanical Work done ( ) ML2 T 2

J = = M0L0T0 No dimension
Heat produced ( ) ML2 T 2

1 1 1
Compressibility ( ) = = = M–1LT
T2 [M–1LT2]
Bulk modulus K ML 1 T 2

Avogadro Number [; ) (NA )= NA/mole [mol–1] or [ –1

]
PV ML 1 T 2 L3
Gas Constant ) R=
T
=ML2T–2 –1
mol–1 [ML2T–2 –1
mol–1]
mol
R(Gas Constant ) ML2 T 2 1
mol 1
Boltzmann's Constant k = [ML2T–2 –1
]
N(Avogadro number) EN mol 1

2
a 2
a
Vander Waal's Constants P 2
V b RT Pressure
V 2
V (dimensionally )

PV 2 ML 1 T 2 2 volume L3
a 2
L3 ML5 T 2
mol 2
[ML+5T–2mol–2] and b [L3 ]
mol2 mol
LL

Amount of Heat( ) ML2T 2

Entropy ( )= =ML2T–2 –1
[ML2T–2 –1
]
Temperature ( )
L/R or RC Time constant of L–R/R–C circuit ( ; )= dimension of time = T [T]

I 1 100 1
Power of Lens ( = ) P=
= = L–1 [L–1]
f f metre f cm L
A

(Note : for lens P = 1/f and for mirrors P = – 1/f)

v v
Magnification ( ) {for lens m= & for mirrors m = – } (No dimension)
u u
Enthalpy ( ) H= U + PV = Total heat content ML2T–2 [ML2T–2]
Cofficient of Viscosity ( ): = F/6 rv [ML–1T–1]

a b c
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\02 NOTE.P65

M1 L1 T1 a b c
Use n2 n1 where M L T is the dimensional formula of physical quantity
M2 L2 T2
[ nu = constant [; × = = ]
2
Ex. F MLT ; force SI (MKS) CGS system value compare
1 1 2 2
M1 L1 T1 1kg 1metre 1sec 1000g 100cm
n2 CGS n1 MKS 1 105
M2 L2 T2 1g 1cm 1sec 1g 1cm
 Physics Gutka 11

GIVEN BY

&
&
&

Newton's mechanics (introduction of scientist Newton) .......... ] school ]

Analysis Physics] Career

Physics as
V Vector; C
Analysis
VCR :
Calculus (Maths 2/3)
EN
Analytical Approach for Newton Physics.

R Relative (1/3)

Nature of physics both are

Relative
LL

Special Note : Physics motion ( ) Kinematics

A

PARTICLE KINEMATICS
question involved ) directions mutually
perpendicular ) ;
independent free ( free ,)
(cool) , ; )
(In one time think in single direction only)
1–direction Right conclusion
Simultaneously all direction Definite confusion
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Vector scalar /;
Question /; <+ , / (Patience )
Analysis direction ( reverse /; )
Rest – equilibrium ( F=0 & =0)
Check the nature of question
Motion – direction unbalanced force use (F=ma)
 12
Physics Gutka

A
LL
EN

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 13

NEWTON MECHANICS

EN
Basically five forces in Newton Mechanics Field Force Acceleration Kinematics

Weight ( ): ) Due to gravity of Earth ; )

LL

Tension ):
(Due to stretching)
A

Tension

Spring Force )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Thrust Force (Bouyant Force) ( ) Always in upward direction

[Magnitude = V g where V=Volume of body, = Density of medium].

14 Physics Gutka

x Ab x Re l x ref where x r, v, a, , p

Relative quantity = Actual quantity–Reference quantity Actual Re f Re lative

x relative & x actual describe x reference respect describe

X relative = X actual X reference X actual = X reference + Xrelative

Ex. v AB vA vB vA vB v AB
EN
Field Force a v s (or r )
(Boss of force) (Source of physics)
LL

x–direction Fx ax vx x
y–direction Fy ay vy y
z–direction Fz az vz z

In space F Fxˆi Fyˆj Fz kˆ In x–y plane F Fx i Fy j

A

In space a ax i ay j a zk In x–y plane a ax i ay j

In space v vx i vy j v zk In x–y plane v vx i vy j

In space r xi yj zk In x–y plane r xiˆ yjˆ

1 2 1 1 1 2
Ex. If x=uxt + a t ; y=uyt + ayt2 ; z=uzt + azt2 then r xiˆ yjˆ zkˆ ut at
2 x 2 2 2

Ex. The coordinates of a particle moving in YZ plane are given by y=4cos6t and z=6 sin6t. Find :
(i) The equation of the path (ii) Velocity (iii) Acceleration (iv) The relation between a and r
y2 z2
Sol. (i) y 4 cos 6t & z=6sin6t 1 (equation of ellipse)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

16 36
dr d yjˆ zkˆ dy ˆ dz ˆ
(ii) v j k = 24 sin 6t ˆj 36 cos 6t kˆ
dt dt dt dt
dv
(iii) a 144 cos 6t ˆj 216sin6t kˆ
dt
(iv) a 144 cos6t ˆj 216 sin 6t kˆ = 36 4cos6t ˆj+6sin6t kˆ 36r a 36r
 Physics Gutka 15

Nature of slope(S)

; ;

Variation of slope(S)

slope
increasing

slope=0
=1
pe
slo

slo
EN
pe
=
1

45° 45°

Relation Function [y=f(x)] Graph [ Slope (dy/dx) physical quantity

LL

In Kinematics
A

In Mechanics

X f Xi
If on X-axis & on Y-axis Then Slope Formula X av
time
Displacement ds s f si
Time ( ;) ( )
Velocity ( ) v v av
dt time
Acceleration dv vf v i
Time ( ;) Velocity ( ) a a av
( ) dt time
Time ( ;) Momentum ( ) Force ( ) dp p f pi
F Fav
dt time
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Energy ( ) Power ( ) dE E
P Pav
dt time
Time ( ;)
dW W
Work ( ) Power ( ) P Pav
dt time
Angular Momentum dJ J j Ji
Time ( ;) ( ; )
Torque ( ) av
dt time
16 Physics Gutka

dv dp
a F v adt x vdt I p Fdt
dt dt

Ex. 1 Ex. 2

Ex. 3 Ex. 4 Ex. 5

EN t
LL

& (Known)
100%
Details (Connector)
(Unknown)

Upward Vertical Projectile Motion (1–D)

A

u u
tH =
g a
2u 2u
T 2t H
g a
2
u2 u
H
2g 2a
Motion under gravity (MUG)
Time interval at 2u
GL T
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

different levels g
2v
FL TF t4 t1
g
2w
SL TS t3 t2
g
Time of journey or total time of flight
T = t1 + t4 = t2 + t3
 Physics Gutka 17

Projectile Motion (2–D)

u u sin u cos
tH =
a g g
2u 2 u sin 2u cos
T 2t H =
a g g
u2 u 2 sin2 u2 cos2
H =
2a 2g 2g
2u 2u y 2u x u y
* R = (u cos )T = u|| × a
= ux × ay =
g

u2
Maximum Range ( ) ux = uy or = 45° R max
g
Max. range acceleration vector line , Range angle bisector )
(speed) projectiles Range ; projection angle
complementary , 90°– Angle 45°+ 45°– horizontal range
same
Projectile motion on inclined plane (2–D) - Up motion

tH
u
a
u sin
gcos
; T 2t H
2u
a
EN 2u sin
g cos
;H
u2
2a
u2 sin2
2 g cos

* OA = Range on inclined plane

Inclined plane
// // /
Here OB =OAcos = (ucos )T
// // /
/ // //
/ // //
gsin
/ / //
// / //

horizontal
/// / //
2

=0
u cos T 2u cos sin
/ / // /
/// / //
LL
OA s
/// //
uco
/ / // //

cos g cos2
// / //
////
/// //
/ / / // //
ground
/ / //
/
///
u2 (ucos T t=T
For maximum Range , R max
4 2 g 1 sin

Projectile motion on inclined plane (2-D) - Down motion ( – )

A

u u sin
tH = a g cos

2u 2u sin
T = 2tH =
a g cos

u2 u 2 sin 2
H
2a 2g cos
OA = Range on inclined plane
1 2u2 cos sin
R' u II T gII T2
2 gcos2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

u cos uT
or R cos u cos T R T if =0 R=
cos cos
u2
For maximum range , R min
4 2 g 1 sin
Special Note : Incline plane motion (formulae)
motion =
18 Physics Gutka

Ex. A football is kicked with a velocity of 20m/s at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. [g = 10 m/s2]

( { 45° 20 m/s )
(a) Find the time taken by the football to strike the ground.

( ; ,)
(b) Find the maximum height it reaches. ( ,)
(c) How far away from the kick does it hit the ground ?

; )

Sol. (a) We have ux = ucos = 20× cos45° = 10 2 m / s

uy = usin = 20× sin45° = 10 2 m / s

Here ax = 0 and ay = –g
When the football reaches the ground y = 0
( )

1 2 1 EN
y = uyt – gt 0 = 10 2 t – × 10× t2 t = 2 2 = 2.8 sec
2 2

2u sin 2 20 1
[Direct T = = = 2.8 sec]
g 10 2
(b) At maximum height vertical component of velocity becomes zero.
( ? ; )
LL

100 2
v 2y = u2y – 2gy 0 = (10 2 )2 – 2× 10× y y=H= = 10 m
20

u2 sin 2 20 20 1
[Direct H = = =10m]
A

2g 2 10 ( 2 )2

(c) Horizontal distance ( ) [Range )] : x = R = uxT= 10 2 × 2 2 = 40m

u 2 sin 2 20 20
[Direct R = = = 40 m]
g 10
Ex. Two graphs of same projectile motion projected from origin at t = 0 are shown. Find u x & uy (Take g=10 m/s2)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

uy 1 R ux u y
Ans. Here = & = 2 = Therefore uy = 5ms–1 & ux = 4ms–1
g 2 2 g
 Physics Gutka 19

Ex. Two projectiles A and B are projected simultaneously in a

vertical plane as shown in figure. Write down necessary

conditions for collision to take place.

Sol. For relative motion along horizontal (u1cos 1

+ u2cos 2) t = d

For relative motion along vertical (u1sin 1

– u2sin 2) t = H2–H1

OR
u1 sin u 2 sin H2 H1
Relative velocity must be along AB i.e. 1 2
u1 cos 1 u 2 cos 2 d

Case I :
Wire-cage (open cage) : [Air of cage is not bound with the cage]
bird (parrot) (Flies away) ] EN spring balance reading decrease
Note : Bird ] , { (for a moment) reading increase
case bird reading decrease
Case II :
Air tight cage : [Air of cage is bound with the cage]
bird constant velocity spring balance reading
LL

bird acceleration start reading increase

(; )
A

Not a real force

Exist only in non-inertial frame (Accelerated frames or rotating frames)

Inertial frame ; =) Frames at rest or moving with uniform velocity
Non-Inertial frame ; =) All the three Newton's laws are not valid.
*Rotating frames centrifugal force ; ) Pseudo force Pseudo force
observer reference frame acceleration ; inertial frame pseudo force
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

1. A refrence frame attached to the earth :

(a) Is an inertial frame.
(b) Cannot be an inertial frame because the earth is revolving around the sun.
(c) Cannot be an inertial frame because the earth is rotating about its axis.
(d) Is an inertial frame because newton's laws are applicable in this frame.
20 Physics Gutka

2. A particle of mass m is observed from an inertial frame of reference and is found to move in a circle of radius
r with a uniform speed v. The centrifugal force on it is :-
mv 2 mv 2
(a) towards the centre (b) away from the centre
r r
mv 2
(c) along the tangent through the particle (d) Zero
r
3. A particle of mass m rotates in a circle of radius a with a uniform angular speed . It is viewed from a frame
rotating with a uniform angular speed 0. The centrifugal force on the particle is:-
2
2
(d) m 0a
2 0
(a) m a (b) m 0a (c) m
a
2
4. A particle of mass m rotates in a circle of radius a with a uniform angular speed . It is viewed from a frame
rotating with a uniform angular speed . The centrifugal force on the particle is
2
2
(d) m 0a
2 0
(a) m a (b) m 0a (c) m a
2

Answers : 1. b,c 2. d 3. b 4. a

EN F 2T T I 1
T2
T1
Spring balance (reading) = GH T T JK g
1
1 2

( % reading ) (kg–wt/kg-f) )
LL

Ex. Ex.

T1 T2 1 Reading = 15 kg–wt = R1

50kg 50kg
A

2 Reading = 15 kg–wt = R2
Reading = 50 kg–wt = R T1=T2 = 50 × g

15kg

Ex. Ex. Ex.

R1=10 R 2=10
R = 20 kg–wt
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

2T 4m1m2
R= =
g m1 m2

20kg
10kg 10kg m2
m1
 Physics Gutka 21

Ex. Ex.
a(acceleration) a(acceleration)

4m1m2 (g a)
4m1m2 (g a) R= kg-wt
R= kg-wt m1 m2 g
m1 m2 g

m1 m2 m2
m1

Ex. Given Reading of S1 = 90 kg

Reading of S2 = 30 kg (g = 10 m/s2)

If the mass is stationary w.r.t. lift then determine the mass of block.

m(g a)
Sol. 90 = + 30 m = 30 kg
g EN
Ex. If x1, x2 & x3 be the extensions in the spring in shown cases. //////// //////// ////////
Write down mathematicsl relation between x1, x2 & x3.
LL
x1 5x 2 3x 3
Ans. = =
2 12 4
g 12 k k k
Hint : In (A) T = kx1=2g ; In (B) : T =kx2 =3g –3 × = g;
5 5

g 4 2kg 2kg 3kg 2kg 1kg 2kg

A

In (C) T = kx3 = 2g – 2 × = g
3 3 (A) (B) (C)

Ex : Monkey (10 kg) 2m/sec2 rope <+

A

(8kg) uniform velocity 2m/sec. Fixed support

2 m/sec2
B
tension [ mass ~ 0] [g=10ms ]
–2
10kg
(uniform
acceleration)

Sol. 8 kg. Monkey , FBD T1

C 2 m/sec
(uniform
T1 = 8g 8kg velocity)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

8g
D
10 kg Monkey , FBD T2

T2 – 10g – T1 = 10 × 2 ( F ma) T1 2m/sec2

10g
T2 = 18 g + 20 = 200N

Note : (rope ) part AB tension T2, Part BC tension T1 part CD tension zero
22 Physics Gutka

Ex. For given situation, determine the force with which the rope is pulled

, [ Weight of person = w
T
2T T
Weight of chair = W
Sol. (Chair + Person) system T T
a
FBD w
W
2T a
w W (w W)(g a)
3T – w – W = g
a T =
3g

Ex. system steady state system =0.5 2kg

A

acceleration {g = 10 ms2}
B 2kg
3g 2g (2g) 5g 0.5 2g 4g 40 2
Sol. a ms
3 2 2 7 7 7

Note : spring force internal force behave C 3kg

EN
Method I : Method of constraint equations ( xi = constant)

moving bodies x1, x2,...

LL
strings constraint equations

Ex.1 acceleration a1 a2 relation

Sol. Here x1 + x2 + x2 = constant x1 x2

A

time differentiate x1 2 x2 0

, time differentiate 1 a1 2
x1 2 x2 0 a2

But x1 a1 and x 2 a 2 Therefore a1–2a2 = 0 a1 = 2a2

Ex.2 If block A is moving with uniform velocity vA upwards then find out
velocity of block B.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Sol. For string (1) : 2xA + d–xP= 1

2 xA xP 0
1 xA

For string (2) xP + xP–xB= 2

2 xP xB 0 4 xA xB 0 xP 2
B
xB A
But x A v A so x B 4v A

Therefore velocity of block B will be 4vA down the incline plane.

 Physics Gutka 23

Method II : Method of virtual work

(The sum of scalar products of forces applied by connecting links of constant length and displacement of

corresponding contact points equal to zero. Fi ri 0 Fi v i 0 F ai 0

Ex.1 Ex. 2

Fi a i 0 2Taa2– Ta1 = 0 a1=2a2 Fi v i 0 (4T)vA–TvB = 0 vB=4vA

EN
Rough surface [ surface rough ; smooth]
LL

fr 0 Limiting
Check
Frictional force

fr 0 Static fricton
force
Kinetic
frictional force
A

Nature of friction F
applied

Direction of fr [fr = frictional force]

Draw FBD

M F
Ex . f r
applied
fr Mg
s
Fapplied s
Mg motion

Ex . , system ,F value motion start

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

N
Fsin
F F
Fcos
M M
fr F

Mg
24 Physics Gutka

Note :- Mass M FBD , surrounding (isolate) Earth surface

N (Normal reaction) (rope) isolate , rope tension
consider F equal Pulley mass M attached
N + Fsin = Mg ; Fr = F + Fcos = F(1 + cos )
Mg
Motion start , Fr = µN % F(1 + cos ) = µ(Mg – Fsin ) F=
1+cos + sin
N F
Ex. Body pulled up along a rough inclined plane surface

( :{ [ )

Normal reaction N = mgcos mgsin mgcos

N

Fmin = mgsin + µmgcos

(Minimum force condition speed constant )

N
Ex. Body pulled down along a rough inclined plane surface
N
m
( :{ [ )
mgsin mgcos
Fmin = µmgcos – mgsin

Ex.
(constant velocity
Block pull
block
,
[
minimum force
EN , Fmin [ )
( = )
m
F

FBD Fsin N = mg – Fsin

N
Fcos = µ(mg – Fsin )
Fcos
N mg
LL
F =
mg cos sin
mg
(cos + µsin ) maximum maximum value 1 2 % Fmin = 1 2

Ex. Find the maximum value of F so that both move together. B

(There is no relative motion b/w A & B)
A

F
Sol. asystem ( Acceleration of m + M) = A
m M

mg = m asystem m
F
m M
Fmax bm Mg g
Ex. Find the maximum value of F so that both move together.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Sol. Here N2 = mg

F mg m
a system Fmax mg 1
m M M M
 Physics Gutka 25

Two and Three Blocks

Problem in Friction
• The block on which a net force is applied to pull or
STEP Decide push, friction on both of its surfaces direction

1 direction
of friction
forces
•
opposite to the force.
Friction between two surfaces in contact makes
action reaction pair, these forces act in opposite
direction with equal magnitude.

• If coefficients of static and kinetic friction are

Decide range of
STEP different
friction forces
2 between each pair of
surfaces in contact. •
fS < SN fk = kN
If coefficients of static and kinetic friction are
EN same f < N

Decide maximum possible acceleration

STEP

3 each of those blocks, which accelerate

only due to friction.

LL

• If friction is zero anywhere below the block on which

Sequence force is applied, slipping first starts there.
STEP
• Out of the blocks (accelerating due to friction forces
4 of
only) which has least maximum possible acceleration
A

Slipping start slipping next. It starts slipping with respect to that

block which has next higher maximum possible
acceleration.

Solve
STEP

5 the
Questions
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Ex. Block B is pulled horizontally by a force F, which increases gradually.

(i) Find maximum friction between each pair of surface.
(ii) Decide sequence of sliding between various surfaces in contact.
Also calcualte minimum value of F for that.
(iii) Express accelerations of various block as function of F.
(iv) Draw a-t graph if F=10t where t is time in second. (g=10 ms–2)
26 Physics Gutka

Sol. (i) f1 max = (0.1) (20g) = 20N

f2 max = (0.2) (50g) = 100 N

f3 max
= (0.1) (90g) = 90N

(ii) Block A and C moves due to frictional forces.

f1 max 20 2 f2 max 100 90 1 2

aA max = m 1ms & a C max ms
A 20 mC 40 4

As aC max < aA max so slipping between B & C starts before slipping between A & B.
Also as f2 max > f3 max so slipping starts first between ground and C.

Calculation of Fmin
• Between ground and C : Fmin = 90N

• Between B and C :
Fmin 100
=
EN
100 90
Fmin 112.5N
20 30 40
LL

20 F 20 100
• Between A and B : Fmin 150N
20 30

(iii) For 0 F 90N aA aB aC 0

A

F 90
For 90 F 112.5N aA aB aC
90

F 100 100 90 1 2
For 112.5 F 150N a A aB ,a C ms
50 40 4

F 120 1
For F 150N aA 1ms 2 ,a B ,a C ms 2

30 4
a(ms )
2

(iv) For 0 t 9s aA aB aC 0 aB
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

t
For 9 t 11.25s aA aB aC 1 1 aA
9
aB

t 1
aA =

2
For 11.25s t 15s aA aB 2, a C ms
5 4 1/4 aC
=a
C

aA=aB=aC=0 =a
B

t 1 a A
t(s)
For t 15s aA 1ms 2 , a B 4,a C ms 2
0 9 11.25 15
3 4
 Physics Gutka 27

Work Energy Theorem ( ;) :- ( = of Physics)

Work done by all type of forces W = KE = Change in kinetic energy.

Note : W = Wc + Wnc + Wext

where Wc Work done by Conservative force

Wnc Work done by Nonconservative forces

Wext. Work done by external agent

&
Initial Final
Beginning Asking &
WET = Wext + Wg + (Ui Uf) spring+ WR + Wfr = Kf Ki
EN &
Ex. In Shown figure, initially the spring is unstretched when the system is released from
rest. Assuming no friction in the pulley, find the maximum elongation of the spring.
( = ; =
)
LL
Sol. Maximum elongation condition velocity zero

1 2 2mg
By work energy theorem KE = W; 0 = (mg) (x) – kx x=
2 K
(Note : 2 forces , gravitational force spring force.)
A

Ex. The spring has a force constant of 24 N/m. The mass of the block attached to
the spring is 4kg. Initially the block is at rest and spring is unstretched. The
horizontal surface is frictionless. If a constant horizontal force of 10N is applied
on the block then it has been moved through a distance of 0.5m . Find the
velocity of block.
24 / . 4 , ;
{ ? ; 10 { 0.5
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Sol . By Work Energy Theorem KE = W

1 1
Here mv2 – 0 = Wext + Wspring = Fexts – U = (10) (0.5) – kx2
2 2

1 1
× 4 × v2 = 5 – × 24 × (0.5)2 v = 1m/s
2 2
28 Physics Gutka

Ex. Figure shows a spring fixed at the bottom end of an incline of inclination 37°.
A small block of mass 2kg starts slipping down the incline from a point 4.8m
away from the spring. The block compresses the spring by 20cm stops
momentarily and then rebounds through a distance of 1m up the incline. Find
(a) friction coefficient between the plane and block and (b) the spring constant of
spring.
= , 37° 2 ,
4.8 20 ,
: 1 ,&
(a) , /; ? (b)
Sol. (a) Apply work energy theorem for initial & final positions ( , ; )
Change in KE = 0 = Work done by frictional force + work done by gravitational force
0 = – ( mg cos 37°) (5+1) + (mg sin 37°) (5–1) = 1/2
(b) Now apply work energy theorem for shown positions

Initial Position
EN Final Position

1
0 – 0 = (mg sin37°) (5) – ( mg cos37°) (5) – kx2 k = 1000 Nm–1
LL

Ex. The blocks have equal masses. The surface of A is smooth but that of B has
a friction coefficient 0.1 with the floor. Block A is moving at a speed of 10m/s
towards B which is kept at rest. Find the distance travelled by B if (a) the collision
is perfectly elastic (b) the collision is perfectly inelastic. Take g=10m/s2 .
A

A B , ? 0.1 A,
B 10 / B ; ,; &
(a) (b) % (g=10 ms–2 )
Sol. (a) Conservation of linear momentum mu1 + mu2 = mv1 + mv2 10 = v1 + v2 ...(i)

v 2 v1
for elastic collision ( ) u1 u 2 = 1 v2 – v1 = 10...(ii)

Solving eqn (i) and (ii) v1 = 0, v2 = 10m/s

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Work-energy theorem Wc + Wext + Wnc = KEƒ – KEi 0 + 0 + m (–a)x = 0 – KE1

1
Here a = µg so – m gx = 0 – mv 22 x = 50 m
2

(b) For inelastic collision ( ) 2v = 10 v = 5 m/s

1
According to work energy theorem (2m) × 25 = m( g) x x = 12.5 m
2
 Physics Gutka 29

Conservative force ( )

F.dr = 0 [ } ; ]

, (constant and uniform) F.dr F dr 0

(gravitational), ; (Electrostatic) ; (central forces) (con-

servative force)

For a conservative field W = F.dr = U – U = – U, (W = – change in PE)

1 2
1

W = KE KE = – U (KE + U) = 0 KE + U =

law of conservation of mechanical energy (COME)

Ex. 1 :- COME

EN Ex. 2 :- COME

(COME = Conservation Of Mechanical Energy)

If gravitaional potential energy U = Ax + By then a =?? ( )

U U A 2 B2
F = – x i – y j F = – A i –B j a
m
LL

Uˆ Uˆ Uˆ
If electrostatic potential energy U = – 5x + 4y – 3z = qV F i j k
x y z

52 42 32 5 2
A

then F 5iˆ 4ˆj 3kˆ a= =

m m

Ex. particle U = U0 – Ax + Bx2 motion ( ) ( A,B positive ) , force

force-constant value point zero (vanish) ; (stable equilibrium)

dU
Sol. F = – = A – 2Bx [ A,B constants ]
dx
F = 0 x0 = A/2B F = – 2B (x – x0) = – k(x – x0)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Force = – k (displacement from equilibrium position) k = 2B

Stable equilibrium , U minimum ,
2
dU d U dU d 2U
[ U min Stable eqm , =0 = ve U max unstable eqm =0 & 2 = –ve]
dx dx2 dx dx

d 2U
% =2B / % x = A/2B
dx2
30 Physics Gutka

RAT

Uniform circular motion linear vector change magnitude )

x 2x sin x may be s, v, a, p, F, a cp
2
Method 1
mv 2 2
[Circular motion questions centre net real force , m r ]
r
Real forces acting towards centre

mv2
= T– mg cos
r

Method 2 (Non inertial frame)

Particle observer method FBD observer respect

EN mv2
particle equilibrium [net force =0] particle centrifugal force
r
vC v 2B 2gR v 2A 4gR
TC=T 6mg

vB v 2A 2gR
LL
TD=T 3mg

TB=T 3mg
R
vD v 2A 2gR
A

Critical condition ( particle just circle complete condition Thighest point=0)

Rg
3Rg

R
3Rg
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

5Rg

Tmax
Ex . Vertical circular motion particle ,; 4 Lowest point tension
Tmin
Sol. Lowest point tension maximum highest point tension minimum
Tmax 3
% Tmax – Tmin = 6mg Tmax 6mg Tmax 6mg Tmax 8mg
4 4
 Physics Gutka 31

Ex . For shown situation calculate

(i) Speed at D, (ii) Normal reaction at D (iii) Height H
7gR
Sol . (i) Speed at D = 5gR
mv2C m 7gR
(ii) Normal reaction at C = NC = = 7 mg
R R
Normal reaction at D = 7mg – 3mg = 4mg

(iii) Speed at B = 9gR = 2gH H = 4.5 R

Ex . massless rod attached mass m vertical circular motion , critical speed

calculate A, B, C & D point tension calculate
Sol. For critical speed at A, at C speed of mass : vC = 0
1
% energy conservation law 2 mv 2A mg 2 vA 4g

mv 2A mv 2B 2 1 2
TA mg 5mg ; TB = = mv A – mg =2 mg
2

mv 2C
TC = –mg = –mg ;TD = TB = 2mg
vA
Here : –ve sign indicate that tension is away from the rod.
EN
LL

T
Ex .

mv 2
A

2
Centre real force T = m r
r
Ex . Death well ( )
wooden well vertical surface
f
mv2 mv2 rg N
N = = mr 2
&f = N = mg =mg v2 =
r r mg
mv2 rg
{Note:- mg=f & f N mg s v2 }
r
Ex . Conical pendulum ( )
T cos = mg
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

mv2 v2
T sin = tan
r rg
2 r 2 r sin cos
Time period = v = 2 = 2
rg tan sin g
g
cos
32 Physics Gutka

2 2
v2 dv
a= a 2cp a 2t (Speed of particle is not constant)
r dt

dv d d dr
a ( r) r r v at a cp
dt dt dt dt

Ex. particle 2m radius circle speed v = (4t – 2) ms–1 revolve , t = 1 second total
acceleration calculate
2 2
v2 4 1 2 2 dv
Sol. t = 1 a cp 2 ms–2, t = 1 at 4 ms–2
r 2 2 dt

Therefore a a 2cp a 2t 22 42 4 16 20 ms–2

EN
Ex. For a projectile calculate radius of curvature ) at highest point & at point of projection.

Sol.

)
LL
At highest point A

At highest point
A

2
m u cos u 2 cos2
mg R2
R2 g

mu2 u2
At point of projection ( O ) mg cos R1
R1 g cos

Ex. rotating smooth hemispherical bowl , particle ( mass m )

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

position bowl respect stationary ( ground respect R

r radius circle rotate )

N
r
Sol. Particle , % N cos = mg
mg
g
N sin = m r = m R sin [
2 2
r = R sin ] N = m R ; 2
=
R cos
 Physics Gutka 33

Ex : particle hemispherical shape v0 speed

v 20 2
cos surface
3rg 3

mv 2 1 2
r
mg cos &
2
mv 0 b
mgr 1 cos g 1 2
2
mv

v 20 2 2
cos v0 = 0 cos
3rg 3 3

Ex . particle r radius circular path vertical motion

v 20 2
T = 0 , cos
3rg 3

mv 2 1 1 v 20 2
As mg cos
2
; mv 0 mgr 1 cos mv 2 cos
r 2 2 3rg 3

Ex. Overturning and skidding of a car

EN
Mv 2
Sol. R1 + R2 = Mg; F= a
r

2
Fh Mv
LL
Taking moments about G : R1a + Fh = R2a R2–R1 = =
a ar

M g v2 h M g v2 h
R1= ar & R2 = ar
2 2
A

v2 h g ar
R1 becomes zero. If g= or v =
ar h

g ar
The vehicle will topple outwards if v >
h

Here the centripetal force provided by frictional force (Horizontal Road) so the condition for no skidding
v < rg
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\03 NOTE.P65

Ex. car driver 'd' , ] , brake

mv 2 v2
Reason : car turn mg > ...(i)
d dg

v2
car brake 0 = v2 –2( g)d ...(ii)
2dg
Friction coefficient (ii) % braking safer
34 Physics Gutka

collision momentum) (conserve)

(; system momentum )

Elastic (e = 1) Inelastic (0 e<1)

(KEbefore collision= KEafter collision) (KEbefore collision KEafter collision)

Ex.

u u
u v = eu

v u sin tan
e = Note :- Here e = 1 tan '= =
u EN eu cos e

u'= u 2 sin 2 e2u 2 cos 2

v 2 v1 Collision separation
e= u u = (only for velocity component along the common normal)
1 2 Collision approach velocity

m1 m2 m1 m2
LL
Ex. 5m/sec 2m/sec 3m/sec 4m/sec
Before Collision After Collision

v2 v1 4 3 1
Coefficient of restitution ( )e
u1 u2 5 2 7
A

bodies elastic head-on maximum kinetic energy transfer bodies mass

same (mA = mB) KE 100% transfer ) maximum momentum ) transfer

collision body mass, body collision ( situation

momentum 200% transfer )

m1 m 2 1 2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

2
KE = loss in kinetic energy = 2 m m 1 e |u1 u 2 |2 1 e2 u rel
1 2 2

Example : (i) 5m/sec 2m/sec ( case |u1 u2 | = 5 – 2 = 3)

m1 m2

(ii) 5m/sec 2m/sec case |u1 u2| = 5 + 2 = 7)

m1 m2
 Physics Gutka 35

Ex. rod density , end ( ) (distance) proportional ( ) rod centre

of mass position

zx dm
Sol. Xcm =
z dm
dm, P dx mass % dm = Adx

zx. x dx P
Xcm =
z x dx
x 3
x (A = Area of cross section); o
x dx
R

z
0
R 2
x dx 3
0 2

z
Xcm = = =
x dx x2 3
0
2
0
Ex. A spaceship travelling with speed v0 along the positive X-axis suddenly shots out one third of its part with
speed 2v0 along positive Y axis. Find out the velocity of the remaining part
Ans. By conservation of linear momentum ( ; )EN
m 2m
mv0 i = (2v 0 j ) + v = 1.5 vo i –vo j
3 3 v
Ex. Diagram two block system right side v0 speed
system centre of mass acceleration calculate
–2
(g = 10 ms )
LL

Fnet (0.2) (3)g

Ans. acm = = = 2 ms–2
total mass 3
A

concept cavity ) related questions easily solve

Ex. solid sphere mass M radius R , cavity figure Solid

sphere
according centre of mass ) position origin
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

respect Note : In solid sphere m r3

Original
Sol. cavity – M/8 mass replace [Original sphere Mass = M
+ M/8 –M/8 neutralise ]
M R
M 0
m1 x1 m2 x 2 8 2 R
X cm
m1 m2 M 14
% centre of mass O (R/14) left x-axis
M
8
36 Physics Gutka

Ex. solid sphere radius R charge +Q ] , cavity

Point P Electric potential )
Electric field { =) calculate
Sol. system equivalent ;) &

KQ K Q/8 KQ KQ 17KQ KQ K Q/8 41KQ

VP EP
3R 3R R / 2 3R 20R 60R ; (3R)2 3R R/2
2
450 R2

Note : potential field calculation

Key concept :
EN
Velocity of CM ) at any elongation/ compression condition is equal to its initial value.
At maximum elongation/ compression condition. )
Velocity of each block = velocity of C.M. = Velocity of C.M. at t = 0
LL

v1 = v 2 = v common = v cm b g t t b g
= v cm t 0
=
m1 v1
m1
m2 v2
m2

Reduce Mass Concept concept two body mutual interaction ; )

% bodies motion , free
A

At maximum elongation/ compression condition

P.E. of spring = Initial KE of relative approach/separation

1 1 m1m2
K x 2max = v 2rel , here v rel at t = 0 and =
2 2 m1 m2

Ex .
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

m1 v 0 m2 0 m1v 0
Velocity of CM at maximum compression )= =
m1 m2 m1 m2
m1v 0
Velocity of each block at maximum compression v1 = v2 = vcm =
m1 m2

1 2 1 2 1 2 m1m2
Maximum compression produced in spring Kx max v rel v0 x max v0
2 2 2 K m1 m2
 Physics Gutka 37

Given initially system at rest

s (displacement & )
Ask Question on X v (velocity & )
a (acceleration & )
Key concept conservation of linear momentum )
motion start first body recoiled ) second body
Let
X1 of first body ground respect X2 of second body ground respect

X rel of first body w.r.t. second body

M2 M1
then X1 X rel , X 2 = – M M X rel
M1 M2 1 2

Ex .

m2
EN m1
Displacement for first body = ; Displacement for second body =
m1 m2 m1 m2

v1 v2 m3
LL

Total kinetic energy of a system of n particles is equal to sum m1 m2 v3

1 m5 m4 m6
of KE of all particles. K mi v 2i v5
2
Let v C = velocity of centre of mass (CM) then v4 v6
A

1 2 1 1
vi v iC vC K mi v iC vC = mi v 2iC mi v 2C mi v iC v C
2 2 2
Since sum of mass moments ) of all particles w.r.t. CM is zero so mi v iC 0

1
K K Mv 2C Where K' = sum of KEs of particles w.r.t. centre of mass.
2

KE of a system of particles = KE of the system w.r.t. CM + KE of CM

Absolute = (Relative) + Reference)

Ex. Find the KE of system of two particles of masses m1 and m2 having velocities v1 and v 2 relative to the
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

CM of the system.
Sol. KE of the system w.r.t. centre of mass :
1 m1 v1 m2 v 2 1 1
K' = K Mv 2C where v C , M=m +m & K= m1 v12 m2 v 22
2 m1 m2 1 2 2 2
2
1 1 1 m1 v1 m2 v 2 m1 m2 2 1 2
K m1 v12 m2 v 22 m1 m2 v1 v2 v rel
2 2 2 m1 m2 2 m1 m2 2
38 Physics Gutka

Ex. Triangular lamina ( ) moment of inertia 5

3
( ) axis respect maximum
A C
(a) AB (b) AC (c) BC 4

Sol . questions side pass axis respect mass distribution ( )

IAB maximum Note : IAB > IAC > IBC
Ex. particle 3m circular path 1.5 revolutions complete (1.5 ) ]
angular displacement
1.5 2 r
Sol. Angular displacement ( ; ) = = 3 radian B A
r
Ex. Vector scalar quantities
1. Instantaneous angular velocity 2. Average angular velocity
3. Instantaneous angular acceleration 4.Average angular accelration

d d
Sol. 1.
dt
vector 2.
t
EN scalar 3.
dt
vector 4.
t
vector

dp
Linear momentum : p mv Newton's IInd law : Fext =
dt
LL

; (Translational motion)
; (Linear momentum conservation) Fext 0 p constant

For single particle conservation of linear momentum is equivalent to Newton's first law.
; [ 2 2 ] , ; ; ; [for
A

rd
a system of particles, the conservation of linear momentum is equivalent to Newton's III law] ,
st rd
, Newton I law p cons tan t specify Newton's III law ;
(Rotational motion)
; (Angular momentum conservation) ext 0 L constant

Impulse - Momentum theorem ( ; ;) Impulse Change in momentum

F dt mv f mv i Note : Impulse A vector quantity ; I z Fdt F
dp
dt
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

Ex.1 Ex.2

t
 Physics Gutka 39

On rough surface at point of contact rigid body must be at rest w.r.t. to surface.
(a) Pure rolling on a stationary ground (or Base)

v cm
v =0y Condition of rolling
at point x net vx = vy
R X
vcm
Y

vx = vy = vcm – R = 0 vcm = R

(b) Pure rolling on a moving base

vcm
R X at point x vx = vcm – R
vcm
vb at point y vy = vb
Y EN vb

vx = vy = vcm – R = vb

(c) Pure rolling on an inclined plane

v 0 the contact point is at rest relative to plane.
Component of acceleration of P parallel to the plane =0
LL
2
Accleration of P, to plane aP = r toward C.

Distance moved by the CM of the rigid body in one full rotation is 2 R (or horizontal distance moved

by any point situated on circumference in one full rotation = 2 R)

In forward slipping S > 2 R [ vcm> R] In backward slipping S < 2 R
A

[ vcm< R] (S = distance moved by CM in one rotation)

The path of a point on circumference is a cycloid & the distance moved by this point in one full rotation is 8R.

Cycloid )

2 R
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

Dotted line path of a point on circumference : Length of path = 8R

Ex. , body translational motion ] rough surface + time
pure rolling condition time calculate time frictional force
work calculate
Sol. v v0 at fR = Ma, fR = Mg
v0
0 t fR = I = Mk2 t
g 1 r 2 / k2
40 Physics Gutka

by Work – Energy Theorem ( – ;) KE=W

{Note : W forces work }

1 k2 1 1 k2
Wf KE f KE i Mv 2 1 Mv 20 Mv 02 where
2 r2 2 2 1 r2

v0
For pure rolling v cm
k2
1
r2

Ex . , body rotational motion ] rough surface + time pure

rolling condition time calculate

Sol . v 0 at fR = Ma, fR = µMg r

t 0
; 0

r2 1 r2 / k2
0 t g 1
k2
fR I MK2

EN
Ex : A false balance has equal arms. An object weights W1 when placed in one pan and W2 when placed

W1 W2
in the other pan. Then the weight (actual) of the object is W =
2
LL

a a

equal arms

S1 S2
A

(Weight of scale pan) )

object (pan) (W + S1)a = (W1 + S2)a W – W1 = S2 – S1

object (pan) (W2 + S1)a = (W + S2)a W2 – W = S2 – S1

W1 W2
W – W1 = W2 – W W=
2

Ex. A false balance is such that the beams remains horizontal when the pans are empty. An object weight
W1 when placed in one pan and W2 when placed in the other pan. then the weight (actual) of the object
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

is W = W1 W2 (Assume weightless pans)

Object (pan) W1b = Wa

unequal arms
object (pan) W2a = Wb
a b
W2 = W1W2 W= W1 W2
 Physics Gutka 41

Inclined Plane ) Rolling Motion , min

Calculation
mgsin – fR = macm (linear motion)
1
fR R = I = mK2 (Rotational motion) Cylinder , = tan
min
3
for pure rolling a = R
tan 2
fR N or fR mg cos min Solid sphere , = tan
R 2 min
7
1
K2
(Special Point :- Smooth inclined plane pure rolling motion impossible )

No change in Liquid level rises in

EN (External force)
No change in
(External force)
Liquid level rises
water level backward water level in
portion of beaker [Because in Horizontal backward
(Due to inertia of rest water direction the interaction force
level will rise in backward between beaker & slab
portion of beaker) is a absent]
LL

Ex. ; ; :

Water level = ?
A

Ans. Liquid level rises in forward portion of beaker (Note : Here train will retard)

Ex. Here metal

> water
& air bubble
< water

Metal ball moves away from the axis & air bubble moves towards the axis Air bubble )
air bubble Metal Ball
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

m r Here B = Bouyant ( ) force = v g)

2 2
B m r B water

90°

constant velocity Acceleration

Ex . Situation I Situation II
)
or at rest
; )
42 Physics Gutka

Two types
(1) Floating ice cube in water & ice melt ] water level effect
ice cube Result of water level
(a) Air Bubble No change ( )
(b) Floating piece (Exa. cork, plastic, Rubber etc.) No change ( )
(c) Sinking piece (Exa. metal piece, stone etc.) decreases ( )
(2) Liquid ice cube melt , [ L
? (density of liquid)]
Result of liquid level
(a) L
= w
(Liquid, ) No change ( )
(b) L
> w
(Liquid, (Hg)) Increases ( )
(c) L
< w
(Liquid, decreases ( )
(kerosene and oils etc.)
EN
Critical velocity liquid flow streamline ) turbulent (? )
NR Reynold number (Dimensionless)
NR
vC Coefficient of viscosity
LL
D
Density of liquid
D Diameter of the tube
If 0 < NR < 1000 flow of liquid streamline or laminar
If NR > 2000 flow of liquid turbulent
A

If 1000 < NR < 2000 flow of liquid is unstable, changing from stream line to turbulent.

Ex : Find the increase in its length due to its own weight .

)
Area of
mg cross m
Sol. Weight of x length = x section =A
mg
(dx)
mg
Elongation in section dx = d = = xdx
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\04 NOTE.P65

AY AY
x
mg mg
= d = xdx
AY 2AY
x 0
dx
mg x
% weight =
2A Y
 Physics Gutka 43

Time period of a simple pendulum

T 2 R R
g R If is large then T 2 T 2 = 84.6 minutes
R g
g 1

Ex. Spring Mass System :

k
m
(time period) T = 2
k k
k m
m

FG M ms IJ k mS

Ex. ms spring T = 2 H 3 K
EN K

Ex. Extension in spring ( )=y ( mass m y

Restoring force ( ) F = ky displace )

LL

d2 y m 2
m 2 = – ky T = 2 T [F Tension]
dt k

Ex. Extension in spring = y/2

A

Tension in spring = ky/2

1 ky ky k
Restoring force F = = = y
2 2 4 4

m 4m
T = 2 = 2
(k / 4) k
Ex. Extension in spring = 2y [Extension tension = constant]
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

F = k(2y)
Restoring force
2F = 2[k(2y)] = (4k)y

m
T= 2
4k
44 Physics Gutka

Ex. Two particles are in S.H.M. with the same amplitude and frequency along the same line and about the same
point. If the maximum separation between them is 3 times of their amplitude, what is the phase difference
between them ? , ,
; 3 /;
2
Ans. ; Use x 1 x2 = 2a sin
3 2
Ex. Find the displacement equation of the simple harmonic motion obtained by combining the motions

x1 = 6 sin t, x2 = 4 sin t and x3 = 6 sin t

6 3

Ans. 4 6 3 sin t
6
Hint : First combine x1 & x3 C A
r
Ex. simple pendulum angular amplitude harmonic motion T
2
mv 2 mg
, T mg cos ma C FBD
r B v
mg sin ma t
1 v2
Energy conservation law mv 2 mgr cos 2g cos

aC 2g cos ; at
2
g sin
EN r

a total a2C a2t g 4 cos 2 sin 2 g 1 3 cos2

1 3 cos2 1
horizontal angle tan = total acceleration direction
3sin cos
1
LL
atotal horizontal angle 0° 3cos2 – 1 = 0 % cos
3
Ex. The coefficient of friction between the two blocks shown in the figure is and the horizontal plane is smooth.
= ? , {
(i) If the system is displaced slightly towards right or left and then released, find the time period of oscillation.
; ;
A

(ii) Find the frictional force between the blocks when the displacement from mean position is x.
/; x ] /; ?
(iii) What can be the maximum amplitude so that the upper block does not slip relative to the lower
block?

M m mkx (M m)g Basic approach

Ans. (i) 2 (ii) (iii)
k M m k fr ma
mkx fr mg
(ii) FBD of m : ma = fr ma mg
M m

mkx max M m g
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

(iii) FBD of m : mg xmax =

m M k
If a rigid body rolls without slipping on the inside of a fixed

hemisphere of radius R.
Any where
K2
(R r) 1
Time period of oscillatory motion T= 2 r2 Only Translational motion Pure rolling
g (R – r) (R – r) (1 + K2/r2)
 Physics Gutka 45

Phasor Method : Representation of SHM by Phasor

If a particle moves on a circular path of radius equal to amplitude of a simple harmonic motion with constant
angular velocity equal to angular frequency of the simple harmonic motion, its projection on any of its diameter
kinematically represents a simple harmonic motion.
• Projection of the radius vector on a diameter represents position in the SHM.
• Projection of velocity vector of the particle on the same diameter represents velocity vector in the SHM.
• Projection of acceleration vector of the particle in represents aceleration vector in SHM.

EN
LL

Ex. particle amplitude )A time period )T SHM instant ({ )

mean position ; A/2 distance ; time
{ ; mean position time cross

t1
A

Extreme
Sol. Equation Method : t3 position
t2
Mean
position

A 5 3 T T
x = A sin t = A sin t t1 & t2 t2 t1
2 6 6 3 2 3

T T T 5T
Mean position , t3 t3 t3 t1
2 2 12 12
P2 P1
Phasor Method :
A
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

A/2

A/2

/3 T /6 /6
t P3
P1 P2 ; 2 /T 3

2
; P3 ; t= 6 3 6 5T
2 /T 12
46 Physics Gutka

Ex. particles, same mean psoition about same angular

frequency amplitude A 2A , straight
line SHM instant opposite direction sin 1=1/3

, mean position A/3 distance A

sin 3=1/6

A/3
2A 3
2
1

SHM's phase difference ( )

1 1 1 1
Sol. 2 1 3 1 sin sin
6 3

(Note : question method )

mean
position
Ex. obstacle block, amplitude 4 cm time period 2cm
(elastic)
6s SHM obstacle time
m
period
Sol. Equation Method : SHM equation x=Asin t
T
2 = 4 sin t t = t particle mean position obstacle
6 12
T T T T 4T 2T 2
mean position
12 12
EN6
time New time period =
6 2 6 3 3
6 4s

New time period

Phasor Method :
2
3 3 2
T 4s
LL

2 3
T

t=20s
B
A

Ex. particles A B parallel straight lines % 40s 60s

t=20s
t=0 t=0
time period SHM : 20s phase difference
A B

2 2 2
Sol. At Bt 20 20
40 60 3 3
Ex. particle, amplitude 4m time period 8s SHM ;
particle time interval 2s maximum minimum
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

distance
Sol. Distance = Average speed × time average speed, mean position 45°
, extreme position max d min
1
dmax 2A cos 45 2 4 4 2m
2
1
d min 2 A cos 45 2 4 1 8 4 2 m
2
 Physics Gutka 47

source observer

speed of sound wave w.r.t observer v v0 v v0

n' = observed freq. = n
observed wavelength v vS v vS
n

Rule : source, observer move [Observer motion /; ] (v – vS)

case (v + vS) ; observer, source move [Source motion
/; ] (v + v0) case (v – v0)

source observer move decrease ; source observer ]

increase source stationary change

Ex.
EN n'
330 60
330 30
1200 1080Hz

330 30
Ex. n' 1200 1333.33Hz
LL
330 60

330 60
Ex. n' 1200 900Hz
330 30
A

330 60
Ex . n' 1200 1560 Hz
330 30

Effect of wind (medium) velocity (vm)

medium (wind), sound propagation direction move sound velocity v (v+vm)

use
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

wind, sound propagation opposite direction move sound velocity v (v – vm)

use

Sound doppler effect asymmetric ) light Doppler effect symmetric )

48 Physics Gutka

(only two cases are possible)

Case I Cas e II
O (observer) S (light O (observer) S (light
sour ce) source)

v v

1 v /c v 1 v/ c v
n' n 1 n n' n 1 n
1 v /c c 1 v/ c c

1 v/ c v 1 v /c v
' 1 ' 1
1 v /c c 1 v /c c
Violet shift Red shift

Loudness or intensity %; mainly amplitude

EN
( or Human Voice)
depend
; )
Pitch )%; sound wave frequency depend
LL

Quality or timbre : sound wave harmonics (overtones) presence depend

(Rigid + flexible)
A

heavier string wave velocity

Tension
mass per unit length

% reflected wave invert

vwave
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

% reflected wave invert

Rule :– wave region enter wave velocity smaller ] reflected wave invert ;
wave wave velocity region ] reflected wave invert Transmitted wave
invert
 Physics Gutka 49

Ex. taut string transverse disturbance isosceles triangle ( ) form

wall 1 m/sec. move string shape 2 5 second draw

Sol.

After 2 second After 5 second

Ex. Draw the curve traces by a particle when it is influenced simultaneously by two SHMs x = 3a sin t and y= a
cos t. [ , x =3asin t y=acos t ]

x2 y2
Sol. Eliminating 't' from x & y we get 1 (ellipse)
9a2 a2
For direction put t = 0 x = 0, y = a (Point A)

Put t = x = 3a, y = 0 (point B)

2
Ex. red light signal green , EN (Given : R
= 6300Å, G
= 5400Å)
1/ 2
1 v/c 1 v/c 5400 6 1 v / c 36 v 13
Sol. '= × = = = =
1 v /c 1 v /c 6300 7 1 v / c 49 c 85

39
v= × 108 m/sec 0.458 × 108 m/sec.
85
Ex. Frequency ratio for different systems
LL
A
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65
50 Physics Gutka

The repetition of the sound produced due to reflection by a distance extended surface like a cliff, hill, wall, building
etc. is called an echo. ( ] / )
1 1
Note:Human Ear ( ) sound effect
10
sec. ; sound
10
sec. ; reflect
echo
Echo obstacle ( ] ) distance 17 (56 ft.)
2x 2x x
v = 340 m/sec.; t
v 340 170 x

1 x 1
t x 17
10 170 10
Ex : 700 distance parallel cliffs ( +; ) [ rifle fire
echo 1½ second echo 2½ second ] sound velocity
person +; distances
Sol : echo time = 1.5+2.5=4 sec. EN
4 seconds sound 700 × 2 = 1400 meter
distance travel
% 1400 = 4 × vsound vsound=350 m/sec.

1.5 3
Cliff 1 person distance = 350 × = 350 × = 262.5 m
2 4
LL

2.5 5
Cliff 2 person distance = 350 × = 350 × = 437.5 m
2 4
Ex : parallel cliffs [ , person gun , fire Ist echo 2 second IInd echo 5 second
+; distance (velocity of sound in air is 350 m./sec.)
Sol : 2D distance travel time = 2+5=7 second 5 sec 2 sec
A

7
D= (350) × =1225 m.
2
Sound wave Intensity ( )
wave } transported ( ) power per unit area (unit watt/m2)
Decrease of intensity of sound wave with distance ( )
2
r1 1
I2 I1 point source I
r2 r2
Minimum intensity Human ear 2.5 × 10–12 2
( 4dB)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

There is no upper limit for the audible intensity of sound, howerver an intensity above
1 W/m2 ( 120 dB) produces a painful sensation in the ear..
( ,/ ;| 120dB / )
Intensity level of sound (Decibel)
Intensity in W / m 2 I
(Intensity level in dB) = 10 × log 12 Intensity level = 10log
0.937 10 W / m2 I0
 Physics Gutka 51

Sound Intensity (W/m2) Intensity level (dB)

Loudest noise achieved in Laboratory 10 3 210
Repture of eardrum 10 4 160
Threshold of pain 1 120
Normal conversation 10–6 60
Threshold of hearing 2.5 × 10–12 4

Ex. person 4 distance 70 dB sound produce ; ,

threshold sound level ( / ) 10 dB (maximum) distance

2
I I r12 4
Sol. 70 = 10log 1 I1 = 10 I0 , 7
10 = 10log 2 I2 = 10I0 I2 = I1 2 10I0 = 10 I0 7

I0 I0 r2 x
x2 = 106 × 42 x = 103 × 4 = 4000m = 4 Km.
P P
The speed of sound in air ( / ) :- v = 1.4

At STP (0°C, 1atm) : air pressure = P = 1.013 × 105 N/m2

air density = , vsound = 330 m/sec.
Ex. Three tuning forks of frequencies 200, 203 and 207 Hz are sounded together. Find out the beat frequency.
1 2 FG 3IJ 200 203 207
Sol. H 3K
3
1
3
2 3 FG 4 IJ
H 4K
EN 3

7
4
Divide 1 second
into 3, 4 or 7
equal divisions
4 4 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FG IJ
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 H K Ans.12
Eliminate common time instants. Total Maxima in one second 3 + 3 + 6 = 12
LL

Ex.
A

A [ train horn frequency train engine B horn

v 5 5 3
Sol. n' = n ; AB velocity = vs cos = 120 ×cos = 120 = 20 m/sec.
v v s cos 18 18 5
340
n' = ×640 = 680 Hz.
340 20
Ex. Mid point S Sound Source ( ), D Detector ( )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

1 Direct Sound wave, 2 Reflected sound wave

If Detector is Human ear then for CI ( ) path

difference = n where n = 1,2,3..........

(Human Ear responds to pressure variation) [No phase change of ]
If Detector is Displacement sensor then for CI path difference = n + /2 [Phase change of ]
In above question path difference = (65 + 65) – 120 = 10
52 Physics Gutka

Gaseous Mixer ( )

n1C V1 n2 C V2 n1CP1 n2 CP2

CVmix = CPmix =
n1 n2 n1 n2

n1CP1 n2CP2
R
mix
= nC n2 C V2 Note: CV
1 V1 1

n1 n2 n3 ..... n1 n2 n3
In general ....
mix 1 1 1 2 1 3 1

Latent Heat ( )

L Iceto water 80 cal / g , L Water to vapor 540 cal / g

Suppose you have an ice at –6°C and you want to convert it into steam at 100°C then,
–6°C 100°C )
mLice to water mL Water to vapour
6 C
Ice
ms1
temp A
0 C
Ice temp constant
0 C
Water
EN ms2
temp A
100 C
Water temp constant
100 C
Steam

It can also be shown graphically , )

LL

Black Body Radiation ( )

A

Vander Waal's Equation of state

a
P (V – b) = RT [for 1 mole]
V2
2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

a V a
P 2
– b =RT or P 2
(V – b) RT [for mole]
(V ) V
Here b = 4NVm N Number of molecules, Vm Volume of one molecule

8a a PC VC 3
Critical Constants : VC = 3b, TC = , PC = , R
27Rb 27b2 TC 8
Actual gas behaves as ideal gas most closely at low pressure & high temperature [Low density].
 Physics Gutka 53

Ex. Same quantity ( ) He O2 same heat supply %&

(a) He temperature increase (b) O2 temperature increase
(c) He O2 , temperature increase same
Sol. (a) U = µCv T & Q = W + U [ W = 0 Q = U]
3 5
T , , Cv Cv(for He)= R , Cv(for O2) = R
2 2

Note :- (same quantity) [;

Ex. 1 mole monoatomic ideal gas , path
2P0 B
A B , specific heat ( ) calculate

Q AB P0 A
Sol. Specific heat = T TA ; TB = 4TA [ P0V0 = RT
TA ; (2P0) (2V0) = RT
TB]
B

1 3 3
WAB = P0V0 + × P0V0 = P0V0 = RT
TA ( PV = RT
T ) V0 2V0
2 2 2

3 9
UAB = CV(TB – TA) = 1 × R(4TA – TA) = RT
T
2 EN 2 A
3 9 6RTA
QAB = WAB + UAB = RT
TA + RT
TA = 6RTA Specific heat = 3TA =2R
2 2

R
OR For polytropic process ( ; ) : PVx = constant : C = C V +
1 x

R 3 R
LL

Here P V so PV–1 = constant x = –1. Therefore C = CV + R 2R

1 1 2 2

Ex. 5g of steam at 100°C is mixed with 10 g of ice at 0°C. Choose correct alternative/s)
(Given swater = 1 cal/g°C, LF = 80 cal/g, LV = 540 cal/g)
(A) Equilibrium temperature of mixture is 160°C (B) Equilibrium temperature of mixture is 1000C
A

1 2
(C) At equilibrium, mixture contain 13 g of water (D) At equilibrium, mixture contain 1 g of steam
3 3
800 1000 10
Sol. Mass of heat condensed = = g
540 3

10 40 1
Total mass of water = 10+ = =13 g,
3 3 3

10 5 2
Total mass of steam = 5 – = = 1 g
3 3 3
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

Ans. B,C,D

Ex. At very low temperature the heat capacity ( / ) of crystals is given by C = aT3 where a is constant. In
this temperature range calculate entropy S of a crystal as a function of temperature T.

Ans. dS =
dQ
T
S =
dQ
T
=
CdT
T
=
aT 3 dT
T z
= aT2dT =
aT3
3 z
54 Physics Gutka

Gravitational Potential Intensity Potential Energy

) ) )
Earth surface GM GMm
E surface rˆ G.P.E. surface
GM R2 R
Vsurface
R
Earth centre E centre 0 3 GMm
G.P.E. centre
3GM 2 R
Vcentre
2R

Gauss law ( ) fields , Exact ( ) F 1/r2

Ex. When a satellite ( ) moves around the earth, the quantity which remains constant ( ) is :

(a) Angular velocity (b) Kinetic energy (c) Aerial velocity

(d) Angular momentum (e) Potential energy Ans. (c) & (d)

Note : circular orbit

EN
Potential energy constant satellite (orbit) elliptical ( ;)

Ex. A particle is projected from point A, that is at a distance 4R from the centre of the Earth,
30°
v1

with speed v1 in a direction making 30° with the line joining the centre of the Earth and
A
LL

point A, as shown. Find the speed v1 if particle passes grazing the surface of the earth. 4R
GM
Consider gravitational interaction only between these two. (use = 6.4 × 107 m2/s2)
R
] 4R A A R
v2
A

30° v1 ; ;
v1 ;
GM
( = 6.4 × 107 m2/s2 )
R

v2
Sol. Conserving angular momentum : m(v1 cos60°)4R = mv2R v1 =2.

GMm 1 GMm 1
Conserving energy of the system : mv12 mv 22
4R 2 R 2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

1 2 1 2 3 GM 1 GM 1 8000
v2 v1 v12 v1 64 106 m/s
2 2 4 R 2 R 2 2
Ex Two Coaxial short dipoles of dipole moments p 1 and p2 are separated by a distance r. Find out the magnitude
of electric force on p1 due to p2.

dE d 2kp2 6kp1p2
Ans. Force on a dipole = p p1
dr dr r 3 r4
 Physics Gutka 55

Ex. An electric dipole with dipole moment p C-m is placed in an electric field E 4000iˆ (N/C).
30
(3i 4j) 10

An external agent turns the dipole slowly until its electric dipole moment becomes 4iˆ 3jˆ × 10–30C-m.

The work done by the external agent is equal to ( }/ p (3i 4j) 10 30

C-m , }/
E 4000iˆ (N/C) {= , }/ / &/ ?
}/ 4iˆ 3jˆ × 10–30C-m } )
(A) 4 × 10–28 J (B) –4 × 10–28 J (C) 2.8 × 10–26 J (D) –2.8 × 10–26 J
Sol. Work done = Uf – Ui = ( p.E)f ( p.E)i = –(–16 × 10–27) – (–12 × 10–27) = 2.8 × 10–26 J Ans. (C)

Ex. A,B,C,D are the corners of a regular tetrahedron of side a. Three identical charges each Q are fixed at three
corners B, C and D. The magnitude of electric field intensity at the corner A is (A,B,C,D %a
, Q B, C D A {=
%&) E1

6Q 2 3Q A
(A) 2 (B)
4 0 a 2 0 a2

(C)
6Q
2 0 a2
EN (D)
2 3Q
4 0 a2
a

B D
2 a2 a/ 3
a 6Q
Sol. Net electric field = 3E1 cos = (3) Q 3 = Ans. (A)
4 a2 a 4 0 a2 C
0
LL

Ex. A small ball having a charge q and mass m is suspended at one end of a light

string of length and can rotate in vertical plane. A uniform electric field E
exist in the region in horizontal direction. Find the minimum horizontal velocity
required to be imparted to the ball (at its lowest position) so that it successfully
A

negotiates the loop. (q m , ,

; ? {= , { = E, {
{ ) , ; )

2
qE qE
(A) 5g (B) 5 g2 (C) 5 g (D) None of these
m m

qE
Sol. Particle will succesfully negotates the loop if at P, T=0 such that tan =
mg
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65

mv 2
At P, mg cos qE sin

By applying conservation mechanical energy between A and P

1 1 (3mg qE)(3mg qE)

mu2 = mv2 + mg (1+cos ) – qE sin u Ans. (D)
2 2 (mg) 2
(qE) 2
56 Physics Gutka

Ex. The arrangement shown consists of three elements.

(i) A thin rod of charge –3.0 C that forms a full circle of radius 6.0 cm.

–3.0 C , + 6.0 cm , 3
1
(ii) A second thin rod of charge 2.0 C that forms a circular arc of radius 4.0
cm and concentric with the full circle, subtending an angle of 90° at the 2
centre of the full circle.

2.0 C , + 4.0 cm ;
; 90°

(iii) An electric dipole with a dipole moment that is perpendicular to a radial line and has magnitude
1.28 × 10–21 C-m.

1.28 × 10–21C-m ; }/ , }/

Find the net electric potential in volts at the centre.

Sol.
EN
Potential due to dipole at the centre of the circle is zero.

K.( 3 10 6 )
Potentials due to charge on circle = V1 =
6 10 2
LL
K.(2 10 6 )
Potential due to arc V2 = Net potential = V1 + V2= 0 Ans. (0)
4 10 2
A

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\05 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 57

Junction Questions (Use of KCL)

(A) Electric Resistance Networks

I1 + I2 = 0
V1 V2
V1 VJ V2 VJ R1 R2
0 ; VJ 1 1
R1 R2
R1 R2
I1 + I2 + I3 = 0
V1 VJ V2 VJ V3 VJ
0
R1 R2 R3
V1 V2 V3 V
R1 R2 R3 R
VJ vJ
1 1 1 1
R1 R2 R3 R
(B) Capacitor Networks
EN q1 + q2 = 0
C1(V1 – VJ) + C2(V2 – VJ) = 0

C1 V1 C2 V2
VJ
C1 C2
q1 + q2 + q3 = 0
LL

C1(V1 – VJ) + C2(V2 – VJ) + C3(V3 – VJ)= 0

C1 V1 C2 V2 C3 V3 CV
VJ VJ
C1 C2 C3 C
A

(C) Heat Resistance networks (In conduction of heat)

1K1 2 K2 1K1 2K2 3K 3 K

J J J
K1 K2 K1 K2 K3 K

Electrolysis DC/Low frequency AC use Electrolysis I = I+ + I– but I+ I–

Electrolysis obey ohm's law (V = IR) if electrodes are soluble.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

Ex. Calculate the time in which capacitor gets fully charged for following circuits :

(i) (ii) Ans. (i) 0 (ii)

58 Physics Gutka

Ex. capacitor voltage figure according change

flow current variation v
t
dq dV
capacitor q = CV = i = C
dt dt
i
dV t
As V = V0 sin t = V0cos t i = V0 C cos t
dt

COMPARISON OF HEAT CONDUCTION WITH ELECTRICAL CONDUCTION

ELECTRICAL CONDUCTION THERMAL CONDUCTION
1. Electric charge flows from higher potential to 1. Heat flows from higher temperature to
lower potential. lower temperature.
2. The rate of flow of charge is called electric 2. The rate of flow of heat is called as heat
dq dQ
current I Current I
dt dt
3. By Ohm's law 3. The heat current is given as
V1 V2 Potentialdifference T1 T2 Temperaturedifference
I I
Re Electrical resis tan ce RTh Thermalresis tan ce
4. 4.
Re

where
A A
is resistivity and
EN
is conductivity
R Th
KA
where k is thermal conductivity

Ex. Find the potential difference between X & Y. R 2A

X Y
25
Sol . circuit flow current = 2 25V 10
R 10
LL

R = 2.5 VX – VY = 2 × R = 5 volt
Ex. For the ckt. shown in figure below the current must not exceed 1 mA
A

,/ 1mA ,)
P 1
Sol . I2R= P I2= R1 maximum current = = 10 mA
R 10 103

14 14
R2 maximum current = = 5 mA ; R3 maximum current = = 1 mA
10 10 3
250 103

% Imax = 1 mA
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

Ex. Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter

(Galvanometer series High R) (Galvanometer parallel low R)
High

High Resistance
G
Resistance G
 Physics Gutka 59

Note :- Circuit ) voltmeter circuit element parallel across potential

difference measure ammeter circuit element series flow
current (see following example)
High R Low R
V G

A G
R1 R2 R1 R2

E
Ideal voltmeter resistance = , Ideal ammeter resistance = 0
10 C
10
Ex. Steady state Battery flow current = = 2A
3 2
(Note : Steady state Capacitor resistance ( ) 3
2
wire behave % current 2 flow )
r R
A 10V

Ex .
R r
EN
Calculate the current through AB with direction if R > r

I1 r R I2
B (AB / ,; R > r) A

I1–I2
E
E E E FG 1 – 1 IJ from A to B I2
Ans. I1 = & I2 = I1 – I2 = H r RK r
LL
R B I1
2r 2R 2

Ex. circuit bulb B2 brightness glow parallel

E
2
V
connection voltage same % =P , B1
R
A

power Circuit power consumption 25W,220V

B2
P=P1 + P2 = 25 + 100 = 125 watt.
100W,220V
Bulb I 1 1 1
P1,V R R1 R2
Bulb II
P 1 1 1 P1 P2
P,V 220V
P2,V 2 = =R +R =V +V P= P1 + P2
V R 1 2 1 2

V V
Note :- bulb parallel connected power bulb brightness
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

glow
Ex. resistance thermometer 10°C 100°C resistance 2.71 3.70 temp.
resistance 3.26 ?
R R1 1
Sol. By using R R = we get = 60°C
2 1 2 1
60 Physics Gutka

Ex. circuit power consumption calculate

1 1 1
110V,50W 110V,50W
Sol . = P + P use bulb rated voltage, supply
P 1 2

voltage , questions bulb resistance calculate solve

; bulb identical % same voltage 110V 220V
bulb voltage rated voltage rated power consume
% circuit power consumption 50 + 50 = 100W

Ex. circuit ammeter A flow current calculate B1

40W
B2
(Note : question bulbs rated voltage

supply voltage ) B3
B4

Sol . Equivalent circuit (/; figure

60W
200W
parallel connected )
Power consumption
= P = P1 + P2 + P3 + P4 B1 B2 B3 B4
220V
= 40 + 100 + 60 + 200 = 400 watt. EN
400
P = VI I = ampere
220
Ex. electric bulb rated voltage 220 volts ] 220 V, 5Hz source connect : &:
1 T
[Glows intermittently] ; T= second second Intensity maximum
5 4
LL
zero
Ex. Write down the readings of ammeter.

14 4 10
Ans. A1 A ; A2 A ; A3 A
11 11 11
A

E1 E2
..........
r1 r2 1 1 1
Hint : Use Eeff = & r = r + r + ..........
1 1 1 2
.......... eff

r1 r2
Ex. Cu electrode CuSO4 ohmic

Carbon electrode CuSO4 non ohmic

Ex.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 61

Earth's Magnetic Field )

Earth is a natural source of magnetic field. ; {= )
Earth's magnetic field is mainly due to circulating electric currents induced in the molten liquid &
other conducting materials inside the earth.

EN
Place Point – Axis Line – Meridian Vertical plane –
LL

and
A

exist.

magnetic (apparent)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

magnetic
most part of
most part of
62 Physics Gutka

Geographical north

BH This diagram is for Northern hemisphere)

g (Gravitational acceleration)

B BV

A freely suspended magnetic needle stays in north-south in magnetic meridian.

At North pole B vertically downward BH = 0, BV = B
At South pole B vertically upward
In both hemisphere direction of BH is towards geographical north. BH )

Two Special Needles :–

Compass Needle
EN
[It is a short & light magnetic needle, free to
Dip Needle (used in Dip circle)
[It is a short & light magnetic needle free
rotate about a vertical axis.] to rotate about a horizontal axis.]
Affected by horizontal magnetic field. (BH) Affected by total magnetic field. (B)
Stays in equilibrium when it is in M.M. Stays in equilibrium in any vertical plane.
Measure angle of declination ( ). Measure angle of true dip ( ) if it is placed in M.M.
Always rotates in the horizontal plane. Always rotates in vertical plane.
LL

• Isoclinic lines :
Imaginary lines on the earth's surface which join the points having same inclination (angle of dip)
• Aclinic line
A

It is the line joining the places of zero dip. This line is also known as magnetic equator and goes nearly
side by side with geographical equator.
• Isogonic lines:
These are the lines which join the places of equal declination.
• Agonic lines
This is the line of zero declination.
Ex. What is the angle of dip at the pole ? Ans. 90°
Ex. What is the angle of dip at the equator ? Ans. 0°
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

Ex. The magnetic south pole of the earth is near the ; / ):-
(1) Geographical north pole (2) Geographical south pole
(3) Geographical east pole (4) Geographical west pole Ans. (1)
 Physics Gutka 63

charge velocity v move ] electric magnetic field observe ; charge

velocity (v) move [ respect charge stationary] electric field observe

E Absolute field
B Relative field

frame S charge Q observer X fixed ] observer Y frame S' fixed ] observer X will observe
only electric field. Observer Y will observe both electric & magnetic field.
Ex. The permanent magnetic moment of the atoms of a material is not zero. The material

(a) must be paramagnetic

EN ;
(b) must be diamagnetic
; )

(c) must be ferromagnetic

(d) may be paramagnetic (e) may be ferromagnetic Ans. (d & e)
Ex. Tick the correct options

(a) All electrons have magnetic moment ( ; )

LL

(b) All protons have magnetic moment ( ; )

(c) All nuclei have magnetic moment ( ; )

(d) All atoms have magnetic moment ( ; ) Ans. (a & b)

A

e2 Fe v I
2 2

Ex. Fe =
4 0 r2
& Fm =
4
0
GH r JK
2

Fm v
2
1
Fe = 0 0
v2 =
c
2 0 0
=
c
2 (Note : Fm<<Fe v<<c)

Ex. Steady current ( / ) • Charged beam ( )

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\06 NOTE.P65

I2
0 Like pair F Repulsive
Fm = Here Fe >> Fm (Repulsive force) Unlike pair F Attractivce
2 d
Fe = 0 (Attractive force) Net force decided by electric force
64 Physics Gutka

)
d2x kx 2
Standard equation = – 2bv or x 2b x x 0
dt2 m 0

k
Here = = natural freq. of oscillation, –kx is the Restoring force ( ) & –2bv respresents
0
m
damping force ( )
Case I : Heavy damping ( ) b > 0
[dead beat motion]
Ex. motion of simple pendulum in very viscous oil
In this case motion is non oscillatory
Case II : Critical damping ( ) b = 0

Ex. Pointer ( ) instrument critically damped condition

mean position EN
In this case motion is non oscillatory
Case III : Light damping ( ) b < 0

In this case motion is oscillatory

2
x = e–bt (A1cos t + A2sin t) where = 0 b2
LL
Note : Tdamped > Tundamped ( damped
= < undamped
= )
0
A

2 average energy stored per cycle 0

Q = Quality factor = =
Average energy dissipated per cycle 2b
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

Ex. Damped LCR circuit

di q d2 q R dq 1 2 1 R 0L
L iR 0 or q 0 Here 0 ;2b Q=
dt c dt2 L dt LC LC L R
 Physics Gutka 65

d2 x
m = – kx – 2bv + F(t) where F(t) = Fsin t = m f sin t (periodic external force ; )
dt2
2 k
x 2b x 0 x f sin t Here =
0
m
f
In steady state the solution of above equation is x = A sin ( t – ) = sin ( t – )
2 2 2
( 0 ) 4b2 2

dA
Amplitude resonance ( ) condition 0 = 2
2b2
d 1 0

dx f
velocity v = = cos ( t – )
dt d 2
0
2
i 4 b2 2

dv
Velocity resonance ( ) condition 0 =
d 2 0

EN
•
2H 30 F
LL

50Hz, 200V 50Hz, 200V 50Hz, 200V

circuit , circuit , circuit ,

Z 0, Pav = 0 Z 0, Pav 0 Z 0, P = 0 av

Irms 0, Erms 0 Irms 0, Erms 0 Irms 0, E 0 rms

A

100 100 50 50 100 100 50 50

•

50Hz, 220V 50Hz, 220V V V

Power consumption in ckt A 1 Power consumption in ckt A
1
Power consumption in ckt B 2 Power consumption in ckt B

10
Ex. Steady state Battery flow current = = 5A
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

2 100mH

(Note : Steady state inductor zero resistance 3

2

wire behave % 3 current flow

10V

)
66 Physics Gutka

Ex. instant ( ) V0 = 1 volt instant 0.5 flow 1

current inductor across voltage 0.5

Sol. V0 = 1 volt % 2 across voltage = V0 = 1 volt 2 V0
2V
0.5H
2 flow current = 1/2 A
1 voltage drop = 2 – 1 = 1 volt,
resistance flow current=1/1=1A
0.5 flow current = 1 – 1/2 = 1/2 A
0.5 across potential drop = (0.5) (1/2) = 0.25 volt
% inductor across voltage = V 0 – 0.25 = 0.75 volt
Ex. Write down the frequency of oscillation of current in the

inductor for the given circuit.

1
Ans.
6 LC
R L L
• Resonance
V1 = Reading of voltmeter 1 = V EN V1 V2
V2 = Reading of voltmeter 2 = 0
V3 = Reading of voltmeter 3 = V V3
[Note :- Series R–L–C ckt. resonance C L across
V,
L V
voltage = QV = V= opposite phase
R RC
LL
; Q quality factor ]
• Resonance
V A1
A1 = Reading of ammeter 1 = V C = RC C
L
A2
A

V V R L
A2 = Reading of ammeter 2 = =
L L L
A3
R
V
A3 = Reading of ammeter 3 = A4
R V
V
A4 = Reading of ammeter 4 =
R
(Note :- Parallel R–L–C ckt. resonance C L equal current opposite phase flow )

Ex. AC circuit , instrument across voltage current % v = 10cos t, i = 5sin( t + 30°)

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

instrument power consumption

Ans. Power dissipation in the instrument = VIcos current voltage phase difference
v = 10cos t = 10sin( t + 90°) %v i phase difference [( t + 90°) – ( t + 30°)] = 60°

10 5 50
% power consumption = cos60° = = 12.5
2 2 4
 Physics Gutka 67

Ex. 90V, 27W d.c. bulb 150V–50 Hz. a.c. supply series inductance

V 2 90 90 W 3
Ans. DC bulb , R = = =300 I = = A
W 27 V 10 R
L

V 150
circuit , Z = = 3 10 = 500 500 = R 2 ( L) 2 150V, 50Hz
I

400 4
L= (500)2 (300)2 L = 400 L = = H
2 50

Ex. 90V, 27W d.c. bulb 150V–50 Hz. a.c. supply series resistance

150
Bulb , R = 300 , I =0.3A R1 + R = = 500 R = 200 R1
0.3
Ex. A.C. source frequency increase inductive reactance (XL = L) increase R

1
capacitive reactance (XC = ) decrease
EN
C
(Note:- In pure d.c. circuit XL = 0 and XC = 150V, 50Hz

Reading of A
Ex. For given ckt. reading of ammeter changes with
V C
as shown in figure (given V = constant)

V V
LL
[ reading of A = X V c
C 1/ c
2
1
Ex. R–L–C series ckt. frequency zero increase impedance z R2 L decrease
C
resonance ( ) minimum increase

Ex. Fixed inductance radio set capacitance increase radio set, lower frequency station
A

1
[ tune frequency = ]
LC L B1

Ex. B1, B2 identical bulbs circuit bulbs brightness L C value C

B2
1
depend ; XL > XC or L B2 Brightness
C V,

XL < XC B1

[Note :- increase bulb B2 brightness increase bulb B1 decrease

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

increase XC XL increase
C
For given ckt. the current through L is 3A while the current through C is 4A.
Then current drawn from the generator is (4 – 3) = 1A.
[Note :- ckt. L C current opposite phase (i.e. 180° L
generator
phase difference) ]
68 Physics Gutka

Electrostatic Field–Conservative field ( { =& { =)

z E. d 0 or E 0 Here
x
i
y
j
z
k

If E is time–varying then the field produced is always non–conservative

( Time varying E produces time varying B) z E. d

d
dtzB . dS 0

Behaviour of capacitor & Inductor at t = 0 & t = (steady state) –

Circuit Element t = 0 t =

where RC
EN
Resistance offered by capacitor
RL Resistance offered by inductor.
LL

Ex. Calculate current through battery at t = 0 & t =

A

Ans. at t = 0 (Initially) at t = (Steady state)

6 6
I = = 2A I = = 2A
25
. 05. 25
. 05.

Ex. Find out reading of meters at steady state ( )

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

& charge stored on capacitor.

Ans. A1 1 ampere
A2 0
A3 1 ampere
Charge on capacitor 24µC
 Physics Gutka 69

Ex. An LC circuit contains a 20 mH inductor and a 50 F capacitor with an initial charge of 10 C. The resistance
of the circuit is negligible Let the instant when circuit is closed is t = 0.
(a) What is the total energy stored initially. ( )
(b) What is the natural frequency of the circuit. ( )
(c) At what time is the energy stored is completely magnetic ( ;).
(d) At what times is the total energy shared equally between inductor and the capacitor is equal.

1 q 2 1 (10 10 3 )2
Sol. (a) UE= = × = 1.0 J
2 C 2 50 10 6

1 103
(b) = = 103 rad/sec f= 159 Hz
LC 2
(c) q = q0 cos t
Energy stored is completely magnetic (i.e. electrical energy is zero, q = 0)

T 3T 5T 1 EN
at t = , , ............where T = = 6.3 m sec.
4 4 4 f
q0
(d) Energy is shared equally between L and C when charge on capacitor become
2
T 3T 5T
so, at t = , , ........energy is shared equally between L and C
8 8 8
LL

Ex. For this circuit band width

R 10
BW = – = = 6 =105
2 1
L 100 10
A

Ex. Calculate steady state current in L1

( (t = ) L1 / )

di1 F
L2 I E
Here VL1 = VL 2
L1
dt
= L2 di 2 L1i1 = L2i2 but i1 + i2=
E
R
. Therefore i1= L GH L2
JK R
dt 1

Ex. inductance coil i figure according change

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

across voltage drop variation

di
voltage drop = v = L = L × slope OA part
dt

slope +ve AB part slope –ve

70 Physics Gutka

1 2
Einstein's equation h 0 mv max 0 eV0
2
h = photon (entire energy) electron absorb
0
=work function ( ): minimum energy electron metal surface [ ;
(with zero kinetic energy)] 0
=h 0 0
( ) (threshold frequency) frequency
electron ejection (electron )

1
mv2max = maximum kinetic energy of ejected electron = eV0 V0 stopping potential ( )
2
Photo electron (collector)
[; (number of photo electrons emitted per second)
(incident radiation) (intensity) (proportional) % saturation current ( / )

intensity depend I nh

(Emission of electrons)
EN ; ; frequency depend
electron emit ( ) ; Intensity ( ) depend
Ex. Discharge tube hydrogen atoms 4th orbit 2nd orbit transition ( ) emit light sodium
, ; situation Photo electron KEmax = 0.73 eV

(a) Find minimum kinetic energy of the Photo electron.

LL
(b) Find the work function of the sodium atom.

Sol. (a) KEmin = 0 (Photoelectric effect emit photo electron Kinetic energy 0 KEmax. )

1 1
(b) Photon energy = 13.6 2 = 2.55 eV h = + KEmax = 2.55 – 0.73 = 1.82 eV
2 42 0 0
A

Photocurrent
( / )
Ex. Intensity constant saturation current constant
I=constant
2 > 1 )
2
> 1
(2nd situation photon energy )
2

% 2nd situation , KEmax2 = eV02 V02 V01

Potential )
Photocurrent
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

Ex. Frequency constant stopping potential same ( / ) I3 > I 2 > I 1

I3
I2
I1
Intensity ( ) increase saturation current
at constant frequency
)

( / ) <+
V0 Potential )
 Physics Gutka 71

Ex. Photo electric tube current :–

(a) Incident photon freq. increase decrease

(b) Incident photon freq. increase increase

(c) Incident photon intensity increase decrease

(d) Incident photon intensity increase increase

Ans. (d) questions current normally saturation current frequency depend intensity
depend I nh here h =constant so I n (n = number of photons per second per unit area)

(De Broglie Hypothesis =h/p)

If moving electron & photon have same wavelength ( – same)
EN
Ratio of total energy of electron & energy of photon = ?
For Photon For Electron

h hc hc h h hc2 hc2 E electron c

= = = = = = = E photon v
p pc E Photon p mv vmc2 vE electron
LL

Ratio of kinetic energy of electron & energy of photon = ?

For Photon For Electron

h hc hc h h KE e h
= = =E = = E Photon 2mc
p pc p
A

Photon 2m KE e

Bohr's model [ model single electron lighter atoms ( ) , applicable

Ex. H, He+, Li++, Be+++ etc]
Bohr's postulates ( )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

(i) Electron allowed orbits nucleus around ( ) ? orbits ( ) ;

h
(radiations) emit orbits , angular momentum ( ; ) integral multiple
2

h
( ) mvr = n n=1, 2, 3, 4, 5......
2
72 Physics Gutka

(ii) Electron orbits (definite) energy (Etotal = Ekinetic + Epotential) allowed orbit energy

certain value associate

(ii) electron orbit energy E2 ] orbit energy E1(E1 < E2) jump ,
energy difference ( = E2 – E1) energy photon emit

1 Ze e mv 2 h e
,% 2
mvr n
4 0 r r 2
Z e
n2 Z2
solve rn 0.53 Å En 13.6 2 eV Nucleus
Z n

c Z Z
vn m / s where c = 3 × 108 m/sec. or v n 2.88 106 m/s
137 n n

Z2 Z2
Note : TE = PE + KE & TE = – KE = PE/2 KE n 13.6 eV ; PE n 2 13.6 eV
n2 n2

Ex Hydrogen like atom , energy level diagram

(a) Find the value of Z of hydrogen like atom. EN 0 n=

(b) Determine its first excitation potential and ionization potential -2.18 n=5
(c) Can it absorbs a photon of 40 eV ? -3.4 n=4
-6.04 n=3
(d) Can it absorbs a photon of 51 eV ?
-13.6 n=2
(e) Can it absorbs a photon of 56 eV ?
-54.4 n=1
(eV)
(f) Calculate the radius of its 2nd bohr orbit
LL

(g) Calculate the KE & PE of electron in the 3rd orbit.

Ans (a) 2 (b) 40.8 V, 54.4 V (c) No (d) Yes (e) Yes (f) 1.058Å (g) 6.04 eV, – 12.08eV
A

Important points about Quantum Numbers and Atomic Structure

• Principal quantum number (n) – possible value n = 1, 2, 3, 4, ...............
• Orbital quantum number ( ) – possible value from 0 to n – 1
• Orbital magnetic quantum number (m ) – possible value are (2 + 1) integer from – to +

1 1
• spin quantum number (s) – possible values are + &–
2 2

h h
• Orbital Angular momentum 1 • Spin angular momentum s s 1
2 2
• Maximum number of electrons in an orbit ) = 2n2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

• Maximum number of electrons in a sub orbit ) = 2(2 + 1)

• Ionization energy of nth state (n ) E En E n eV E 0

• Ionization potential ) of nth state E En En V where V volt

• Excitation potential ) of nth stats = (En+1 – En) V

 Physics Gutka 73

Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. A laser produces a beam of light whose wave all have
the same frequency (Monochromatic) and are in phase with one another (Coherent). The radiation of every
laser is extremely intense & directional.
CO2 laser : Most efficient high power laser useful for cutting & heating.
Ex. laser
(1) Ruby laser (2) CO2 laser (3) He-Ne laser (4) Semiconductor type laser Ans. (1)

Wavelength of K line

1 2 1 1 4 1216 I
R Z 1 Å )
12 22 3R Z 1
2
Z 1
2

hc 12400
Continuous X-ray spectrum : min
EN Å
eV V
Ex. Tungsten , K, L, M atomic energy level % 69.5 keV, 11.3 keV 2.30 keV ,
characteristic ( )K K lines , required minimum accelerating potential =
ionisation energy ( ) = 69.5 KeV
hc 12400
accelerating potential , min Å 0.178Å
eVmin 69.5 103
LL

hc 12400
K , wavelength = (69.5 –11.3) × 103 =
(69.5 11.3) 103
Å =21.3 pm=0.213Å

12400
K , wavelength =
(69.5 2.30) 103
= 18.4 pm
A

• Magic Numbers : 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82, 126 nuclei number [; nucleons
; ; [; ) ] stable
4 2 16 8 40 20
2 He 8 O 20 Ca
Ex. , , , 208
82 Pb126
• (The Bohr Magneton) : atomic magnetic dipole moment unit : use
Bohr magneton = magnetic dipole moment of the electron in 1st Bohr orbit in Hydrogen atom
e eh
r2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

= (equivalent current) × (area)

B 2 r 4 m
v
Properties of nuclear forces ( ; ) :
(i) Strongest force [per nucleon high binding energy ]
(ii) Short range [nucleus size ]

Binding Energy
(iii) Saturation ( ) 8MeV
Nucleon
74 Physics Gutka

(iv) Spin dependent ( )

(v) Tensor (non central) nature
(vi) Charge independence ( )
(viii) Exchange force Yukawa according mesons exchange

Ex. –particle 250 kV , gold nucleus (Z = 79) accelerate ( ) nucleus

– minimum distance 4.55 × 10–13m

1 q1q 2 9 109 79 1.6 10 19

q1V = 4 . rmin.= m = 4.55 × 10–13 m
0 rmin. 250 10 3

Ex. Which one of the following represents a pair of mirror nuclie ?

(a) 15
7
N & 158
O (b) 16
8
N & 17
8
O (c) 27
60
N & 30
69
O (d) None of these
Ans. (a) (Hint : Mirror nuclei Same A ; Z, N interchange)
An electron cannot exist in the nucleus of an atom because its de Broglie wavelength is large than the
size of the nucleus.
Ex. A stationary nucleus of mass m emits - radiation of energy E. The recoiled energy ( ) of the
nucleus is...........
p2 E E2
Ans. Erecoiles = where p= =momentum of -radiation Erecoiled =
2m c EN 2mc 2
LL

A A 4 4
– decay ZX Z 2X 2 He
A

–
– decay ZX
A
Z 1Y
A
1e
0 & +
decay ZX
A
Z 1Y
A
1e
0

A * A
– decay ZX ZX

All the –particle coming from a particular decay scheme have the same energy
[Emit –particle energy (nucleus) characteristic( ) ]
–particles energy spectrum discrete
nuclei emit –particle energy (or speed) approximately same
Antineutrino existence –particles energy spectrum continuous
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

–decay energy 0.018 MeV 1.66 MeV % –decay electron maximum possible
energy 1.66 MeV
–decay electron antineutrino positron neutrino emit ( )
Beta particles, cathode rays, photo electrons identical Beta particles nuclear transformation ;
generate cathode ray, photo electrons, thermions present (free electrons
)
 Physics Gutka 75

–decay, Z > 83 (, A > 209) nuclei )

Electron capture (Competitor of positron emission). In this process electron is absorbed by nuclear proton
which is thereby transformed into a neutron p+ + e– n0

EN
Geocentric theory :
(All the heavenly bodies like sun, stars, planets, moon etc are moving around the earth, which is stationary
and is taken as the centre of the universe Ptolmy ( a Greek astronomer)
LL

Heliocentric theory :
(Sun is stationary & earth as well as other planets are revolving around it) Copernicus (1543)

Note :– In 498 AD a great Indian mathematician & astronomer Arya Bhatta from his observations concluded
that the various facts (like solar eclipse, moon eclipse, formation of day & night etc.) can be very easily
A

explained by considering that earth revolves round the sun and also rotates about its own axis. Due to
lack of communication his ideas could not be communicated to the western philosphers.
The sun is the only luminous body in our solar system.

Hottest & smallest planet Mercury ( )

Brightest planet (Earth's sister) Venus ( )

Heaviest & biggest planet Jupiter ( )

Farthest, coldest & lightest planet Pluto ( ) Note :

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65

Nearest planet to the earth Venus ( )

Maximum value of albedo Venus ( ) 0.85 Surface of Venus is covered with dense clouds

Minimum value of albedo Mercury ( ) 0.06 No atmosphere

Albedo for moon ( ) 0.07 No atmosphere at moon.

Retrograde Rotation (rotates about its axis from east to west) Venus ( ) & Uranus ( :. )
76 Physics Gutka

c
Ex. particle rest mass m0 velocity move particle mass, momentum, total
2
energy kinetic energy ( ) value

m0 m0 m0
Sol. mass m = = 2
= = m0 2
1 ( v / c) 2
c/ 2 1
1 1
c 2

FG c IJ
Momentum = mv = (m0 2 ) × H 2K = m0c

Total Energy = mc2 = 2 m0c = 1.41 m0c

2 2

K.E. = Total Energy – Rest Mass Energy = 1.41 m0c2 – m0c2 = 0.41m0c2

Ex. Rest mass of electron (

m0c2 = 9.1 × 10–31 ×(3 ×108)2J =

. 10
91
EN 31
(3 108 )2
)

eV = 0.51 MeV = 511 keV

16
. 10
16

electron-positron pair ( ; ) produce ( ) , photon minimum energy

2 × 0.51 = 1.02 MeV
LL

Ex. How much mass is lost when 1kg of water at 0°C turns to ice at 0°C ?

[0°C , 0°C { ]
Sol. E = mL = 1000 g × 80 cal/g = 8 × 104cal = 8 × 104 × 4.2J =3.36 × 105 J

Einstein mass energy equivalence relation ( )

A

3.36 105
E = mc2 m lost ) mass m =
(3 108 )2
= 3.73 × 10–12 kg

Ex. Ho w much energy will be obtain ed if 8 g of mass be complet ely converted in to

energy? (8 )
72 1013
Sol. E = mc2 = (8 × 10–3) (3 × 108)2 = 72 × 1013 J = eV = 4.5 × 1033 eV
1.6 10 19
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\07 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 77

An open-circuited p – n diode :–
p n
• Width of depletion layer( ; ) decreases

if doping increases.
Charge
density +
2 VB 1 1
Width of depletion layer = –
e Na Nd
Electric
where Permittivity of medium field E

VB Barrier Potential
Na Density of Acceptor atoms
Potential
Nd Density of Donor atoms

Width of depletion layer increases if temperature increases (Temperature increase minority

charge carriers <+ inner electric field majority carrier diffusion
depletion layer width <+ ) EN
LL
A

Diffusion current (idf) due to motion of the majority carriers

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

Drift current (idr) due to motion of the minority carriers. Drift current is independent of the magnitude
or direction of the external potential (Because it senses no barrier)
The drift current (idr) in a p–n junction is from n–side to p–side.
The diffusion current ( / ) [idf] in a p–n junction is from p–side to n–side.
If idf > idr then p–n junction is FB.
If idr > idf then p–n junction is RB.
78 Physics Gutka

JUNCTION BREAKDOWN [VBR]

Normal ( ;) reverse voltage reverse current (Is) ; reverse voltage
increase , point reverse current value <+ (Sudden rise)
reverse voltage critical value breakdown voltage (VBR) Junction breakdown
doping
Junction Breakdown : IR

Zener breakdown
(Heavily doped junction
having narrow depletion layer)
V
Avalanche breakdown
(Lightly doped junction
having wide depletion layer)
Avalanche Zener
breakdown breakdown

p-n junction , hole p side n side diffuse ) n - side 1 bond

bond break free electron p-side bond [hole movement ]
complete EN
Diode : ideal diode : VA > VB diode zero resistance wire replace

A B ; VA > VB A B

; diode knee (threshold) voltage VA – VB > VKnee

(Note : VKnee voltage drop ] battery )

LL

Zener diode :–

[ Note - Zener diode voltage drop VZ )

A

100
10V 1
Ex. Diode ideal , diode current

Sol. Equivalent circuit : 1 resistance current flow (why ?) 10V 100

1

10
% I = = 0.1A
100

Ex. Calculate the current through diode in following different situations if Vknee = 0.7 V & rf = 1
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 4

0.65V 1.7V 2V

1.7 0.7 1
i = 0 i = A i=0 [ diode is RB ]
1 4 5
 Physics Gutka 79

Determine I in each case [Assume Rdiode = 0 if not given]

(a) (b)

Ans. I = 0 Ans. I=1mA

(c) (d)

10 0.7 0.3 10 0.3 0.7

Ans. I = = 0.90 mA Ans. I = = 0.90 mA
10 103 10 103

(e) (f)

Ans. I =
10 0.7 0.3
10 103
= 0.90 mA
EN Ans. I =
20 0
10 103
= 2mA
Note : (Zener diode acts as simple diode in FB)
LL
(g) (h)

20 10 20 0 10
Ans. I = = 1mA Ans. I = = 1mA
10 103 10 103
Ge(0.3V)
A

V0

Ex. Si(0.7V) 5K situation V0 = 12 – 0.7 = 11.3 V

12V

Si

Ex. , circuit V0 value ; Si Ge diode Ge +

conduction ( ) 0.7 V 0.3 V V0

9.7V
Sol . Ge diode conduct % V0 = 9.7 – 0.3 = 9.4 volt
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

Depletion layer ( ; ) Electric field value order 105 N/C

V .
01
E= , V ~ 0.1 volt, d ~ 10–6 meter, E= = 105 N/C or 105 V/m
d 10 6
Diode use Main Use rectification (AC DC convert )
diode detector ( ) : use Normally AM (amplitude modulated) signal
detection , use
80 Physics Gutka

Ex. IB = 20 A VCE = 4.6 V ] VBE value calculate

VCC=+10V
Sol. Vcc – IB(470 × 103) – VBE = 0
2.7K
VBE = 10 – 20 × 10–6 (470 × 103) = 10 – 9.4 = 0.6 V 470K
C
VCC VCE 10 4.6 B E
IC = = = 2 × 10–3 A
(2.7 103 ) (2.7 103 )

IC 2 10 3
Current gain = I = = 100
B 20 10 6

Ex. For the circuit shown in figure,

IC IC
draw the dc load line. FG 0, V IJ
CC

H R K C
IB
+
Sol . VCE = VCC – ICRC Load line
VCE RC
IC = 0 VCE = VCC No signal

VCC O
VCE
(VCC,0) VBB VCC
VCE = 0 IC =
RC EN V
Ex . Half wave rectifier ( )
ideal diode
+ t
Im Vm v=Vmsin t V0
Load RL average current Iav = = (rf R L ) V0
LL

t
Vm Vm
diode is ideal Iav = R Vav= = output voltage average value
L

Vm
Vrms= = output voltage rms value
2
A

DC output power (Im / )2 R L 0.406 R L 0.406

= rectifier efficiency = = 2 = (r R ) =
rf
AC input power (Im / 2) (rf R L ) f L
(1 )
RL

max
= 40.6% (diode ideal )

2 2
output effective a.c.component Iac I2rms I2dc Irms Vrms
Ripple factor= 1 1
output d.c. component I dc I dc Iav Vav

2
Vm
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

Half wave rectifier Ripple factor = 2 1 = 1.21 Here Idc = Iav

Vm

half wave rectifier output ac component, dc component

ac dc conversion , ineffective PIV (Peak inverse voltage) = Vm
 Physics Gutka 81

Ex . Centre – Tap Full wave Rectifier

Vin
1st half cycle D1 conducts

2nd half cycle D2 conducts

PIV = 2Vm
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2

Full wave Bridge reactifier

Vin

1st half cycle D1& D2 conducts

2nd half cycle D3& D4 conducts

D1D2 D3D4 D 1D2 D 3D 4 PIV = Vm

2Vm Vm
diode ideal RL average voltage Vav = Vrms = = output voltage rms value
2
2 2
0.812
EN Vrms Vm / 2
= = 81.2% (diode ideal ) Ripple factor = 1= 1 = 0.48
(1 rf / R L ) max Vav 2Vm /

Ex. Transformer rectifier ( ) necessary ( )

(a) Half wave rectifier (b) Centre tap full wave rectifier (c) Bridge type full wave rectifier Ans. (b)

• COMPARISON OF TRANSITOR CONNECTIONS

LL

Characteristic ( ) Common Base Common Emitter Common Collector

Input resistance (Ri) (Low) /; (Medium) (High)
Output resistance (Ro) (High) /; (Medium) (Low)
Voltage gain >> 1 (High) >> 1 (High) < 1 (Low)
Current gain < 1 (Low) >> 1 (High) >> 1 (High)
A

Use High frequency Audio frequency Impedance

( ) Amplifier Power Amplifier matching
Phase relationship Same (0°) Reversed Same (0°)
between input & output ( rad)

High frequency ckts computers npn transistor use [ npn majority charge carrier
electron effective mass (inertia) holes respect fast ]
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65
82 Physics Gutka

LOGIC GATES : AT A GLANCE

Names Symbol Boolean Truth table Electrical Circuit diagram
Expression analogue (Practical Realisation)

D1
A A
A Y
Y B
OR Y=A+B
B B R
D2

D1
A Y A A
B
AND Y = A. B Y
B B R
D2
VCC

NOT VCC
or A Y Y= A A
Inverter RC
EN RB Y
A

VCC
D1
NOR A A RC
(OR + Y A B RB Y
B Y A B
NOT)
B R1
LL
D2

VCC
D1
A RC
NAND RB Y
A A
A

(AND Y Y A. B B B
NOT) B R1
D2

XOR A
Y Y A.B A.B
(ExclusiveOR) B
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

XNOR A Y A B
(Exlusive Y or
NOR) B Y A B A B
 Physics Gutka 83

Gate Required number Required number of

of NOR gates NAND gates
NOT 1 1
NOR & NAND
OR 2 3 gates are
AND 3 2 Universal logic gates
NAND 4 1
NOR 1 4
XOR 5 4
XNOR 4 5

CLASSIFICATION OF SOLIDS
(According to Band Theory of Solids)

Insulator ( ) Conductor ) Semiconductor )

Empty Conduction
Band energy

Band energy

Band energy
conduction band EN band
Eg=0
Eg 3eV overlapped Eg 3eV

Valence band Valence band

LL

• Decimal Number system ( )

A

system (base) 10 10 [0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9] use

Ex. 1396, 210.75 decimal numbers

• Binary Number System ( )

base 2 2 (0 & 1) use

Ex. 1001, 1101.011 Binary numbers

• Binary to decimal conversion

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

decimal ( ) number : (form) :

2365.75 = 2000 + 300 + 60 + 5 + 0.7 + 0.05

1 1
= 2 × 1000 + 3 × 100 + 6 × 10 + 5 × 1 + 7 × +5×
10 100

= 2 × 103 + 3 × 102 + 6 × 101 + 5× 100 +7 × 10–1+ 5 × 10–2

84 Physics Gutka

binary number
10101.11 = 1 × 24 + 0 × 23 + 1 × 22 + 0 × 21 + 1 × 20 + 1× 2–1 + 1 × 2–2

1 1
= 1 × 16 + 0 × 8 + 1 × 4 + 0 × 2 + 1 × 1 + 1 × + 1 ×
2 4

1 1
= 16 + 4 + 1 + + = 21.75
2 4
Ex. 1011.01 decimal change
1011.01 = 1 × 23 + 0 × 22 + 1 × 21 + 1 × 20 + 0 × 2–1 + 1 × 2–2

1
= 8 + 2 + 1 + = 11.25
4
Ex. 1000101.101 decimal change
1000101.101 1× 2 6+0× 2 5+0× 2 4+0× 2 3+1× 22+0× 2 1+1× 20+1× 2 –1+0× 2–2+1× 2 –3

1 1
= 64 + 4 + 1 + + = 69 + 0.5 + 0.125 = 69.625
2 8
Ex.

Ans. (a) 5 (b) 6.125

EN
Convert the following binary numbers into decimal numbers :–
(a) 101 (b) 110.001 (c) 11111
(c) 31
(d) 1011.11
(d) 11.75

DECIMAL TO BINARY CONVERSION

, ;
LL

2–3 2–2 2–1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 210

0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024

Ex. Convert the decimal number 25 into its binary equivalent

A

Sol. 25 2 powers

25=16+8+1 24+ 23 + 20 = 1 × 24 + 1 × 23 + 0 × 22 + 0 × 21 + 1 × 20 % (25)10 (11001)2

Ex. 7 binary ;
Sol. 7 = 4 + 2 + 1 (7)10 = 1 × 22 + 1 × 21 + 1 × 20 = (111)2
Ex. Convert 69 into its binary equivalent
Sol. 69 =64 + 4 + 1 = 1 × 26 + 1× 22 + 1 × 20 (69)10 (1000101)2
Ex. Convert 13.5 into its binary equivalent
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\08 NOTE.P65

13.5 = 8 + 4 + 1 + 0.5 = 1 × 23 + 1 × 22 + 0 × 21 + 1 × 20 + 1 × 21 (13.5)10 = (1101.1)2

Ex. Convert the following decimal numbers into binary numbers

(a) 6 (b) 65 (c) 106 (d) 268 (e) 8.125

Ans. (a) 110 (b) 1000001 (c) 1101010 (d) 100001100 (e) 1000.001
 Physics Gutka 85

Reflection ( ) light speed, wavelength frequency change medium same

speed wavelength same , frequency source characteristic ( ) % change
amplitude ( ) intensity ( ) incident ( ) ray
Refraction ( ) light frequency change [ medium change ]
Our eyes are most sensitive ( ) for yellow colour & least ( ) for violet ( ) and red colour.
eyes light waves polarization ( ) insensitive ( ) radio TV
antenna sensitive , strong signal , proper direction
Equilateral and Isoscales Prism minimum deviation ) condition light ray prism
base ) parallel (see figure)
r1 + r2 = A (; )
A
i1 = i2 (minimum deviation condition )
i1 i2
r1 r2
i1 = i2 => r1 = r2 ( sinr1 = sin i1 & sinr2 = sin i2 )
EN
A m
sin
= 2 ; A is small (i.e. < 10°) A ( –1)
m
sin A
2

Note :- maximum deviation condition i1 = 90° or i2 = 90° ( , )

LL

+Y
Sign Convention ( ) :- Positive

Principal axis along distances Principal axis x-axis

( u, v f) pole respect measure X

origin Pole
+X
A

Negative x-axis Positive x-axis

Light ray direction ve direction ,
according distances sign light ray Negative
Y
left right positive X–axis direction ve
Distance above the principal axis ( [; ) ve
Distance below the principal axis ( [; ) ve

1 1 2 1
Mirror formula =):
v u R f
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

height of the image h2 v

Transverse magnification ( ) m= =h u
height of the object 1

[ Note : m<0 inverted ( ) image ]

Longitudinal magnification ( /; ):
v2
object principal axis along ( ) mL (for point object)
u2
86 Physics Gutka

Ex. 40 cm radius of curvature ( ) concave mirror

\\\\
\\\\
\\\\\\
60 cm , object image position
I

\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\
O P
object C image
Sol. sign convention R = PC = – 40 cm

\\\\\
f = R/2 = – 20 cm, u = –60 cm

\\\\
1 1 1 uf ( 60) ( 20)
mirror formula or v v= = –30 cm
u v f u f ( 60) ( 20)

Note : Ex. 1 sign convention according Ex. 2 sign convention according

Positive Positive
Light ray
Light ray
direction
direction
Negative Positive Positive Negative
Pole Pole

Negative
EN Negative

Ex. For the given situation determine the height & nature of the image

Sol. sign convention u = – 1.5d, f = – d

2cm d
LL
( light ray left right )
o F
1.5d
h1 = + 2cm

uf 1.5d d v ( 3d) h2
v= = = – 3d; m = – =– =–2= h
u f 1.5d d u ( 1.5d)
A

(m negative image inverted )

h2 = – 2h1 = – 4 cm Real image pole 3d inverted object (double) height

Ex. 10 cm focal length concave mirror pole 8 cm distance object Image position
and nature

Sol. Sign convention f = – 10 cm, u = – 8 cm (see figure)

10
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

uf ( 8)( 10) 8
v= = = + 40
u f ( 8) ( 10) F O Pole

% image pole right side

virtual region ( { =) [mirror back portion ]

 Physics Gutka 87

• Refraction at spherical surfaces ( ; )

2 1 2 1
v u R

Note : calculation v positive

real image , v negative

virtual image

Ex. Locate the image of the point object O in

the situation shown in figure. The point C

denotes the centre of curvature of the

separating surface
Sol. Sign convention u = – 20 cm, R = + 30 cm

1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0

v
2

1.5
u
1

0.5
2
R

1 1
1
v

3
20

2
EN
1
30

= v 45cm
v 30 20 60 60 60 30
% image spherical surface 45 cm left
virtual ( ) [See figure]
LL

[Note : Image pole P right side real (see next example)

Ex. Locate the image of the point object O in the situation
given below
Sol. According to sign convention u = – 60, R = + 20
A

2 1 2 1
The equation – = gives
v u R

1.5 1 1.5 1.0 1.5 1 1 1

v 180cm
v ( 60) 20 v 40 60 120
The image is formed at 180 cm right to the spherical surface and is real ( v is positive)

Extended objects , magnification

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

h2 1v
m= =
h1 2u
88 Physics Gutka

Ex. situation , image position, nature size

Sol. Sign convention u = – 20 cm, R = – 10 cm

2 1 2 1
3/2 4/3 3/2 4 /3
v u R v ( 20) 10

3 1 4 5 1
v 18 Image virtual
2v 60 60 60 12

(4 / 3)( 18) 4
m m>0 % erect image virtual ( ) , P left
(3 / 2)( 20) 5

Ex. glass sphere ( = 1.5) radius 10 cm ] , air bubble surface

7.5 cm distance distance

Sol. Sign convention (Note :- Light ray, right left ) u = –7.5 cm, R = –10cm
1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5
v
2 1
u
2
R
1
v 7.5
EN
10

1 1 1 3 20
v cm 6.66cm
v 20 5 20 3

% bubble surface 20/3 = 6.66 cm distance

LL
1 1 1 uf
• Lens formula : v
v u f u f

1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
• Lens maker's formula : 1 Valid when on both sides of lens
f 1 R1 R2 1 R1 R2
medium same and surfaces any close and rays are paraxial.
A

1 1
Note :- Here 2 1
= 2
1 is called medium factor and is called shape factor..
1 1
R1 R2
For a double convex lens ) or simply convex lens

1
R1 positive , R2 Negative =positive f = positive ( 2> 1)
f
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

For a concave lens )

1
R1 Negative ; R2 Positive =Negative f = Negative( 2> 1)
f

Note :- 1 2
convex lens diverging lens [ , f Negative ] behave
 Physics Gutka 89

• Focal length medium effect :– ; lens air (vacuum) ; medium

fy , 1
=1 medium refractive index ( )
Focal length of lens in water
2
= µ glass = 1.5 = 3/2, 1 = µ water = 4/3

1 1 1 1 1 1
lens air 1.5 1
fair R1 R2 2 R1 R2
3
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
lens water fwater = 4fair
fwater 4 R1 R2 8 R1 R2 4 fair
3
1 P
and Pwater = P
f
( )
3 air
Combination of lenses )
thin lenses focal length f1 , f2 , f3 , f4 .......... ] contact )
combination focal length power
1 1 1 1 1
............ & P = P + P + P + ..........
F f1 f2 f3 f4 1 2 3

Ex.

Sol. light ray, left right

EN
Calculate the focal length of the thin lens shown in figure. The points C1 and C2 denote the centre of curvature.
(given µ lens = 1.5) :
R1 = +10 cm, R2 = +20 cm

1 1 1 1
% = (1.5 – 1)
10 20
= f = 40 cm
f 40
LL

light ray, right left R1 = –20 cm, R2 = –10 cm

1 1 1 1 1 1
% 1.5 1 0.5 f = 40 cm
f ( 20) ( 10) 10 20 40

Ex. Calculate the focal length of following lenses ( spherical surface radius 10 cm µ glass = 1.5 )
A

(a) (b) (c) (d)

1 1 1
Sol. Lens maker's formula = (µ – 1)
f R1 R2

1 1 1 1 1
(a) R1 = +10 cm, R2 = –10 cm = (1.5 – 1)
10
= 0.5 = 10 cm
f ( 10) 10 10
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

1 1 1
(b) R1 = –10 cm, R2 = +10 cm = (1.5 – 1) = f = –10 cm
f 10 10

1 1 1
(c) R1 = +10 cm, R2 = = (1.5 – 1) = f = 20 cm
f 10

1 1 1
(d) R1 = , R2 = +10 cm = (1.5 – 1) = f = –20 cm
f 10
90 Physics Gutka

Extended objects Magnification

height of image v
m=
height of object u

Ex. 1 cm length object convex lens focal length 20 cm ] principal axis perpendicular ( ) lens
25 cm distance Image position height

Sol. Sign convention u = –25, f = +20 cm;

F I
uf ( 25)(20) v 100 O
v = 100 cm % m= = –4 25cm
u f ( 25) 20 u ( 25)

% image lens right side pole 100 cm. object 4 (inverted)

Two thin lenses separated by a distance :-
1 1 1 d
If two lenses are separated by a small distance d then the focal length of the combination is f f1 f2 f1 f2

LENS WITH ONE SILVERED SURFACE

Biconvex lens ( ) ,
EN
surface silvering
(Note : 2 refraction 1 reflection )
P = PL + PM + PL = 2PL + PM

Power of converging system Positive (convex lens/concave mirror)

LL

Power of diverging system Negative (concave lens/convex mirror)

Always give proper sign for R, So use bracket concept

1 1 2
PT = 2( – 1)
A

Sp. Note :- If you use bracket concept in physics there is no chance of any mistake.
Keep always in mind (Nature of system)
Silvered convex lens Always concave mirror i.e. f is negative
Silvered concave lens Always convex mirror i.e. f is positive
Ex. Calculate its focal length & nature of mirror.
Sol. Effective power of system : P = 2PL + PM R=12cm
=1.5
1 1 1 1
where PL = f 1
R 2R 0.24 , PM = 0
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

1 1
P 2 1 0
0.24 0.12

1 1
Power concave mirror , ve [Mirror , P= – , lens , P = + ]
f f
1
behaviour concave mirror ) f 12 cm
P
 Physics Gutka 91

Ex. A 20 cm thick glass slab of refractive index 1.5 is kept in front of a plane mirror. Find the position of
image (relative to mirror) as seen by an observer through the glass slab when a point object is kept in
air at distance of 40cm from the mirror.
20 cm 1.5 ]
( ) , } ] 40cm

\
Sol. \\\\
\ \\\
\\\ \
\\\\ \
\\ \\
\ \ \\
\\\
\\\ \

20/3cm 20/3cm

40 20 100
3 3

Shifting in object / image due be slab x=d

EN
20cm

1
1
20 1
1
1.5
20
3
cm

20 100
Distance of object from mirror (as sean by mirror) = 40 – x = 40 – = cm
3 3
100
LL
Therefore image will be formed at a distance cm from mirror..
3
100 80
Distance of image as seen by observer = –x = cm
3 3
Distance of image from the actual plane mirror is independent of separation b between glass slab and the
mirror. If the distance is more then brightness of image will be less.
A

Ex. An object is placed 21cm in front of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 10cm. A glass slab of thickness
3cm and refractive index 1.5 is then placed closed to mirror in the space between the object and the
mirror. Find the position of the final image formed.
21cm 10 cm ,
3cm 1.5 ] ]
,

FG 1 IJ FG
1 IJ
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

shift by slab x = d 1 = 3 1 15
H K
Sol.
H K .
= 1 cm.

for image formed by mirror u = – (21 – 1) cm = – 20 cm.

1 1 1 1 1 1
+ = + = v = – 20 cm
u v f 20 v 10
shift in the direction of light v = – (20 + 1) = – 21 cm.
92 Physics Gutka

Ex. A wall clock shows time 04 : 25 : 37. What time will its image show in a plane mirror?
Ans. 07 : 34 : 23 (Hint : Time in image - 11:59:60 – 4:25:37)

Ex. ‘d’ thickness ‘µ’ refractive index slab light time

dis tan ce d d
= = =
speed c c

Ex. For shown situation calculate optical path length between A & B.
3
( optical path= × thickness) Ans. x1 + x2 + x
2 3

Ex. situation X ,Y colours , A

TIR ,% A = 45° V
= 1.43 , Y
= 1.414, R
= 1.39 A

Sol. situation Yellow colour light AC along white light

A
Violet colour , c
, 45° %Y Violet
x
1
A> sin A > sin sin A > 1/ sin45° > 2 > 2 B
C
c c V

X
% TIR
Red, Y
condition violet colour
Violet
EN , satisfy R 2 % Red TIR

Special Note :–
1. VIBGYOR min
, TIR max
, TIR
2. A A TIR B ; VIBGYOR Red TIR LAST
LL
C

• Limit of Resolution ( ) : The smallest separation between two point objects whose images can
be seen separate i.e. resolved is called limit of resolution.
A

1
• Resolving Power { ) :– Resolving power =
lim it of resolution
It is the capacity of seeing two objects separately (; { )
A
Telescope , %& = Angle subtended by two distance object
limit of resolution of telescope )
B
122
.
= = Wavelength of light coming from objects
d Objective lens
d = Diameter ( or aperature - ) of objective of telescope
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

1 d
Resolving power of telescope =
1.22
2 sin sin Object
Resolving power of microscope =
1.22 0.61 x
Eye
Arc ( ) x
• Human Eye , %& =
Radius ( ) D d Object
D
 Physics Gutka 93

1
Human eye , =1'( )=
60 60 180
radian

Here x = minimum distance between two objects which can be seen separately by eye
D = Distance of objects from eye.
• Simple Microscope (a convex lens of short focal length)
D
Nature of image erect, virtual, large General Formula MP
u
(a) If the image is at infinity (Far point) u = f { |MP| = D/f
situation normal, relaxed unstrained situation

Df D
(b) If the image is at D (Near point) , u = |MP|= 1 +
D f f
situation eye maximum strain condition
• Compound Microscope ( ) :–
object lens focal length aperature (short) eye lens focal length aperature

v0 D
( ) General form MP u0 ue & L v0 ue

(a) If the image is at (far point)

EN
ue =fe MP
L
f0
D
fe
Minimum and (L = v0 + fe)

( v0 L v0 >>> ue u0 f0 *High MP , fe, f0 ,)

Dfe v0 D L D
(b) If the image is at (Near point) ue = D f MP = – u 1 fe f0
1
fe max. & (L = v0 + ue)
e 0
LL

TELESCOPE

Astronomical Telescope :- Terrestrial Telescope :- Used for observing

objects on earth erecting telescope
A

Used to see heavenly bodies

Produces virtual & inverted image Produces erect image. )
(L = f0 + fe) For normal adjustment (L = f0 + 4f + fe)
Telescope object lens focal length apearture large eye lens focal length
f0
MP
aperature (short) General form ue & L v0 ue

f0
(a) If the final image is at infinity (Far point) ue = fe MP= & (L = f0 + fe)
fe
[For astronimical and normal adjustment case only]
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

Note :- High magnifying power , fe f0

f0 f Dfe
(b) If the final image is at D (near point) MP = 1 e & (L = f + u where u =
fe D 0 e e D fe )
[For astronoical case only]
Note : Galilean telescope , MP = f0/fe , L = f0 – fe
94 Physics Gutka

Spherical Aberration

lens paraxial rays (the rays lying close to the axis) marginal rays (the rays lying far from the
axis) , focus

Methods of reducing Spherical Aberration in lens ; ;)

(i) By using stops ) (ii) By using a crossed lens )
(iii) By using plano-convex lenses )
(iv)
(v)
By combining suitable convex & concave lenses
EN
By using two convex lenses separated by a distance (d=f1 – f2) (to minimise spherical
)

Aberration) (, d=f1–f2 ; )
(vi) By using an Aplantic lens.
• Chromatic Aberration ; )
LL
A

white light , lens colour according different points focus

nv nr
Longitudual Chromatic aberration fred – fviolet = f = (f )
nY 1 Y

1 2
• Condition of Achromatism of two lenses in contact 0 (Achromatic Doublet)
f1 f2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

f f
• Condition of Achromatism of two lenses separated by a distance d d 12 21

1 2

f1 f2
• If material of the two lenses are same then 1 = 2 and d =
2
 Physics Gutka 95

Umbra & Penumbra )

Shadow formation explained by - rectilinear propagation of light. )
In case of point sources ) the shadow has a sharply defined outline. (see figure.)

For an extended light soure

EN
) the shadow has two distinct regions, one in which no
light reaches called umbra & other in which partial light reaches called penumbra (see figure)
Case I - Source of light is smaller than object - umbra & penumbra both are formed.
Case II - Source of light is bigger than object -
(a) umbra will be formed if the screen is close to the object.
LL
(b) No umbra or penumbra will formed if the screen is very far from the object
Case I - Ex. - A high flying bird or aeroplane does not cast a shadow on the ground Case-II (b) while it casts
a shadow when flying close to the ground Case-II(a).

Ex. 1 cm diameter hole ( ) diffraction maximum

A

(a) Light waves (b) Infrared waves (c) Audible sound waves (d) Ultrasonic waves
330
Sol . (d) Ultrasonic , =
20 103
m = 1.7 cm hole diameter order

% maximum diffraction )
Diffraction (Phenomenon) interference (coherent sources)
[; infinite ( )

• Conditions for sustained interference , )%

(a) Coherent waves ( )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65

(b) Amplitudes nearly equal for better contrast ( , ) and

(c) Same polarisation state / )

• light wave denser medium reflect ( ) phase difference

/2 path difference
96 Physics Gutka

Phase change no phase

i of change
i r
Rarer Rarer

Denser Denser i i

no phase no phase
change change

Special Note : (/; ) Sound wave reflection opposite result

Interference in thin films ( )

(1)
(2) Air
i
Air t r
(i) t
(ii) Air
r
Air (2)
(1)

[Interference due to reflected )light] [Interference due to transmitted ) light]

Note : (1) (2) interference Note : (1) (2) interference

Path difference = 2µtcosr – /2

For CI 2µtcosr = (2n + 1)

EN Path difference = 2µtcosr

For CI 2µtcosr = n
2

For DI 2µtcosr = n For DI 2µtcosr = (2n + 1)

2
LL
When n = 0,1,2,3,4,........ Where n = 0,1,2,3,4,.......

Ex. A thin soap film (µ = 1.33) seen by sodium light ( = 5893Å) by normal reflection appears dark. Find
the minimum thickness of the film.
Sol. Reflected light DI condition........ 2µtcosr = n
A

5893
DI minimum thickness , r = 0 (normal incidence) & n = 1 tmin =
2 2 1.33
=2215 Å

3
CI minimum thickness , r = 0 & n = 1 tmin =
4

(an excessively thin film) reflected light (Black)

( Path difference ~
~ – /2 Destructive interference )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\09 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 97

Photon spin ( ) 1

Note :- Photon Boson electron, proton Fermionsn

Boson , spin 0, 1, 2, 3, ...........

Fermions , spin 1/2, 3/2, –1/2, –3/2,........

When ice melts into water, its volume decreases. )

( mass = V ; ice
Vice = water
Vwater & ice
< water ice
= 0.9, water
= 1)

A boat filled with some stones is floating in water. If the stones are dropped into the water, the level of the water will
decrease. ( ? )

Atmospheric pressure exerted on earth is due to the Gravitational pull.

; EN )

Birds get thrust (Forward motion) and lift (upward motion) from flapping of wings.

+; <+ , , ( ) )

A solid ball of metal has a spherical cavity inside it. If the ball is heated, the volume of the cavity will increases. (,
LL

/ <+ )

A balloon filled with air is weighed W so that it just floats in water as shown in

figure. When it is further pushed a short distance in water, it will not come back
A

to its original position. , (W) ;

; ;
)

A pond is covered with a layer of ice and the external temperature is -30°C. The temperature of water in
contact with the lower surface of ice is 0°C.

A closed bottle containing water (at 30°C) is carried in a space ship and placed on the surface of the moon.
Water will boil when the bottle is opened.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\10 NOTE.P65

[ (Empty) ; (Filled with air at atmospheric pressure) weight air

measure same ; vacuum measure bag weight

(Physically fit) ; blood temperature 37°C (98.6°F)

Very small time intervals are accurately measured by the atomic clocks.
; ? } )
98 Physics Gutka

ball water surface floating condition figure according container cover ,

Air compress air pressure decrease

Situation I Situation II
Air is compressed ball will rise Air density is decreased ball will sink
due to increase in upthrust of air. due to decrease in upthrust of air.

'Green house effect' means trapping of solar energy due to atmospheric carbon dioxide. Air pollution (mainly
CO2) air / &/ green house effect
CO2 )

The height of a geostationary satellite (time period = 24 hrs.) from the centre of earth is about 42400km
EN
(36,000 km + 6400 km) [ 36,000 ]

An electron microscope gives higher magnifications than an optical microscope because the wavelength of
electron is smaller as compared to the wavelength of visible light. ] ;
/; ; /; )
LL

A thermostat is a device used to maintain a constant temperature of electrical appliances.

, , ; )

International broadcasting requires high frequency radio–waves.

A

; )

Lapse rate is related to the decrease of temperature with ascent of 1°F for 330 feet.
( ? 300 ft 1°F )

Radio-wave transmission is possible due to presence of ionosphere layer of atmosphere.

)

Fax is the electronic reproduction of a document at a distance.

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\10 NOTE.P65

In order to have the communication link over the entire globe of earth, at least three geo-stationary satellite are
required, which are 120° apart from each other.

A modem is a device that can connect one computer to another across ordinary telephone lines. Basically a
modem is modulating and demodulating device. ( &, ; }
%; ; )
 Physics Gutka 99

Remote sensing is a technique which is used to observe and measure the characteristics of the object at a
distance. (it is done through satellite) ( ,
;; )

Amplitude modulation (AM) is employed in India for radio transmission. ( , –AM

)

Intel sat satellite is used for intercontinental communication. ( Intel sat )

The earth's atmosphere is transparent to visible radiations but absorbs most of the infrared radiations (green
house effect) but blocks the passage of ultraviolet radiations.

Optical fibers ( ) are free ) from electromagnetic( ;) disturbances because these are
electrically insulated.

Microwaves (freq. 100GHz - 300GHz) have wavelength range of few millimetre. They do not show diffraction
effect during propagation in earth's atmosphere. Hence they have a good directional properties. (
EN
)
In transistor IE = IB + IC (Always) & IE Largest, IB Smallest
Active region junction FB (Forward biased) , RB (Reverse biased)
Saturation region junction FB Cut off region RB
LL

A spring balance together with a suspended weight of 2.5 kg is dropped from a height of 10 metres. The
reading on the spring balance, while falling, will show a weight of 0kg. [Note : Common language mass
weight ] (2.5 ,, 10
] ; kg )
A

The colour of the sky is blue because of the scattering of light by dust particles is maximum for blue colour.
( } )

Supersonic planes fly at a speed more than the speed of sound.

/ )

The stars twinkle in the night because the star's atmosphere absorbs light intermittently.
] : &: )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\10 NOTE.P65

Rainbow is produced by tiny rain drops suspended in front of sun rays as a result of reflection, refraction
& dispersion.
] , / )

The lunar eclipse occurs when earth is between the sun and the moon.
, )
100 Physics Gutka

Days and nights are caused by rotation of the earth on its axis.
? , )
Super conductors are perfect diamagnetic. ; )
Super conductor offers zero resistance to electric current. ( ± ; )
Most important effect of moon on earth that it affects tides of the ocean.
)
Sudden fall in barometer reading indicates stormy weather.
Tides are mainly caused by the gravitational pulls on oceanic water by the sun and the moon.
Nature ( ) two type charge basic reason ( ) (law of conservation
of charge)

electric charge magnitude ( ) reference frame ( =) depend ] (Magnitude of

charge does not depend on whether the charge moves or is fixed)
q enclosed
Gauss theorem ( ;) E. ds = E
electric field flux ( E) qenclosed depend
0

E surface charges EN depend

Electrostatic field ( { =) , E. d = 0 . Electrostatic field, potential field

[Note :- Potential field field , potential define ) ]

Balance ( ) cold soft drink (Pepsi, Beer etc.) cap ( ) [

weight increase ( ) decrease ( )
q q
LL

Potential at P = 4 Electric field at P =

r 4 r2
0 0 o r P
q
Cavity shape outer surface shape
spherical P point field surface
induced charge ( ) surface spherical shape shell ( )
A

, : (Uniformly distribute)
Daily life ( ) feel ( ) , mostly forces Electromagnetic type (gravitational force

Sun, earth moon density ( ) earth density sun

1K temperature magnetic thermometers measure curie law based

Phonon is a quantized unit to describe the energy in a particular type of lattice vibration
A nibble is equal to 4 bits.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\10 NOTE.P65

1 Byte is equal to 8 bits.

The input signal give to a CE amplifier having a voltage gain of 150 is vi = 2cos(15t+10°)
The corresponding output signal is 300cos(15t + 190°)
The Human–eye is most sensitive to yellow–green. But the danger signals are in red because red light is scattered
to a smaller extent than yellow–green light.
 Physics Gutka 101

CBSE CONDUCT AIEEE QUESTIONS

7. One end of massless rope, which passes over a massless and

frictionless and frictionless pulley P is tied to a hook C while
the other end is free. Maximum tension that the rope can
bear is 360 N. With what value of maximum safe acceleration
1. A wave y = a sin ( t – kx) on a string meets with another
(in ms–2) can a man of 60 kg climb on the rope?
wave producing a node at x=0. Then the equation of the
unknown wave is- ( y = a sin ( t – kx) , ]
,, ; /; ] P
x=0 )
C
(1) y = a sin ( t + kx) (2) y = –a sin ( t + kx)
(3) y = a sin ( t – kx) (4) y = – a sin ( t – kx)

2. A charged particle q is placed at the centre O of cube of length , , (C) , ?

L (ABCDEFGH). Another same charge q is placed at a distance
P } 360 N
L from O. Then the electric flux through BCFG is:–( q
60 kg <+
L ? O , q L
?
BCFG ) (1)16 (2) 6 (3) 4 (4) 8
E 8. A particle of mass m moves along line PC with velocity as
F
D shown. What is the angular momentum of the particle about
C
O O?( m , v PC
q q
O % ; )
H G
A EN
B

(1) q/4 e0 L (2) zero (3) q/2 e0 L (4) q/3y e0 L

3. An astronomical telescope has a large aperture to- P

( ; ] } )
(1) Reduce spherical aberration ( ; )
(2) Have high resolution ( { ) (1) m L (2) m (3) m r (4) Zero
LL
(3) Increase span of observation ( <+ ) 9. Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents i 1 and i 2 respectively are
(4) Have low dispersion ( ) inclined at an angle to each other. What is the force on a
small element d of wire 2 at a distance r from wire 1 (as
4. When temperature increases, the frequency of a tuning fork shown in figure) due to the magnetic field of wire 1 ?
( <+ ] = &) > 1 2 / % i1 i 2 2 d

(1) Increases ( <+ )

(1) r ] ; &
1 2
A

(2) Decreases ( )
(3) Remains same ( )
i1 i2
(4) Increases or decreases depending on the material
( ; <+ ) d

5. Even Carnot engine cannot give 100% efficiency because

we cannot ( 100% ] %)
(1) Prevent radiation ( )
(2) Find ideal sources ( ) 0 0
(1) i1i2d tan (2) i1i2 d sin
2 r 2 r
(3) Reach absolute zero temperature
( ; ) (3)
0
i1i2d cos (4)
0
i1i2d sin
2 r 4 r
(4) Eliminate friction (? ; )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

10. Formation of covalent bonds in compounds exhibits-

6. When forces F1, F2,F3 are acting on a particle of mass m such ( )
that F2 and F3 are mutually perpendicular, then the particle (1) Wave nature of electron
remains stationary. If the force F1 is now removed then the ( )
acceleration of the particle is- (2) Particle nature of electron
F1, F2,F3 m F2 ( ; )
F3 ] ; F1 , (3) Both wave and particle nature of electron
) ( } )
(4) None of the above ( )
(1) F1/m (2) F2F3/mF1 (3) (F2 – F3)/m (4) F2/m
102 Physics Gutka

6. Two identical photocathodes receive light of frequencies f 1

and f2. If the velocities of the photo electrons of mass m coming
out are respectively v1 and v2, then
f1 f2 ;
1. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii R and
2R respectively are released in free space with initial m ) % v1 v2 ] &)
separation between their centres equal to 12R. If they attract 1/2
2 2h 2h
each other due to gravitational force only, then the distance (1) v1 v 22 f1 f2 (2) v1 v2 f1 f2
covered by the smaller body just before collision is :- m m
(M 5M ; ] R 2R 1/ 2
2 2h 2h
] (3) v1 v 22 f1 f2 (4) v1 v2 f1 f2
m m
12R ; ; ,
7. Which of the following cannot be emitted by radioactive
] } )
(1) 2.5 R (2) 4.5 R (3) 7.5 R (4) 1.5 R substances during their decay ? } {;
; )
2. Three forces start acting simultaneously (1) Protons (2) Neutrino
(3) Helium nuclei (4) Electrons
on a particle moving with velocity v. 8. A sheet of aluminium foil of negligible thickness is introduced
These forces a re repre se nted in between the plates of a capacitor. The capacitance of the
magnitude and direction by the three capacitor:- ( .; , =
sides of a triangle ABC (as shown). The = / )
particle will now move with velocity :-
(1) Decreases (? )
(v ; : (2) Remains unchanged )
; , ABC (3) Becomes infinite )
= , , , ;

(1) Less than

)
v
EN 9.
(4) Increases <+ )
The displacement of a particle varies according to the relation
x = 4(cos t + sin t). The amplitude of the particle is:-
, , %
(2) v in the direction of the largest force BC
(3) Greater than v x = 4(cos t + sin t). )
(4) v , remaining unchanged (1) –4 (2) 4
(3) 4 2 (4) 8
10. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is found
3. A horizontal force of 10N is necessary to
to be proportional to the cube of its absolute temperature.
LL
just hold a block stationary against a wall.
The ratio C P/C V for the gas is :-
The coefficient of friction between the
block and the wall is 0.2. The weight of : ] ?
the block is:- , CP/CV )
, 10N 4 5 3
(1) (2) 2 (3) (4)
? 3 3 2
0.2 ) 11. Which of the following parameters does not characterize the
A

(1) 20 N (2) 50 N (3) 100 N (4) 2 N thermodynamic state of matter? ;

4. Two coils are placed close to each othe r. The mutual )
inductance of the pair of coils depends upon , (1) Temperature ) (2) Pressure )
; ; )%& (3) Work ) (4) Volume )
(1) The rates at which currents are changing in the two coils 12. A rocket with a lift-off mass 3.5 × 104 kg is blasted upwards
with an initial acceleration of 10 m/s2. Then the initial thrust
/ ) of the blast is :-
(2) Relative position and orientation of the two coils (3.5 × 104 kg
10 m/s2
(3) The materials of the wires of the coils )
) (1) 3.5 × 10 5 N (2) 7.0 × 10 5 N
(4) The currents in the two coils (3) 14.0 × 10 5 N (4) 1.75 × 10 5 N
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

/ ) 13. The earth radiates in the infra-red region of the spectrum.

5. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from The spectrum is correctly given by :-
the surface of earth is 11 km/s. If the body is projected at an {= ;
angle of 45° with the vertical, the escape velocity will be :- } )
11 km/s ; (1) Rayleing Jeans law )
45° ,] ) (2) Planck's law of radiation )
11 (3) Stefan's law of radiation )
(1) 11 2 km/s (2) 22 km/s (3) 11 km/s (4) km/s
2 (4) Wien's law )
 Physics Gutka 103

7. The maximum number of possible interference maxima

for slit–separation equal to twice the wavelength in
Young's double–slit experiment is (;
/; ,
1. A particle moves in a straight line with retardation proportional [; )
to its displacement. Its loss of kinetic ene rgy for any
(1) Infinite ) (2) Five )
displacement x is proportional to :–
(3) Three ) (4) Zero ;)
x , {; 8. An –particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through
) 180° by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance of
(1) x 2 (2) e x (3) x (4) loge x closest approach is of the order of (5 MeV
2. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40 g with a velocity – ; 180°
1200 ms–1. The man holding it can exert a maximum force )
of 144 N on the gun. How many bullets can he fire per second (1) 1Å (2) 10 –10 cm (3) 10 –12 cm (4) 10 –15 cm
at the most 40g
9. When p–n junction diode is forward biased, then
1200 ms–1 ,
( , p–n )
144 N
(1) The depletion region is reduced and barrier height is
+ ) increased ; {= ? <+
(1) One (, ) (2) Four ) (3) Two ) (4) Three ) (2) The depletion region is widened and barrier height is
reduced ; { = <+ ? )
3. A ball is thrown from a point with a speed 'v0 ' at an
(3) Both the depletion region and barrier height are reduced
elevation angle of . From the same point and at the
same instant, a person starts running with a constant ( ; {= ? )
speed v0/2 to catch the ball. Will the person be able (4) Both the depletion region and barrier height are increased
to catch the ball? If yes, what should be the angle of EN ; {= <+ )
projection –
'v0' {
v0/2 ,
; ] 1. The relation between time t and distance x is t = ax2 + bx where
,) a and b are constants. The acceleration is :- ( ; t x
(1) Yes, 60° (2) Yes, 30° (3) No (4) Yes, 45° /; t = ax2 + bx a b )
(1) 2 av 2 (2) –2 av 3 (3) 2 bv3 (4) –2 abv2
4. A particle at the end of a spring executes S.H.M. with a
LL
period t1, while the corresponding period for another spring 2. The upper half of an inclined plane with inclination is perfectly
is t2. If the period of oscillation with the two springs in series is smooth while the lower half is rough. A body starting from rest
at the top will again come to rest at the bottom if the coefficient
T, then – t1 of friction for the lower half is given by :-
] ; t2 ; , %
T ] ) [ ,
(1) T = t 1 + t 2 (2) T2 = t 12 + t 22 ; ? %&
(3) T–1 = t 1–1 + t 2–1 (4) T–2 = t 1–2 + t 2–2 (1) tan (2) 2 tan (3) 2 cos (4) 2 sin
A

5. In forced osscillation of a particle the amplitude is maximum 3. An annular ring with inner and outer radii R1 and R2 is rolling
for a frequency 1 of the force, while the energy is maximum without slipping with a uniform angular speed. The ratio of the
for a frequency 2 of the force; then – forces experienced by the two particles situated on the inner and
F1
1
, outer parts of the ring F is :-
2
] ,
2
[ ; % R1 R2 ; ,
] ; <+ ;
(1) 1 = 2
(2) 1 > 2 (3) 1 < 2 F1
(4) 1 < when damping is small and 1 > when damping } :-
2 2 F2
is larger 1
< 2 1
> 2 ) 2
R1 R1 R2
6. Two thermally insulated vessels (1)& (2) are filled with (1) R (2) 1 (3) (4) R
air at temperatures (T 1 , T 2 ), volume (V 1 , V 2 ) and 2 R2 1

pressure (P1 , P2 ) respectively. If the valve joining the

two vessels is opened, the temperature inside the vessel 4. The block of mass M moving on
M
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

at equilibrium will be = (1) (2) % the frictionless horizontal surface

collides with the spring of spring
(T1,T2) (V1, V2) (P1, P2)
constant K and compresses it by
; [ , length L. The maximum momentum
= ) of the block after collision is :
(1) T1 + T2 ( ? { M , K
L
(2) (T 1 + T2 )/2
)
(3) T 1 T2 (P1 V1 + P2V 2)/(P1 V1 T2 + P2 V2 T1 )
ML2 KL2
(4) T1T2 (P 1V 1 + P2 V2 )/(P1V1 T1 + P2 V2 T2 ) (1) (2) zero ( ;) (3) (4) L MK
K 2M
104 Physics Gutka

5. A particle of mass 0.3 kg is subjected to a force F = –kx with 11. A Young's double slit experiment uses a monochromatic source.
k = 15 N/m. What will be its intial acceleration if it is released The shape of the interference fringes formed on a screen is:
from a point 20 cm away from the origin ?
}& , ;
0.3 kg , F =–kx
%&
k = 15 N/m ; 20 cm
(1) parabola ( ;) (2) straight line ( )

(1) 10 m/s 2
(2) 5 m/s 2
(3) 15 m/s 2
(4) 3 m/s 2 (3) circle ( ) (4) hyperbola ( ;)

6. A 'T' shaped object with dimension shown 12. The function sin2( t) represents ( sin2( t) )
in the figure is lying on a smooth floor. A A B
force ' F ' is applied at the point P parallel (1) a simple harmonic motion with a period
to AB, such that the object has only the F
translational motion without rotation. What P 2 ( )
will be the location of P with respect to C.
'T' , ] = (2) a simple harmonic motion with a period
] , AB
C
P , F ( )
? ;
C P
(3) a periodic, but not simple harmonic motion with a period
4 3 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3 2 3 ( ] )
7. The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases when
electromagnetic radiation of wavelength shorter than 2480 nm 2
is incident on it. The band gap in for the semiconductor is:-
EN (4) a periodic, but not simple harmonic motion with a period
2480 /; ; 2
<+ , ( ] )
(1) 0.7 eV (2) 0.5 eV (3) 2.5 eV (4) 1.2 eV 13. The bob of a simple pendulum is a spherical hollow ball filled
with water. A plugged hole near the bottom of the oscillation
8. The temperature entropy diagram of T bob gets suddenly unplugged. During observation, till water is
2T0 coming out, the time period of oscillation would :
a reversible engine cycle is given in the
, [
LL
figure. Its efficiancy is :- T0 , , ;
= , ; &, ,
S
S0 2S 0
(1) increase towards a saturation value ( )
%&
(2) remain unchanged ( )
2 1 1 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (3) first decrease and then increase to the original value
3 3 4 2
A

( ? <+ )
9. The figure shows a system of two (4) first increase and then decrease to the original value
concentric spheres of radii r1 and r2 r1
kept at temperature T 1 and T 2 , T1
( <+ ? )
respectively. The radial rate of flow
of heat in a substance between the 14. One conducting U tube can slide inside x x x x x x x
T2 A B
two concetric spheres is proportional r2 another as shown in figure, maintaining x x x x x x x
to :- v
electrical contacts between the tubes. The x x x x x x x
v
= r1 r2 ; ; magnetic field B is perpendicular to the x x x x x x x
% T1 T2 ; plane of the figure. If each tube moves xD x x x x xCx
; %& towards the other at a constant speed v,
then the emf induced in the circuit in
r1r2 r2 (r2 – r1 )
(1) (r 2 – r 1 ) (2) (r – r ) (3) n (4) terms of B, and v where is the width
r1 (r1r2 )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

2 1
of each tube, will be :
10. Two point white dots are 1 mm apart on a black paper. They U- , ; , /;
are viewed by eye of pupil diameter 3 mm. Approximately,
what is the maximum distance at which these dots can be , = ;{=B =
resolved by the eye ? (Take wavelength of light = 500 nm) ; , v
1 mm 3 mm
] B, v
}
%&
}
(1) 3m (2) 6m (3) 1m (4) 5m (1) 2B v (2) zero ( ;) (3) –B v (4) B v
 Physics Gutka 105

15. A fully charged capacitor has a capacitance 'C'. It is discharged 3. The time taken by a photoelectron to come out after the
through a small coil of resistance wire embedded in a thermally photon strikes is approximately :- (
insulated block of specific heat capacity 's' and mass 'm'. If the
} ; )
temperature of the block is raised by ' T', the potetial difference
'V' across the capacitance is : (1) 10 –10 s (2) 10 –16 s (3) 10 –1 s (4) 10 –4 s
% = / C , 4. Two rigid boxes containing different ideal gas are placed on
m s / a table. Box A contains one mole nitrogen at temperature
; T <+ , T0, while box B contains one mole of helium at temperature
(7/3) T0. The boxes are then put into thermal contact with
= V :
each other, and heat flows between them till the gases reach
2ms T ms T mC T 2mC T a common final temperature (Ignore the heat capacity of
(1) (2) (3) (4) boxes). Then, final temperature of the gases, Tf, in terms of
C C s s
16. Two voltameters, one of copper and another of silver, are joined T0 is :-
in parallel. When a total charge q flows through the voltameters, <+ , ]
equal amount of metals are deposited. If the electrochemical A T0 1 B
equivalents of copper and silver are z1 and z2 respectively then
charge which flows through the silver voltameter is :
(7/3)T0 1 , ;
, ] /;
q / ,(
; % z1 z2 ] .; ) Tf , T0 :-
%& 7 3 5 3
(1) Tf = T0 (2) Tf = T0 (3) Tf = T0 (4) Tf = T0
z2 z1 3 2 2 7
q q
(1) q (2) q (3)
z2 (4)
z1 z2 z 5. The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to move along
1+ 1 1
z1 z2 æ x 4 x2 ö
17. A moving coil galvanometer has 150 equal divisions. Its curent the x-axis is given by V (x) = ççç – ÷÷÷ J . The total mechanical
çè 4 2 ÷ø
sensitivity is 10 divisions per millampere and voltage sensitivity
is 2 divisions per millivolt. In order that each division reads
1 volt, the resistance in ohms needed to be connected in series
with the coil will be :
EN energy of the particle is 2 J. Then, the maximum speed of
the particle (in m/s) is :-
x- , =1 ,
/ 150 /
10 , 2 æ x 4 x2 ö÷
ç
V (x) = ççç 4 – 2 ÷÷÷ J
1 , è ø
, :
; 2 :-
(1) 9995 (2) 99995 (3) 10 5 (4) 10 3
LL

1 3
18. The resistance of hot tungsten filament is about 10 times the (1) 2 (2) (3) 2 (4)
cold resistance. What will be the resistance of 100 W and 2 2
200 V lamp when not in use :
6. A force of -Fk̂ acts on O, the origin Z
] 10
100 W 200 V : of the coordinate system. The torque
about the point (1, –1, 0) is
(1) 200 (2) 400 (3) 20 (4) 40 HINTS
O Y
-Fk̂ =
A

( O
(1, –1, 0)
X
)
1. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies 9500Hz and
above is a pproa chi ng a sta tiona ry pe rson with spe ed (1) –F (iˆ + ˆj) (2) F (iˆ + ˆj) (3) –F (iˆ – ˆj) (4) F (iˆ – ˆj)
v ms–1. The velocity of sound in air is 300 ms–1. If the person
can hear frequencies upto a maximum of 10,000 Hz, the 7. If the lattice constant of the semiconductor is decreased, then
maximum value of v upto which he can hear the whistle is which of the following is correct ?
9500 Hz /
Ec
v m/s , /
300 / ; 10,000 Hz Eg
v ] :-
15 Ev
(1) (2) 15 ms–1 (3) 30 ms–1 (4) 15 2 ms -1
2 ms 1
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

2. A solid which is not transparent to visible light and whose ,

conductivity increases with temperature is formed by :- ; ?
; , (1) E c and E V increase, but E g decrease
<+ ] } %& Ec EV <+ Eg
(1) Covalent binding ( ) (2) E c and E V decrease, but Eg increase
(2) Vander waals binding ( ) Ec EV Eg <+
(3) Metallic binding ( )
(3) All Ec, Eg, EV decrease (Ec, Eg EV ? )
(4) Ionic binding ( )
(4) All Ec, Eg, EV increase (Ec, Eg EV <+ )
106 Physics Gutka

8. The anode voltage of a photoce ll is ke pt fixed. The

wavelength of the light falling on the cathode is gradually
changed. The plate current I of the photocell varies as follows
, 1. The displacement of an obje ct a ttached to a spring and
/; / &/ executing simple harmonic motion is given by
/ I & x = 2 × 10–2 cos t metres.
The time at which the maximum speed first occurs is :-
,] ,
I I
(1) (2) x = 2 × 10–2 cos t
;
O O (1) 0.25 s (2) 0.5 s (3) 0.75 s (4) 0.125 s

2. An electric charge 10 C is placed at the origin (0,0) of X - Y

–3

I
co-ordinate system. Two points A and B are situated at
I
(3) (4) 2, 2 and (2, 0) respectively. The potential difference
O O between the points A and B will be (10 –3 C X- Y
9. The 'rad' is the correct unit used to report the measurement (0, 0) A B %
of (' (rad)' ) 2, 2 (2, 0) A B /; )
(1) The energy delivered by radiation to a target
( } {; )
(1) 4.5 volt (2) 9 volt (3) Zero ( ;) (4) 2 volt
(2) The biological effect of radiation 3. A point mass oscillates along the x-axis accoording to the law
( ) x = x0cos ( t– /4). If the acceleration of the particle is written
as a = A cos ( t + ), then :-
(3) The rate of decay of a radioactive source
x- x = x0cos ( t– /4)
( ; {; ) EN
(4) The ability of a beam of gamma ray photons to produce ; a = A cos ( t + ) : , :-
ions in a target (1) A = x 0 2
,
= 3 /4 (2) A = x 0 , = – /4
{; { (3) A = x 0 2
,
= /4 (4) A = x 0 2, = – /4
4. Charges are placed on the vertices of a q q
A B
10. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density =19.5 kg/
m3) is 0.2 m/s in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 kg/m3 ), find square as shown. Let E be theelectric field
the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (denstiy = 10.5 kg/ and V the potential at the centre. If the
charges on A and B are interchanged with –q D C –q
m3 ) of the same size in the same liquid
those on D and C respectively, then :–
( , ( = 1.5 kg/m3) ( = 19.5 kg/m3)
LL
0.2 m/s ( ± {= E
( = 10.5 kg/m ) 3
)
V ; A B %D
(1) 0.133 m/s (2) 0.1 m/s (3) 0.2 m/s (4) 0.4 m/s C , )
(1) E changes, V remains unchanged
11. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which undergoes
vertical simple harmonic motion of angular frequency . The (E ,V )
amplitude of oscillation is gradually increased. The coin will (2) E remains unchanged, V changes
leave contact with the platform for the first time :-
A

(E ,V )
{ , ;
(3) Both E and V change ( E V )
/ &/ <+
:- (4) E and V remain unchanged ( E V )
(1) For an amplitude of g/ 2
(g/ 2
,) 5. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB. The
(2) For an amplitude of g2 / 2 (g2/ 2 ,) intensity decreases by a factor of :-
(3) At the highest position of the platform / / 20 dB {
( ) } :-
(4) At the mean position of the platform (1) 100 (2) 1000 (3) 10000 (4) 10
( /; )
6. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric medium of
12. The work of 146 kJ is performed in order to compress one dielectric constant K between the plates has a capacity C and
kilo mole of a gas adiabatically and in this process the is charged to a potential V volts. The dielectric slab is slowly
temperature of the gas increases by 7° C. The gas is removed from between the plates and then reinserted. The
net work done by the system in this process is :-
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

: : , 146 kJ
= K
7°C <+
] / C V
:- (R = 8.3 J mol–1 K)
/; /
(1) Triatomic ( =& )
(2) A mixture of monoatomic and diatomic
;}
( }& ) 1
(1) Zero ( ;) (2)
2
(K – 1) CV2
(3) Monoatomic ( )
(4) Diatomic ( }& ) (3) CV 2 (K–1)/K (4) (K–1)CV 2
 Physics Gutka 107

7. If gE and gm are the accelerations due to gravity on the 3. In an experiment, electrons are made to pass through a narrow
surfaces of the earth and the moon respectively and if slit of width ‘d’ comparable to their de Broglie wavelength.
Millikan's oil drop experiment could be performed on the two They are detected on a screen at a distance ‘D’ from the slit
surfaces, one will find the ratio (see figure). ] /; d ,
electronic ch arg e on the moon D ,
to be :- /;;
electronic ch arg e on the earth

gE gM % ;
,

%& d y=0

(1) gM/g E (2) 1 (3) 0 (4) gE /g M

D
HINTS
Which of the following graphs can be expected to represent
the number of electrons ‘N’ detected as a function of the detector
position ‘y’ (y = 0 corresponds to the middle of the slit)?

Directions : y [; N
Questions No. 1, 2 and 3 are based on the following paragraph. /; y = 0) ?
Wave property of electrons implies that they will show diffraction y y
effects. Davisson and Germer demonostrated this by diffracting
electrons from crystals. The law governing the diffractions from a
crystal is obtained by requiring that electron waves reflected from EN (1) N d (2) N d
the planes of atoms in a crystal interfere constructively (see figure).

Outgoing y y
Incoming
Electrons i Electrons

d (3) N d (4) N d
LL

Crystal plane 4. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of

: [; 1, 2 3 density . It is falling through a liquid of density .
Assume that the liquid applies a viscous force on the ball that is
proportional to the square of its speed v, i.e.,
Fviscous = - kv2 (k > 0). Then terminal speed of the ball is
V , ; ;
A

;
; ,
1. Electrons accelerated by potential V are diffracted from a F = - kv2 (k > 0)|
crystal. If d = 1Å & i = 300. V should be about V %&
, ; d = 1Å i = 300 V
Vg Vg Vg
1 2 1 Vg 1 1 2
) (1) (2) (3) (4)
k k k k
(h= 6.6 × 10-34 Js, me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 x 10-19 C)
(1) 2000 V (2) 50 V 5. A thin rod of length ‘L’ is lying along the x-axis with its ends at
x = 0 and x = L. It linear density (mass/length) varies with x as
(3) 500 V (4) 1000 V n
x
k where n can be zero or any positive number. If the
L
2. If a strong diffraction peak is observed when electrons are position xCM of the centre of mass of the rod is plotted against
incident at an angle ‘i’ from the normal to the crystal planes ‘n’, which of the following graphs best approximates the
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

with distance ‘d’ between them (see figure), de Broglie dependence of xCM on n?
wavelength dB of electrons can be calculated by the relationship
+ ‘L’ ] x-
( n is an integer)
x=0 x=L ;? ( )x
, ] d x
n

] i k
L
] n ;; / [;
/; dB
(n ) + xCM ‘n’, [
xCM n
(1) d sin i = n dB (2) 2d cos i = n dB
?
(3) 2d sin i = n dB (4) d cos i = n dB
108 Physics Gutka

Statement 2 : If the direction of a field due to a point source

is radial and its dependence on the distance ‘r’ from the source
1
is given as , its flux through a closed surface depends only on
r2
(1) (2) the strength of the source enclosed by the surface and not on
the size or shape of the surface.
; 2: , {= ;
1
r
r2
,
] ;
(3) (4)
(1) Statement –1 is false, Statement –2 is true ( ;–1
; ] ;–2 ; )
(2) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement–2
6. An athlete in the olympic games covers a distance of 100 m in
is a correct explanation for Statement–1
10 s. His kinetic energy can be estimated to be in the range.
;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; ; ;–2, ;–1
[ , 10 100 ;
(3) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement–2
(1) 200 J - 500 J (2) 2 × 105 J - 3 × 105 J is not a correct explanation for Statement–1
(3) 20,000 J - 50,000 J (4) 2,000 J - 5,000 J ;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; ; ;–2, ;–1
7. This question contains statement-1 and statement -2. Of the
four choices given after the statements, choose the one that (4) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is false
best describes the two statements. EN ( ;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; )
; % ;–1 ;–2. 9. A jar is filled with two non-mixing
] , liquids 1 and 2 having densities
Statement 1: Energy is released when heavy nuclei undergo 1
and 2, respectively. A solid ball,
fission or light nuclei undergo fusion. made of a material of density 3,
is droped in the jar. It comes to Liquid 1 1

;1: equilibrium in the position shown

in the figure. W hich of the
following is true for 1 , 2 and 3 P3
Statement 2 : For heavy nuclei, binding energy per nucleon
; 1 2 ]
LL
increass with increasing Z while for light nuclei it decreases
with increasing Z. ? % 1 2
, Liquid 2 2

;2: ,] ; ] Z <+ ] 3
]
; =
<+ ,; Z <+ ?
(1) Statement –1 is false, Statement –2 is true
1
, 2 3
, ;
;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; (1) < < (2) < <
3 1 2 2 3 1
A

(2) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement–2 (3) 1

< 2
< 3
(4) 1
< 3
< 2
is a correct explanation for Statement 1
10. A working transistor with its three legs marked P, Q and R is
;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; ; ;–2, ;–1 tested using a multimeter. No conduction is found betwen P
and Q. By connecting the common (negative) terminal of the
(3) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement–2 multimeter to R and the other (positive) terminal to P or Q,
is not a correct explanation for Statement–1 some resistance is seen on the multimeter. Which of the following
;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; ; ;–2, ;–1 is true for the transistor ?
] P, Q R ]
P Q
(4) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is false
;–1 ; ] ;–2 ; ( ) R (/ ) P Q
, ;
8. This question contains statement-1 and statement -2 of the (1) It is an npn transistor with R as base
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

four choices given after the statements, choose the one that
( , npn R )
best describes the two statements.
(2) It is a pnp transistor with R as collector
; % ;–1 ;–2.
( , pnp R )
] ,
(3) It is a pnp transistor with R as emitter
Statement 1: For a mass M kept at the centre of a cube of
side ‘a’, the flux of graviational field passing through its sides is ( , pnp R )
4 GM. (4) It is an npn transistor with R as collector
; 1: ? a ] M , ( , npn R )
, ;{= 4 GM
 Physics Gutka 109

k T1 T2 P1 V1 P2 V 2 P1 V1 T1 P2 V2 T2
11. Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a force
r (1) P1 V1 T2 P2 V2 T1 (2) P1 V1 P2 V2
where ‘k’ is a cosntant and 'r' is the distance of the electron from
the origin. By applying Bohr model to this sytem, the radius of P1 V1 T2 P2 V2 T1 T1 T2 P1 V1 P2 V2
the nth orbital of the electron is found to be ‘rn’ and the kinetic (3) (4)
P1 V1 P2 V2 P1 V1 T1 P2 V2 T2
energy of the electron to be ‘Tn’. Then which of the following is
true ?
k
, r
} ] ‘k’
'r' ; ,
] n ‘rn’ 1. In an experiment the angles are required to be measured
using an instrument, 29 divisions of the main scale exactly
‘Tn’ ;
coincide with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If the
1 smallest division of the main scale is half-a-degree (=0.5°),
(1) Tn ,rn n2 (2) Tn independent of n, rn n
n2 then the least count of the instrument is :-
1 (1) One degree (2) Half degree
(3) Tn , r n (4) None of these
n n (3) One minute (4) Half minute
12. A body is at rest at x=0. At t = 0, it starts moving in the positive
x-direction with a constant acceleration. At the same instant ,,
another body passes through x=0 moving in the positive [; 29 30
x-direction with a constant speed. The position of the first body
is given by x1(t) after time ‘t’and that of the second body by
[; (0.5°) ]
x2(t) after the same time interval. Which of the following graphs :-
correctly describes (x1 – x2) as a function of time ‘t’?
(1) (2) (3) (4)
t=0 t=0 ; x- / , Direction :- Q No. 2 & 3 are based on the following paragraph.
; x- / EN , A current loop ABCD is held fixed on the B
x=0 ;t plane of the paper as shown in the figure. a A
x1(t) x2(t) The arcs BC (radius = b) a nd DA
(radius = a) of the loop are joined by two I1 30° I
(x1 – x2) ; ‘t’ : ; ? O
straight wires AB and CD. A steady current
(x1-x2) (x1-x2) D
I is flowing in the loop. Angle made by AB
b
and CD at the origin O is 30°. Another C
straight thin wire with steady current I 1
(1) (2) flowing out of the plane of the paper is kept
at the origin.
LL

t t :- [; 2 3
O O
(x1-x2) (x1-x2) / ABCD ] =
BC ( = b) DA ( = a)
AB CD , / I AB
(3) (4) CD O 30° , ; ]
/ I1 ]
A

t t t
O O 2. The magnitude of the magnetic field (B) due to the loop
ABCD at the origin (O) is : ( ABCD (O)
; { = (B) )
13. Relative perimittivity and permeability of a material are r and
I b a I
r
, respectively. Which of the following values of these quantities (1)
0
(2)
0
2(b a) (a b)
are allowed for a diamagnetic material ? 4 ab 4 3
% r r a) 0 I(b
; , %& (3) Zero (4)
24ab
(1) r
=0.5, =1.5
r
(2) r
=1.5, =0.5
r 3. Due to the presence of the current I1 at the origin:-
(3) r
=0.5, =0.5
r
(4) r
=1.5, =1.5
r / I1 )
14. An insulated container of gas has two chambers separated by (1) The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by
an insulating partition. One of the chambers has volume V1 ( )
and contains ideal gas at pressure P1 and temperature T1. The
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

other chamber has volume V2 and contains ideal gas at pressure I1 I

0 2(b a) (a b)
P2 and tempeature T2. If the partition is removed without doing 4 3
any work on the gas, the final equilibrium temperature of the (2) The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by
gas in the container will be
0 I I1
, , , ( (b a) )
24ab
V1 P1 T1
(3) The forces on AB and DC are zero
V2 P2 T2 ; (AB DC ; )
(4) The forces on AD and BC are zero
%& (AD BC ; )
110 Physics Gutka

4. The above is a plot of binding energy per nucleon Eb, against –1 : R = R0(1+ t)
the nuclear mass M; A, B, C, D, E, F correspond to different , 100 150
nuclei. Consider four reactions :
27°C 227°C
= 2.5 × 10–3/°C.
B C
D E Statement–2 : R = R0(1 + t) is valid only when the change
Eb
in the temperature T is small and R = (R – R0) << R0 .
A F –2 : R = R0(1 + t)
T R = (R – R0) << R0
M
Eb ; M (1) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement2
A, B, C, D, E, F is not the correct explanation of Statement–1 ( -1
: -2 -2, -1 )

(i) A + B C + (ii) C A+ B+ (2) Statement–1 is false, Statement–2 is true

(iii) D + E F + (iv) F D+ E+ ( -1 -2 )
where is the energy released ? In which reactions is (3) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is false
positive? ( ?) ( -1 -2 )
(1) (ii) & (iv) (2) (ii) & (iii) (3) (i) & (iv) (4) (i) &(iii) (4) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true; Statement2
is the correct explanation of Statement–1 ( -1
5. One kg of a diatomic gas is at a pressure of 8 × 104 N/m2. -2 -2, -1 )
The density of the gas is 4 kg/m3. What is the energy of the
9. A motor cycle starts from rest and accelerates along a straight
gas due to its thermal motion ?
path at 2 m/s2. At the starting point of the motor cycle there
8 ×104 N/m2 ? is a stationary electric siren. How far has the motor cycle gone
4 kg/m 3
; ? when the driver hears the frequency of the siren at 94% of
its value when the motor cycle was at rest ?
(1) 6 × 10 4 J (2) 7 × 10 4 J (3) 3 × 104 J (4) 5 × 104 J

6. A mixture of light, consisting of wavelength 590 nm and an

unknown wavelength, illuminates Young's double slit and
EN (Speed of sound = 330 ms–1) :-

2 m/s2
,
,
gives rise to two overlapping interference patterns on the
screen. The central maximum of both lights coincide. Further,
it is observed that the third bright fringe of known light 94% (
coincides with the 4th bright fringe of the unknown light. From =330 ms–1) :-
these data, the wavelength of the unknown light is :- (1) 147 m (2) 196 m (3) 49 m (4) 98 m
LL
/; 590 nm , /; , ;
10. Two wires are made of the same material and have the same
volume. However wire 1 has cross-sectional area A and wire
; ]; 2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of wire 1 increases
by x on applying force F, how much force is needed to stretch
] :- wire 2 by the same amount ? ( ,
(1) 442.5 nm (2) 776.8 nm (3) 393.4 nm (4) 885.0 nm , ] 1 { A
These question (7 & 8)contains Statement–1 and Statement– 2 { 3A ; F 1
A

2. Of the four choices given after the statements, choose x ] 2 ,

the one that best describes the two statements. )
(7 , 8) ( –1 –2) (1) 6F (2) 9F (3) F (4) 4F

11. A transparent solid cyclindrical rod has a refractive index of

2
7. Statement–1 : For a charged particle moving from point P . It is surrounded by air. A light ray is incident at the
3
to point Q the net work done by an electrostatic field on the mid-point of one end of the rod as shown in the figure. The
particle is independent of the path connecting point P to point incident angle for which the light ray grazes along the wall
Q.
2
Statement–2 : The net work done by a conservative force of the rod is :- +
on an object moving along closed loop is zero. 3
–1 : P Q , ] ; + , /; ,
] =
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

, {=} P
Q = , + ] %&
–2 : , }
;
8. Statement–1 : The temperature dependence of resistance
is usually given as R = R0 (1+ t). The resistance of a 2 1 1 3
wire changes from 100 to 150 when its temperature (1) sin–1 (2) sin–1 (3) sin–1 (4) sin–1
is incre ase d from 27°C to 227°C. This implies that 3 3 2 2
= 2.5 × 10 –3 /°C.
 Physics Gutka 111

12. A thin uniform rod of length and mass m is swinging freely 17. In an optics experiment, with the position of the object fixed,
about a horizontal axis passing through its end. Its maximum a student varies the position of a convex lens and for each
angular speed is . Its centre of mass rises to a maximum position, the screen is adjusted to get a clear image of the
height of:- object. A graph between the object distance u and the image
m , , + , distance v, from the lens, is plotted using the same scale for
the two axes. A straight line passing through the origin and
{ =: ; m ak ing an a ngle of 45 ° wi th t he x -a xi s me et s the
:- experimental curve at P. The coordinates of P will be :-
1 2 2
1 2 2
1 2 2
1 ], ,] , ,
(1) (2) (3) (4) ,]
2 g 6 g 3 g 6 g
u
13. If x, v and a denote the displacement, the velocity and the
acceleration of a particle executing simple harmonic motion v ,
of time period T, then, which of the following does not change , ] x–
with time ? ( x, v a % T 45° ] P P :-
] ] ; ƒ ƒ
(1) (ƒ, ƒ) (2) (4ƒ, 4ƒ) (3) (2ƒ, 2ƒ) (4) ,
) 2 2
Directions : Question number 18, 19 and 20 are based on the
aT aT
(1) aT + 2 v (2) (3) a2T2 + 4 2v2 (4) following paragraph.
v x
: [; 18, 19 20
Q Two moles of helium gas are taken 2×10 5 A B
14. Let (r) = r be the charge density distribution for a solid
R4 over the cycle ABCDA, as shown in
P(Pa)
sphere of radius R and total charge Q. For a point 'P' inside the P–T diagram.(
the sphere at distance r1 from the centre of the sphere, the 1×10
5

ABCDA D C
magnitude of electric field is ( R Q T
EN P–T = ) 300K 500K
T
Q
? (r) = r ] r1 18. Assuming the gas to be ideal the work done on the gas in
R4
taking it from A to B is :- ,A B
, P {= ) :-
Qr 2
Qr 2
Q (1) 400 R (2) 500 R (3) 200 R (4) 300 R
1 1
(1) 4 R 4 (2) 3 R 4 (3) 0 (4) 4 r 2
0 0 0 1 19. The work done on the gas in taking it from D to A is :-
D A :-
15. A p-n junction (D) shown in the (1) –690 R (2) +690 R (3) –414 R (4) +414 R
D
LL
figure can act as a rectifier. An 20. The net work done on the gas in the cycle ABCDA is :-
alternating current source (V) v ~ R
ABCDA :-
is connected in the circuit. The
(1) 1076 R (2) 1904 R (3) Zero (4) 276 R
current (I) in the resistor (R) can
be shown by :- 21. Consider a rubber ball freely falling from a height h=4.9m
= , p-n (D) onto a horizontal elastic plate. Assume that the duration of
collision is negligible and the collision with the plate is totally
, / (V) :-
elastic.Then the velocity as a function of time and the height
A

(R) / (I) } :- as a function of time will be :- , +

I I h = 4.9 m , { =:
(1) (2) ; ; .; %
t t ; : %&
v y
I I +v1
(3) t
(4) (1) O t
h
t t1 2t1 3t1 4t1

16. The logic circuit shown below has the input waveform 'A' –v1 t

and 'B' as shown. Pick out the correct output waveform. v

y
+v1
: A B h
O t
: ) (2) t1 2t1 3t1 4t1

–v1
Input A t
A
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

v
y
Y +v1
Input B h
B
(3) O t
t

(1) (2)
v y
+v1
h
(3) (4) (4) O t

–v1 t
112 Physics Gutka

22. An inductor of inductance L=400 mH Direction : Questions number 4 – 5 are based on the
E
following paragraph.
and resistors of resistances R1 = 2 L
: [; 4 – 5 )
and R2 = 2 are connected to a
R1 A nucleus of mass M + m is at rest and decays into two daughter
battery of emf 12V as shown in the
nuclei of equal mass M/2 each. Speed of light is c.
figure. The internal resistance of the
R2 M+ m , ,
battery is negligible. The switch S is
closed at t = 0. The potential drop M/2 { { c
across L as a function of time is :-
= , 12V emf , 4. The speed of daughter nuclei is ( )
L = 400 mH R1 = 2 R2 = 2 m m 2 m m
.; t=0 S ; (1) c (2) c (3) c (4) c
M m M m M M
: L :- 5. The binding energy per nucleon for the parent nucleus is
(1) 6(1 – e –t/0.2 )V (2) 12e –5t V E1 and that for the daughter nuclei is E2. Then :-
12 3t ( , E1 {
(3) 6e –5t V (4) e V
t
, E2 :-)
23. The transition from the state n = 4 to n = 3 in a hydrogen like (1) E 1 = 2E 2 (2) E 2 = 2E 1 (3) E 1 > E 2 (4) E 2 > E 1
atom results in ultraviolet radiation. Infrared radiation will be 6. Statement-1 : When ultraviolet light is incident on a
photocell, its stopping potential is V0 and the maximum kinetic
obtained in the transition from :-
energy of the photoelectrons is Kmax. When the ultraviolet light
n=4 n=3 is replaced by X-rays, both V0 and Kmax increase.
-1 : , ]
:- V0 Kmax
(1) 4 2 (2) 5 4 (3) 2 1 (4) 3 2 , ] V0
EN Kmax
Statement-2 : Photoelectrons are emitted with speeds
ranging from zero to a maximum value because of the range
of frequencies present in the incident light.
Direction : Questions number 1 – 3 are based on the and ( )
following paragraph. -2 : ; ,
: [; 1 – 3 )
An initially parallel cylindrical beam travels in a medium of refractive (1) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is false
index µ(I) = µ 0 + µ 2I, where µ 0 and µ 2 are positive constants and I –1 ; , –2 ; )
LL
is the intensity of the light beam. The intensity of the beam is (2) Stat em ent– 1 is true, S ta te me nt–2 is true;
decreasing with increasing radius. St at em ent– 2 is t he c or re ct e xpla na ti on of
Statement–1( –1 ; ] –2 ; ; –2 –
( µ(I) = µ 0 + µ 2I, , /
1 [; )
] µ0 , µ2 I (3) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true;
? ) Statement–2is not the correct explanation
of Statement–1 ( –1 ; ] –2 ; ; –2
1. The initial shape of the wavefront of the beam is :-
A

–1 [; )
:-
(4) Statement–1 is false, Statement–2 is true
(1) planar ( ;) ( –1 ; ] –2 ; )
(2) convex ( ) 7. Statement-1 : Two particles moving in the same direction
(3) concave ( ) do not lose all their energy in a completely inelastic collision.
(4) convex near the axis and concave near the periphery -1 : ,
( )
2. The speed of the light in the medium is :-
and ( )
( /; :-)
Statement-2 : Principle of conservation of momentum holds
(1) maximum on the axis of the beam
true for all kinds of collisions.
( )
-2 : ,
(2) minimum on the axis of the beam
(1) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is false
( )
–1 ; , –2 ; )
(3) the same everywhere in the beam
(2) Stat em ent– 1 is true, S ta te me nt–2 is true;
( , )
St at em ent– 2 is t he c or re ct e xpla na ti on of
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(4) directly proportional to the intensity I

Statement–1( –1 ; ] –2 ; ; –2 –
( I )
3. As the beam enters the medium, it will :- 1 [; )
/; ] ; :- (3) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true;
Statement–2is not the correct explanation
(1) travel as a cylindrical beam ( )
of Statement–1 ( –1 ; ] –2 ; ; –2
(2) diverge ( )
–1 [; )
(3) converge ( ) (4) Statement–1 is false, Statement–2 is true
(4) diverge near the axis and converge near the periphery
( –1 ; ] –2 ; )
( )
 Physics Gutka 113

8. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They carry

steady equal currents flowing out of the plane of the paper 11. A diatomic ideal gas is used in a carnot engine as the working
as shown. The variation of the magnetic field B along the substance. If during the adiabatic expansion part of the cycle
line XX' is given by:- the volume of the gas increases from V to 32 V, the efficiency
2d , , / of the engine is :-

/ = : ,
XX' ;{=B ; # V
:- 32 V <+ , { :-
(1) 0.25 (2) 0.5 (3) 0.75 (4) 0.99
12. The respective number of significant figures for the numbers
23.023, 0.0003 and 2.1 × 10 –3 are:-
(1)
[; 23.023, 0.0003 2.1 × 10–3 %
[; :-
(1) 4, 4, 2 (2) 5, 1, 2 (3) 5, 1, 5 (4) 5, 5, 2
13. The combination of gates shown below yields:-

(2) , , :-

(3)
EN (1) NAND gate
(3) NOT gate
(2) OR gate
(4) XOR gate
14. Let there be a spherically symmetric charge distribution with

5 r
charge density varying as (r) = – upto r = R, and
0
4 R
(4) (r) = 0 for r > R, where r is the distance from the origin.
LL
The electric field at a distance r (r < R) from the origion is
given by :

9. A ball is made of a material of density where oil < < , ; ?

water
with oil and water representing the densities of oil and
water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible. If the 5 r
(r) = – ,r=R , (r) = 0, r > R ,]
above ball is in equilibrium in a mixture of this oil and water, 0
4 R
which of the following pictures represents its equilibrium
position? r r (r < R) {=
A

, < <
% , ? , ;
r 5 r 4 0r 5 r
(1) 3
0
– (2) –
; ] 0
4 R 3 0 3 R
= ?
r 5 r 4 0r 5 r
(3) 4
0
– (4) 3 –
0 3 R 0 4 R

15. In a series LCR circuit R = 200 and the voltage and the
(1) (2) (3) (4) frequency of the main supply is 220 V and 50 Hz respectively.
On taking out the capacitance from the circuit the current
lages behind the voltage by 30°. On taking out the inductor
10. A thin semi-circular ring of radius r has from the circuit the current leads the voltage by 30°. The
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

a positive charge q distributed power dissipated in the LCR circuit is :

uniformly over it. The net field E at
(1) 242 W (2) 305 W (3) 210 W (4) Zero W
the centre O is
( r , ; ; / q : LCR R = 200 [; ,
O {= E ) % 220 V 50 Hz =
30° /
q q q ˆj q ˆ
(1) 2 ĵ (2) ĵ (3) – (4) – 2 2 r 2 j
2
0r
2
4 2
0r
2
4 2
0r
2
0
30° LCR [
(1) 242 W (2) 305 W (3) 210 W (4) Zero W
114 Physics Gutka

16. In the circuit show below, the K 20. The equation of a wave on a string of linear mass density
key K is closed at t = 0. The V 0.04 kg m –1 is given by ( ? 0.04 kgm – 1
current through the battery is : , , )
, , t =0 L R1
K t x
y = 0.02(m) sin 2 –
/ : R2 0.04(s) 0.50(m)

V(R1 R2 ) V The tension in the string is ( )

(1) R1R 2 at t = 0 & R at t = (1) 6.25 N (2) 4.0 N (3) 12.5 N (4) 0.5 N
2
21. Two fixed frictionless inclined
VR1R 2 planes making an angle 30°
V
(2) and 60° with the vertical are
R12 R 22 at t = 0 & R 2 at t = shown in the figure. Two blocks
A and B are placed on the two
V V(R1 R2 ) planes. What is the relative
(3) R at t = 0 & R R at t =
2 1 2 vertical acceleration of A with
respect to B ?
V VR1R 2 = 30° 60° , ?
(4) R at t = 0 & R 2 R 2 at t =
2 1 2 , , A B , B
A
17. A particle is moving with velocity v K yiˆ xjˆ , where K is
(1) 4.9 ms –2 in vertical direction.
a constant. The general equation for its path is : (2) 4.9 ms –2 in horizontal direction
(3) 9.8 ms –2 in vertical direction
v K yiˆ xjˆ K
(4) Zero
: 22. For a pacticle in uniform circular motion, the acceleration a
(1) y2 = x2 + constant (2) y = x2 + constant at a point P(R, ) on the circle of radius R is (Here is measured
(3) y2 = x + constant (4) xy = constant EN from the x-axis).
18. Let C be the capacitance of a capacitor discharging through
; ,] R P(R,
a resistor R. Suppose t1 is the time taken for the energy stored
in the capacitor to reduce to half its initial value and t2 is the ) , a (; , x- ):
time taken for the charge to reduce to one-fourth its initial 2 2 2
v v v v2
value. Then the ratio t1 /t2 will be : (1) i j (2) – cos i sin j
R R R R
R / C , = ;
= ? v2 v2 v2 v2
(3) – sin i cos j (4) – cos i sin j
R R R R
t1 ; ? ,
LL
23. A small particle of mass m is
t2 ; t1/t2 : projected at an angle with the
x-axis with an initial velocity v0
1 1 in the x-y plane as shown in the
(1) 2 (2) 1 (3) (4)
2 4
v 0 sin
figure. At a time t < ,
g
19. A rectangular loop has a sliding connector PQ of length
and resistance R and it is moving with a speed v as shown. the angular momentum of the particle is : (Where ˆi, ˆj and
A

The set-up is placed in a uniform magnetic field going into

the plane of the paper. The three currents I1, I2 and I are k̂ are unit vectors along x, y and z-axis respectively. )
x- m , , v0
x-y = ;
v 0 sin
t< ,] ; :( ˆi, ˆj k̂ %
g
x, y z- )
1
(1) mgv 0 t2 cos ˆi (2) mgv 0 t2 cos ˆj
2
1
(3) mgv 0 t cos kˆ mgv 0 t2 cos kˆ (4)
R , PQ 2
24. Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of
; v
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

equal lengths. The strings make an angle of 30° with each

,, ;{= other. When suspended in a liquid of density 0.8 g cm–3, the
/ I1, I2 I angle remains the same. If density of the material of the sphere
is 1.6 g cm–3, the dielectric constant of the liquid is :
B v B v B v 2B v
(1) I1 I2 , I= (2) I1 I2 , I= ,
6R 3R R R
, 30° 0.8 g cm–3
B v 2B v B v ] ; ? 1.6
(3) I1 I2 , I= (4) I1 I2 I
3R 3R R g cm–3 ] :
(1) 1 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4) 2
 Physics Gutka 115

25. A point P moves in counter clockwise direction on a circular 2. The minimum force required to start pushing a body up a
path as shown in the figure. The movement of 'P' is such that rough (frictional coefficient µ) inclined plane is F1 while the
it sweeps out a length s = t3 + 5, where s is in metres and minimum force needed to prevent it from sliding down is F2.
t is in seconds. The radius of the path is 20 m. The acceleration
If the inclined plane makes an angle from the horizontal
of 'P' when t = 2s is nearly :
F1
such that tan = 2µ then the ratio is :-
F2
[ ( µ) ,
F1
F2 ;
F1
{ tan = 2µ, :-
F2
P ; = (1) 4 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) 3
3. If 400 of r esista nce is m a de by adding four
'P' s = t3 + 5
100 resistance of tolerance 5%, then the tolerance of the
] s t 20 m t combination is :
= 2s, 'P' : 5% 100 400
(1) 14 m/s2 (2) 13 m/s2 ] :
(3) 12 m/s 2
(4) 7.2m/s2
(1) 20% (2) 5% (3) 10% (4) 15%
26. The potential energy function for the force between two
atoms in a diatomic molecule is approximately given by 4. 3iˆ 4 ˆj kˆ ,
An electric charge + q moves with velocity V

a b in an electromagnetic field given by E 3iˆ ˆj 2kˆ ,

U(x) = – , where a and b are constant and x is the
x12 x 6 B ˆi ˆj 3kˆ .The y component of the force experienced by
distance between the atoms. if the dissociation energy of the
molecule is D = [U(x = ) – Uat equilibrium], D is :

a b
EN ,
+ q is :-

+q
; { = % E 3iˆ ˆj 2kˆ
V 3iˆ 4 ˆj kˆ
B ˆi ˆj 3kˆ
+q
,

U(x) = – ] a b
x12 x 6 y- :-
x ; (1) 2 q (2) 11 q (3) 5 q (4) 3q
D = [U(x = )– U ] , D : 5. A particle of mass 'm' is projected with a velocity v making
an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The magnitude of angular
2 2 2 2
b b b b
LL
(1) (2) (3) (4) momentum of the projectile about the point of projection
6a 2a 12a 4a when the particle is at its maximum height 'h' is :-
27. Two conductors have the same resistance at 0°C but their 30° v 'm' ,
temperature coefficients of resistance are 1 and 2. The
respective temperature coefficients of their series and parallel 'h' ]
combinations are nearly : ; :-
0°C , mv3
3 mv 2 3 mv 3
, % (1) (2) zero ( ;) (3) (4)
A

1 2
2 g 2g 16 g
:
6. The specific heat capacity of a metal at low temperautre (T)
(1)
1 2
, 1 2
(2)
1 2
,
2 2 2
1 2
is given as
3
T
, 1 2 Cp(kJk –1kg–1 ) = 32
2,
1 2
(3) 1 (4) 1 2 400
2 1 2
A 100 gram vessel of this metal is to be cooled from 20°K
to 4°K by a special refrigerator operating at room
temperature (27°C). The amount of work required to cool
AIEEE-2011 the vessel is:-

1. At time t = 0s particle starts moving along the (T) , / / :

3
x-axis. If its kinetic energy increases uniformly with time 't', T
the net force acting on it must be proportional to :- Cp(kJk –1kg–1 ) = 32
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

400
; t = 0s , x- ; / 100 , (27°C)
; 't' , : <+ ] } 20°K 4°K
:-
:-
(1) equal to 0.002 kJ (0.002 kJ )
(1) t (2) constant ( ) (2) greater than 0.148 kJ (0.148 kJ )
(3) between 0.148 kJ and 0.028 kJ
1
(3) t (4) (0.148 kJ 0.028 kJ )
t (4) less than 0.028 kJ (0.028 kJ )
116 Physics Gutka

7. The ouput of an OR gate is connected to both the inputs of a 12. A travelling wave represented by y = A sin( t–kx) is
NAND gate. The combination will serve as a: superimposed on another wave represented by
OR NAND y = A sin ( t + kx). The resultant is:-
: y = A sin( t–kx) , y=Asin( t + kx)
(1) OR gate (2) NOT gate (3) NOR gate (4) AND gate
, :-
8. Two positive charges of magnitude 'q' are placed at the ends
of a side (side 1) of a square of side '2a'. Two negative charges 1
(1) A standing wave having nodes at x n ,n 0,1,2
of the same magnitude are kept at the other corners. Starting 2 2
from rest, if a charge Q moves from the middle of side 1 (2) A wave travelling along + x direction
to the centre of square, its kinetic energy at the centre of (3) A wave travelling along –x direction
square is :- n
(4) A standing wave having nodes at x ; n = 0, 1, 2
'2a' , , ( 1) 'q' 2
13. A thin circular disk of radius R is uniformly charged with density
> 0 per unit area. The disk rotates about its axis with a
; , Q
uniform angular speed . The magnetic moment of the disk
1 ; ]
is :-
:-
R , ; ? >0 {
1 2qQ 1 , ,
(1) 1 (2) zero
4 0 a 5 ; ? ; :-
4
1 2qQ 1 1 2qQ 2 R R4
1 1 (1) 2 R4 (2) R4 (3) (4)
(3)
4 a (4)
4 a 2 4
0 5 0 5
14. After absorbing a slowly moving neutron of mass m N
9. Combination of two identical capacitors, a resistor R and a EN (momentum ~0) a nucleus of mass M breaks into two nuclei
dc voltage source of voltage 6V is used in an experiment of masses m1 and 5m1(6m1=M+mN), respectively. If the de
on (C–R) circuit. It is found that for a parallel combination
Broglie wavelength of the nucleus with mass m1 is , then
of the capacitor the time in which the voltage of the fully
charged combination reduces to half its original voltage is de Broglie wavelength of the other nucleus will be :-
10 second. For series combination the time needed for / mN ( ~ 0)
reducing the voltage of the fully charged series combination
by half is :- M , % m1 5m1
, =] , R 6V , / (6m1 = M + mN) ; m1
, (C–R) ; /; ] /; :-
LL
%
? 10 (1) 25 (2) 5 (3) (4)
5 –
% ? ; :- 15. Statement-1: A nucleus having energy E1 decays be
–
(1) 20 second (2) 10 second emission to daughter nucleus having energy E2, but the rays
(3) 5 second (4) 2.5 second are emitted with a continuous energy spectrum having end point
10. A beaker contains water up to a height h1 and kerosene of energy E1–E2.
height h2 above water so that the total height of (water +
-1 : , ,
A

E1 E2
kerosene) is (h1 + h2). Refractive index of water is µ 1 and
– –
that of kerosene is µ 2. The apparent shift in the position of { ] ; E1–E2 ,
the bottom of the beaker when viewed from above is :-
] h1 h2 Statement-1: To conserve energy and momentum in
( + ) (h1 + h2) -decay at least three particles must take part in the
µ1 µ2 transformation.
:- - ; :
1 1 1 1
(1) 1 h 1 h 1 h 1 h
µ1 2 µ 2 1 (2) µ1 1 µ2 2 (1) Statement-1 is incorrect, statement-2 is correct

1 1 1 1 -1 ; -2 ;
(3) 1 h 1 h 1 h 1 h
µ1 1 µ 2 2 (4) µ1 2 µ2 1 (2) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is incorrect
-1 ; -2 ;
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

11. A metal rod of Young's modulus Y and coefficient of thermal

expansion is held at its two ends such that its length remains (3) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 correct; statement-
invariant. If its temperature is raised by t°C, the linear stress 2 is the correct explanation of statement-1
developed in it is:- -1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [;
Y , +
; (4) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is correct; statement
t°C ] :-
-2 is not the correct explanation of statement-1.
t Y 1 -1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [;
(1) (2) (3) Y t (4)
Y t (Y t)
 Physics Gutka 117

16. When monochromatic red light is used instead of blue light

in a convex lens, its focal length will :-
AIEEE-2012
,
] :- 1. Truth table for system of four NAND gates as shown in figure is:-
(1) Does not depend on colour of light = NAND ; :-
( ) A
(2) Increase ( <+ ) Y
(3) Decrease ( ) B
(4) Remain same ( ) A B Y A B Y
17. Statement-1: On viewing the clear blue portion of the sky 0 0 1 0 0 0
through a Calcite Crystal, the intensity of transmitted light 0 1 0 0 1 1
varies as the crystal is rotated. (1) (2)
1 0 0 1 0 1
-1 : ] 1 1 1 1 1 0
? A B Y A B Y
Statement-2: The light coming from the sky is polarized due 0 0 0 0 0 1
to scattering of sun light by particles in the atmosphere. The 0 1 0 0 1 1
scattering is largest for blue light. (3) (4)
1 0 1 1 0 0
-2: 1 1 1 1 1 0
/ , 2. Helium gas goes through a cycle ABCDA (consisting of two
(1) Statement-1 is incorrect, statement-2 is correct isochoric and two isobaric lines) as shown in figure. Efficiency
EN of this cycle is nearly (Assume the gas to be close to ideal
-1 ; -2 ; gas) :-
(2) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is incorrect
, ABCDA ABCDA
-1 ; -2 ;
=
(3) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 correct; statement-
2 is the correct explanation of statement-1 :( )

-1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [; (1) 12.5% 2P0

B C

(2) 15.4% P D
A
LL
(3) 9.1%
0

(4) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is correct; statement

-2 is not the correct explanation of statement-1. (4) 10.5% V 2V 0 0

3. Hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to another state

-1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [; with principal quantum number equal to 4. Then the number
of spectral lines in the emission spectra will be :-

18. Statement-1: Two longitudinal waves given by equations:

[; [; 4

y1(x, t) = 2a sin ( t – kx) and y2(x, t) = a sin (2 t – 2kx)

A

will have equal intensity. [; :-

-1 : /; y 1 (x, t) = 2a sin ( t – kx) (1) 6 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 5
4. A coil is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, with the plane
y2(x, t) = a sin (2 t – 2kx) of the coil parallel to the magnetic lines of force. When a
Statement-2: Intensity of waves of given frequency in same current is passed through the coil it starts oscillating; it is very
difficult to stop. But if an aluminium plate is placed near to
medium is proportional to square of amplitude only.
the coil, it stops. This is due to :-
-2 : /; , ;{= ,
; , /
(1) Statement-1 is incorrect, statement-2 is correct ] ;
, , ] ;
-1 ; -2 ; :-
(2) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is incorrect (1) Electromagnetic induction in the aluminium plate giving
-1 ; -2 ; rise to electromagnetic damping
; ;
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(3) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 correct; statement-

2 is the correct explanation of statement-1 (2) Development of air current when the plate is placed
-1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [; ] /
(3) Induction of electrical charge on the plate
(4) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is correct; statement
-2 is not the correct explanation of statement-1. (4) Shielding of magnetic lines of force as aluminium is a
paramagnetic material
-1 ; -2 ; -2, -1 [;
; , , ;
118 Physics Gutka
5. A spectrometer gives the following reading when used to 9. Resistance of a given wire is obtained by measuring the
measure the angle of a prism. current flowing in it and the voltage difference applied across
Main scale reading : 58.5 degree it. If the percentage errors in the measurement of the current
Vernier scale reading : 09 divisions and the voltage difference are 3% each, then error in the
Given that 1 division on main scale corresponds to 0.5 degree. value of resistance of the wire is :-
Total divisions on the vernier scale is 30 and match with 29 /
divisions of the main scale. The angle of the prism from the ; /
above data :
= 3% ] = :-
(1) 3% (2) 6%
: (3) zero (4) 1%
10. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over the surface of non-
[; : 58.5 conducting disc of radius R. The disc rotates about an axis
: 09 perpendicular to its plane and passing through its centre with
an angular velocity . As a result of this rotation a magnetic
& [; , 0.5 field of induction B is obtained at the centre of the disc. If
30 ; [; 29 we keep both the amount of charge placed on the disc and
its angular velocity to be constant and vary the radius of the
:
disc then the variation of the magnetic induction at the centre
(1) 59 degree (2) 58.59 degree
of the disc will be represented by the figure :-
(3) 58.77 degree (4) 58.65 degree
6. In Young's double slit experiment, one of the slit is wider than
R , ; Q , :
other, so that the amplitude of the light from one slit is double ;
of that from other slit. If Im be the maximum intensity, the ? ?
resultant intensity I when they interfere at phase difference ;{= B ;
is given by :
;
}& ], ] ; =
:-
; Im ]

(1)
I,

Im
(1 + 8cos2 ) (2)
Im
(4 + 5cosf)
]
EN :-

(1)
B
(2)
B

9 2 9
R R
Im Im
(3) (1 + 2cos2 ) (4) (1 + 4cos2 )
3 2 5 2
7. An object 2.4 m in front of a lens forms a sharp image on
LL
a film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass plate 1 cm thick, of
B B
refractive index 1.50 is interposed between lens and film
with its plane faces parallel to film. At what distance (from (3) (4)
lens) should object be shifted to be in sharp focus on film ?
R R
2.4 m , ] 12 cm ,
11. If a simple pendulum has significant amplitude (up to a factor
, 1.50 1 cm of 1/e of original) only in the period between t = 0 s to
t = ts, then t may be called the average life of the pendulum.
A

When the spherical bob of the pendulum suffers a retardation

(due to viscous drag) proportional to its velocity, with 'b' as
the constant of proportionality, the average life time of the
, ?
pendulum is (assuming damping is small) in seconds :-
(1) 5.6 m (2) 7.2 m , ; t = 0 s t = ts, ,
(3) 2.4 m (4) 3.2 m
( 1/e ) ] t
;
Potential difference

25
( ) ] 'b' ]
:-
V in votls

20
15 2 0.693 1
10 (1) (2) (3) b (4)
8. 5 b b b
12. An electromagnetic wave in vacuum has the electric and
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
magnetic fields E and B , which are always perpendicular
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

Time t in seconds
to each other. The direction of polarizaiton is given by X
The figure shows an experimental plot for discharging of a
capacitor in an R–C circuit. The time constant t of this circuit and that of wave propagation by k . Then :-
lies between:-
, ; , ;{=E B ]
= , R–C =
, / X
; t :-
(1) 100 sec and 150 sec k. :-
(2) 150 sec and 200 sec
(1) X || E and k || B E (2) X || B and k || B E
(3) 0 and 50 sec
(4) 50 sec and 100 sec (3) X || E and k || E B (4) X || B and k || E B
 Physics Gutka 119
13. A diatomic molecule is made of two masses m 1 and m2 which (2) Sta te me nt–I is tr ue, Stat em ent– II is tr ue,
are separated by a distance r. If we calculate its rotational Statement–II is a not correct explanation of Statement–I.
energy by applying Bohr's rule of angular momentum -I ; ] –II ; ] -II -I [;
quantization, its energy will be given by : (n is an integer)
m1 m2 r (3) Statement–I is true, Statement–II is false.
; ; ? -I ; ] -II
] (n , ) :- (4) Statement–I is false, Statement–II is true.
(m 1 m 2 )n h 2 2
(m 1 m 2 ) n h 2 2 2 -I ] -II ;
(1) (2) ˆi 2 ˆj m/s,
2m 1m 2 r 2 2m 12m 22 r 2 3. A projectile is given an initial velocity of

n 2h 2 2n 2 h 2 where î is along the ground and ĵ is along the vertical. If

(3) (4) g = 10 m/s2 , the equation of its trajectory is :
2(m 1 m 2 )r 2 (m 1 m 2 )r 2
; , ˆi 2 ˆj m/s ] î
ˆj ; g = 10 m/s2,
JEE(MAIN)-2013 %
(1) y = x – 5x2 (2) y = 2x – 5x2
1. A metallic rod of length ' ' is tied to a string of length 2 and (3) 4y = 2x – 5x 2 (4) 4y = 2x – 25x 2
made to rotate with angular speed on a horizontal table 4. Two capacitors C1 and C2 are charged to 120V and 200V
with one end of the string fixed. If there is a vertical magnetic respectively. It is found that by connecting them together the
field 'B' in the region, the e.m.f. induced across the ends of potential on each one can be made zero. Then :
the rod is :
= C1 C2 % 120V 200V
' ' , / + 2 ,
; , + ;
, ; ?
%
{= , ; { = 'B' ] + (1) 5C1 = 3C2 (2) 3C1 = 5C2
%& EN (3) 3C1 + 5C2 = 0 (4) 9C1 = 4C2
5. A circular loop of radius 0.3 cm lies parallel to a much bigger
circular loop of radius 20 cm. The centre of the small loop
is on the axis of the bigger loop. The distance between their
centres is 15 cm. If a current of 2.0 A flows through the smaller
loop, then the flux linked with bigger loop is :-
0.3 cm , ; , 20 cm ;

15 cm ; 2.0A / ]
LL

2B 2
3B 2
4B 2
5B 2 %
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) 9.1 × 10 –11 weber (2) 6 × 10 –11 weber
2 2 2 2 (3) 3.3 × 10 –11 weber (4) 6.6 × 10 –9 weber
2. This question has Statement I and Statement II. Of the four 6. Diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6cm and thickness at the
choices given after the Statements, choose the one that best centre is 3 mm. If speed of light in material of lens is
describes the two Statements. 2 × 108 m/s, the focal length of the lens is :
I II 6cm 3 mm ;
]
A

2 × 108 m/s ]
:
(1) 15 cm (2) 20 cm
Statement - I : A point particle of mass m moving with speed (3) 30 cm (4) 10 cm
v collides with stationary point particle of mass M. If the 7. A diode detector is used to detect an amplitude modulated
wave of 60% modulation by using a condenser of capacity
1 2 250 pico farad in parallel with a load resistance 100 kilo
maximum energy loss possible is given as f mv then
2 ohm. Find the maximum modulated frequency which could
be detected by it.
m
f= . ] 250 = 100
M m
] 60%
-I: v m , }
%
M ; {; (1) 10.62 MHz (2) 10.62 kHz
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(3) 5.31 MHz (4) 5.31 kHz

1 2 m 8. A beam of unpolarised light of intensity I0 is passed through
f mv ] f= . a polaroid A and then through another polaroid B which is
2 M m
Statement - II : Maximum energy loss occurs when the oriented so that its principal plane makes an angle of 45°
particles get stuck together as a result of the collision. relative to that of A. The intensity of the emergent light is :-
- II : {; I0 , A
, , B B [;
(1) Sta te me nt–I is true, Stat em ent– II is true, A [; 45° %
Statement–II is a correct explanation of Statement–I. (1) I0 (2) I 0 /2
-I ; ] -II ; ] -II (3) I 0 /4 (4) I 0 /8
-I [;
120 Physics Gutka
9. The supply voltage to a room is 120V. The resistance of the (1) points ( )
lead wires is 6W. A 60 W bulb is already switched on. What (2) straight lines ( )
is the decrease of voltage across the bulb, when a 240 W
heater is switched on in parallel to the bulb? (3) semi-circles ( )
120V 6W (4) concentric circles ( ; )
60 W 240 W 14. The magnetic field in a travelling electromagnetic wave has
a peak value of 20nT. The peak value of electric field strength
is :
(1) zero V (2) 2.9 V (3) 13.3 V (4)10.04 V ; ; {= 20nT
10. P
{= %
2P0 (1) 3 V/m (2) 6 V/m
(3) 9 V/m (4) 12 V/m
15. The anode voltage of photocell is kept fixed. The wavelength
P0 l of the light falling on the cathode is gradually changed. The
plate current I of the photocell varies as follows :
, /
V0 2V0 V l &/ / I
The above P-V diagram represents the thermodynamic cycle %
of an engine, operating with an ideal monoatomic gas. The
amount of heat, extracted from the source in a single cycle is: I I
P-V = , , ,
, ,
11 (1) (2)
(1) P0V0 (2) 13 (3) P0 V0 (4) 4P0V 0
P0 V0 2 O O
2
11. A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating with an angular
velocity 0 is placed on a rough horizontal surface. The initial
velocity of the centre of the hoop is zero. What will be the I I
velocity of the centre of the hoop when it ceases to slip?
; 0 ?
{
m

]
r , ,
EN
; ;
(3)
O
(4)
O

r 0 r 0 r 0 16. Assume that a drop of liquid evaporates by decrease in its

(1) (2) (3) (4) r surface energy, so that its temperature remains unchanged.
4 3 2 0

12. This question has Statement I and Statement II. Of the four What should be the minimum radius of the drop for this to
choice given after the Statements, choose the one that best be possible? The surface tension is T, density of liquid is r
describes the two Statements. and L is its latent heat of vaporization.
LL

I II ,
] ; ,
T ] ? r
Statement-I : Higher the range, greater is the resistance L
of ammeter.
L T T 2T
-I : ]/ (1)
T
(2) L (3) L
(4) L
Statement-II : To increase the range of ammeter, additional
A

shunt needs to be used across it. 17. In a hydrogen like atom electron makes transition from an
energy level with quantum number n to another with quantum
-II : ]
number (n–1). If n>>1, the frequency of radiation emitted
is proportional to :
(1) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, Statement-II is [; n ,
the correct explanation of Statement-I
[; (n–1) ; n>>1,
-I ; ] -II ; ] -II -I [;

(2) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, Statement-II is 1 1 1 1

not the correct explanation of Statement-I. (1) (2) 2 (3) 3 (4)
n n n 2 n3
-I ; ] -II ; ] -II -I [; 18. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a long rod AB of
length L as shown in the figure. The electric potential at the
(3) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is false. point O lying at a distance L from the end A is :-
-I ; ] -II Q L , + AB , :
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(4) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true. = A L O

-I ] -II ; %
13. Two coherent point sources S1 and S 2 are separated by a
small distance 'd' as shown. The fringes obtained on the
screen will be :
S1 S2 'd' , Q 3Q
(1) (2)
= % 8 0 L 4 0 L

Q Q ln 2
d (3) (4)
4 0L ln 2 4 0L
S1 S 2
D Screen
 Physics Gutka 121

List-I List-II
JEE(MAIN)-2014
(a) (i)
1. The pressure that has to be applied to the ends of a steel ,
wire of length 10 cm to keep its length constant when its
temperature is raised by 100°C is (For steel Young's modulus (b) (ii)
is 2 × 1011 N m –2 and coefficient of thermal expansion is
1.1 × 10–5 K–1 )
10 cm , 100°C
(c) (iii)

( ; 2 ×1011 N m–2
1.1 × 10–5 K–1 ) (d) (iv)
(1) 2.2 × 10 7 Pa (2) 2.2 × 10 6 Pa }
(3) 2.2 × 10 8 Pa (4) 2.2 × 10 9 Pa
2. A bob of mass m attached to an inextensible string of length (a ) (b) (c) (d)
is suspended from a vertical support. The bob rotates in (1) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)
a horizontal circle with an angular speed rad/s about the (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
vertical. About the point of suspension : (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)
(4) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii)
, ; m , , /
5. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5 bulbs of
; rad/s 100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1 kW. The voltage
, { ? : of the electric mains is 220 V. The minimum capacity of the
(1) Angular momentum changes in direction but not in main fuse of the building will be :
magnitude , 40 W 15 ] 100 W 5 ] 80 W
; 5 , 1 kW 1 220 V
(2) Angular momentum changes both in direction and [; { :
magnitude EN (1) 12 A (2) 14 A (3) 8 A (4) 10 A
; , 6. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a straight
(3) Angular momentum is conserved line. In first s, after starting from rest it travels a distance
; a, and in next s it travels 2a, in same direction, then :
(4) Angular momentum changes in magnitude but not in , ;
direction. a 2a
; ; :
3. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way that
(1) Amplitude of motion is 4a
a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level. The open
4a
LL
end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the tube is raised
vertically up by addition 46 cm. What will be length of the air (2) Time period of oscillation is 6
column above mercury in the tube now?(Atmospheric pressure 6
= 76 cm of Hg) (3) Amplitude of motion is 3a
[ 3a
8 cm [ (4) Time period of oscillation is 8
46 cm 8
7. The coercivity of a small magnet where the ferromagnet gets
A

?( ;
demagnetized is 3 × 103 A m–1. The current required to be
= Hg 76 cm) passed in a solenoid of length 10 cm and number of turns
(1) 38 cm (2) 6 cm (3) 16 cm (4) 22 cm 100, so that the magnet gets demagnetized when inside the
4. Match List-I (Electromagnetic wave type) with List-II (Its solenoid, is :
association/application) and select the correct option from ] ; ]
the choices given below the lists :
3 × 103 A m–1 [; 100 10 cm ,
-I ( ; )
/ ]
-II ( / )
; : ]
%
(1) 3A (2) 6 A
(3) 30 mA (4) 60 mA
8. In the circuit shown here, the point ‘C’ is kept connected
List-I List-II to point ‘A’ till the current flowing through the circuit becomes
constant. Afterward, suddenly, point ‘C’ is disconnected from
(a) Infrared waves (i) To treat muscular point ‘A’ and connected to point ‘B’ at time t = 0. Ratio of
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

strain the voltage across resistance and the inductor at t = L/R will
be equal to :
(b) Radio waves (ii) For broadcasting ] ‘C’ ‘A’

(c) X-rays (iii) To detect fracture of / ]

bones ‘C’ ‘A’ ‘B’ t=0 ; +
t = L/R :
(d) Ultraviolet rays (iv) Absorbed by the A C
R
ozone layer of the 1 e
(1) – 1 (2)
atmosphere e
L
B
e
(3) (4) 1
1 e
122 Physics Gutka
9. A mass ‘m’ is supported by a massless string wound around 13. A green light is incident from the water to the air - water
a uniform hollow cylinder of mass m and radius R. If the string interface at the critical angle ( ). Select the corr ect
does not slip on the cylinder, with what acceleration will the statement.
mass fall on release?
( )
R ‘m’ , , [ ,
, 'm' ; (1) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency is more
] than that of green light will come out to the air medium.
; ] ]
5g /;
(1)
6 (2) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the
(2) g R water at various angles to the normal
m
;
2g
(3)
3 (3) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the
water at an angle of 90° to the normal.
g
(4) m 90° ;
2
10. From a tower of height H, a particle is thrown vertically
upwards with a speed u. The time taken by the particle, to (4) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency is less than
hit the ground, is n times that taken by it to reach the highest that of green light will come out to the air medium.
point of its path. The relation between H, u and n is : ; ] ]
H , ] u , /;
14. Hydrogen ( 1 H1), Deuterium ( 1 H2 ), singly ionised Helium
;
( 2He 4 ) + and doubly ionised lithium ( 3 Li 6 ) + + all have one
; n H, u n EN: electron around the nucleus. Consider an electron transition
(1) 2g H = nu2 (n – 2) (2) g H = (n – 2)u2 from n = 2 to n = 1. If the wave lengths of emitted radiation
(3) 2g H = n2u2 (4) g H = (n – 2)2u2 are 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively then approximately which
one of the following is correct ?
3
11. A thin convex lens made from crown glass µ has focal (1H1), (1H2), (2He4)+
2
}/ (3 Li6)+ + ,
length ƒ. When it is measured in two different liquids having
n=2 n=1 ;
4 5 /; % 1, 2, 3 4 ]
LL
refractive indices and , it has the focal length ƒ1 and
3 3 ?
ƒ2 respectively. The correct relation between the focal lengths (1) 1 = 2 = 4 3 = 9 4 (2) 1 = 2 2 = 3 3 = 4 4
is : (3) 4 1 = 2 2 = 2 3 = 4 (4) 1 = 2 2 = 2 3 = 4
15. The radiation corresponding to 3 2 transition of hydrogen
3 atom falls on a metal surface to produce photoelectrons. These
µ , ƒ
2 electrons are made to enter a magnetic field of 3 × 10–4T. If
the radius of the largest circular path followed by these electrons
A

4 5 is 10.0 mm, the work function of the metal is close to:-

]
3 3 3 2 , /
% ƒ1 ƒ2 ; 3 × 10–4T ,
: ;{= ; } ;
(1) ƒ2 > ƒ and ƒ1 becomes negative 10.0 mm ] / :-
ƒ2 > ƒ ƒ1 (1) 0.8 eV (2) 1.6 eV
(3)1.8 eV (4) 1.1 eV
(2) ƒ1 and ƒ2 both become negative
16. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical cross
ƒ1 ƒ2
(3) ƒ1 = ƒ2 < ƒ x3
section given by y . If the coefficient of friction is 0.5,
(4) ƒ1 > ƒ and ƒ2 become negative 6
ƒ1 > ƒ ƒ2 the maximum height above the ground at which the block
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

12. A pipe of length 85 cm is closed from one end. Find the can be placed without slipping is :-
number of possible natural oscillations of air column in the , m
pipe whose frequencies lie below 1250 Hz. The velocity of
sound in air is 340 m/s. x3
y ; ? 0.5 ] /
85 cm , , 6

[; ] ] :-

1250 Hz / 340 m/s 1 1 1 2

(1) m (2) m (3) m (4) m
(1) 6 (2) 4 (3) 12 (4) 8 3 2 6 3
 Physics Gutka 123
17. Two beams, A and B, of plane polarized light with mutually 3. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 20 ms–1 .
perpendicular planes of polarization are seen through a It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of 1000 Hz. The
polaroid. From the position when the beam A has maximum percentage change in the frequency heard by a person
sta nding ne ar t he t ra ck a s the tr ai n pa sses him is
intensity (and beam B has zero intensity), a rotation of polaroid
(speed of sound = 320 ms–1) close to :-
through 30º makes the two beams appear equally bright.
( ) 20 ms–1
If the initial intensitites of the two beams are I A and I B
/ 1000 Hz ; /
IA 320 ms–1 ] [
respectively, then
I B equals : ] } /
:-
; / ; A B
(1) 18% (2) 24% (3) 6% (4) 12%
+} A
4.
( B ; ) 30º ?
| ; %
L
IA
IA IB ] IB :

I I
1 3
(1) 1 (2) (3) 3 (4) Two long current carrying thin wires, both with current I, are
3 2
held by the insulating threads of length L and are in equilibrium
18. Assume that an electric field E 30x 2 iˆ exists in space. Then as shown in the figure, with threads making an angle ' ' with
the potential difference VA – VO, where VO is the potential the vertical. If wires have mass per unit length then the value
of I is :- (g = gravitational acceleration)
at the origin and VA the potential at x = 2 m is :-
I L
, { = E 30x 2 iˆ VA – VO, / / }
VO
(1) –80 V (2) 80 V
, VA, x = 2 m
(3) 120 V
EN
] :-
(4) –120 V
' '

:-
];
g ;
;
]I

gL gL
JEE(MAIN)-2015 (1) 2 tan (2) tan
µ0 µ0

1. A red LED emits light at 0.1 watt uniformly around it. The gL gL
amplitude of the electric field of the light at a distance of 1 (3) sin (4) 2sin
LL
µ 0 cos µ 0 cos
m from the diode is:-
5. Assuming human pupil to have a radius of 0.25cm and a
, ( ) 0.1 ], comfortable viewing distance of 25cm, the minimum
1m ] {= separation between two objects that human eye can resolve
at 500 nm wavelength is :-
:- = 0.25cm,
(1) 5.48 V/m (2) 7.75 V/m 25cm ] 500 nm ]
A

(3) 1.73 V/m (4) 2.45 V/m = :-

2. A pendulum made of a uniform wire of cross sectional area (1) 100 µm (2) 300 µm
A has time period T. When an additional mass M is added (3) 1 µm (4) 30 µm
6. An inductor (L = 0.03 H) and a resistor (R = 0.15 k ) are
to its bob, the time period changes to T M. If the Young's
connected in series to a battery of 15V EMF in a circuit shown
below. The key K1 has been kept closed for a long time. Then
1
modulus of the material of the wire is Y then is equal at t = 0, K1 is opened and key K2 is closed simultaneously.
Y At t = 1ms, the current in the circuit will be (e5 150) :-
to :- (g = gravitational acceleration) ], (L = 0.03 H) , (R = 0.15
, { 'A' , k ) 15V ( )
K1 ; ; t = 0 ] K1
T , M
[ ] K2 ; t = 1ms ,
+ TM ; / (e5 150) :-
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

1 0.03H 0.15k
; Y :
Y
(g = ; ) K2
2 2
TM A T A
(1) 1 (2) 1 K1
T Mg TM Mg
15V
2 2
TM A TM Mg (1) 6.7 mA (2) 0.67 mA
(3) 1 (4) 1
T Mg T A (3) 100 mA (4) 67 mA
124 Physics Gutka
7. An LCR circuit is equivalent to a damped pendulum. In an 8. In the given circuit, charge Q2 on the 2µF capacitor changes
LCR circuit the capacitor is charged to Q 0 and then as C is varied from 1µF to 3µF. Q2 as a function of 'C' is given
connected to the L and R as shown below :- properly by : (figures are drawn schematically and are not
to scale) :-
LCR (, ;
]C 1µF 3µF ] 2µF =
LCR = Q0 ] Q2 C : Q2
L R :- (
) :-
R L
1µF
C

2µF

E
If a student plots graphs of the square of maximum charge
Charge
(Q 2Max ) on the capacitor with time (t) for two different values
L1 and L2 (L1 > L2) of L then which of the following represents
this graph correctly ? (plots are schematic and not drawn to Q2
scale) (1)

C
,
;t
L

=
] ] L1 and L2 (L1 > L2)
(Q 2Max )
EN
]

Charge
1µF 3µF

(
) Q2
(2)

C
LL
L1 1µF 3µF
Q2Max
(1) L2 Charge

t
Q2
(3)
A

C
Q2Max Q0 (For both L 1 and L 2) 1µF 3µF

(2) Charge
t

Q2
(4)
Q2Max L1
C
1µF 3µF
L2
(3)
9. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is smallest
t near the ground and increases with height from the ground.
When a light beam is directed horizontally, the Huygens'
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

principle leads us to conclude that as it travels, the light beam:

= ]
Q 2
Max L2 <+ ; ]
] ;
L1
(4) ] , :
t (1) bends downwards >
(2) bends upwards >
(3) becomes narrower ) (
(4) goes horizontally without any deflection
,] {
 Physics Gutka 125
10. Consider a spherical shell of radius R at temperature T. The 12. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of angle A.
black body radiation inside it can be considered as an ideal If the refractive index of the material of the prism is µ, a ray,
gas of photons with internal ene rgy per unit volume incident at an angle , on the face AB would get transmitted
through the face AC of the prism provided :
U 1 U A ,
u = T 4 and pressure p = . If the shell now
V 3 V ; µ, ] AB ]
undergoes an adiabatic expansion the relation between T
] AC ; :
and R is -
; ( ) R T A
, ,
U
] u = T4 B C
V

1 U 1 1 1
p= ; : ]T R (1) cos µ sin A sin
3 V µ

-
1 1 1
(2) cos µ sin A sin
1 1 µ
(1) T (2) T
R R3
(3) T e –R (4) T e –3R 1 1 1
(3) sin µ sin A sin
11. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the edge of µ
a cliff 240 m high with initial speed of 10 m/s and 40 m/
s respectively. Which of the following graph best represents 1
1 1
the time variation of relative position of the second stone with EN (4) sin µ sin A sin
µ
respect to the first ?
(Assume stones do not rebound after hitting the ground and 13. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carrying a current
neglect air resistance, take g = 10 m/s2 ) I of 12 A is place in different orientations as shown in the
figures below :
(The figure are schematic and not drawn to scale)
10 cm 5 cm , ( ) ,
240 m , ] ,
] I = 12 A]
] % 10 m/s 40 m/s ] ] ( ) :
( ) ; z z
LL
( ) ?
B I B
( , ]
I I
.; ] g = 10 m/s2) (a) y (b) I I
y
I I
( ) x x I

(y2–y1)m
240
A

z z

B
(1) I B
t(s) (c) I
y (d)
I I I
8 12 y
I I
x x I
(y2–y1)m
240 If there is a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T in the positive
z direction, in which orientations the loop would be in (i) stable
(2) equilibrium and (ii) unstable equilibrium ?
t(s) 0.3 T , { =] z
8 12 ] , ]; ( ) (i)
(ii) ] ?
(y2–y1)m (1) (b) and (d), respectively % (b) (d)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

240
(2) (b) and (c), respectively % (b) (c)
(3) (a) and (b), respectively % (a) (b)
(3)
(4) (a) and (c), respectively (c), % (a)
t(s) 14. A particle of mass m moving in the x direction with speed 2
t 8 12
is hit by another particle of mass 2m moving in the y direction
with speed . If the collisions perfectly inelastic , the percentage
(y2–y1)m
240 loss in the energy during the collision is close to :
x- 2 ,m , ] y-
(4) 2m , ; ; ( )
t(s) % ] {;( ) :
12 (1) 56 % (2) 62% (3) 44% (4) 50%
126 Physics Gutka
15. Consider an ideal gas confined in an isolated closed chamber. 18. A long cylindrical shell carries positive surface charge in
As the gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion, the average the upper half and negative surface charge – in the lower
time of collision between molecules increases as Vq, where half. The electric field lines around the cylinder will look like
Cp figure given in : (figures are schematic and not drawn to scale)
V is the volume of the gas. The value of q is :- /
Cv
– ( )
( )] ( ) ( )
{ =& ];
: ]
( )
( ;) Vq <+ ] V

Cp
q :- +++
Cv
++– –+
(1) – – ––
+

1 1
(1) (2)
2 2

3 5 3 5
(3) (4)
6 6
+++
16. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a spherical (2) + +
–– ––
– ––
R
portion of radius is removed, as shown in the figure.
2
Taking gravitational potential V = 0 at r = , the potential
at the centre of the cavity thus formed is :
(G = gravitational constant)

M R
R
2
EN
, ;
(3) +
+++
–– ––
– ––
+

] r= )
; V ; ,] ( )
] ; :
(G = ; )
LL

+++
(4) + +
–– ––
– ––

2GM 2GM
(1) (2)
A

3R R
19. As an electron makes a transition from an excited state to
GM GM
(3) (4) the ground state of a hydrogen - like atom/ion :
2R R
]
:
F (1) kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases but
17. A B
total energy remains same
] <+

Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 20 (2) kinetic energy and total energy decrease but potential
N and 100 N, respectively. These are being pressed against energy increases
a wall by a force F as shown. If the coefficient of friction
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

<+
between the blocks is 0.1 and between block B and the wall
is 0.15, the frictional force applied by the wall on block B
is :- (3) its kinetic energy increases but potential energy and
total energy decreases
( )A B %
20 N 100 N ], F
; ? ]A B 0.1 B (4) kinetic energy, potential energy and total energy
decrease
0.15 ] } B :-
(1) 120 N (2) 150 N
]
(3) 100 N (4) 80 N
 Physics Gutka 127
20. Match List-I (Fundament Experiment) w ith List-II (its 2. 'n' moles of an ideal gas undergoes a process A B as shown
conclusion) and select the correct option from the choices in the figure. The maximum temperature of the gas during the
given below the list : process will be :
'n' , A B ( =
:
List-I List-II
P
(A) Franck-Hertz (i) Particle
2P0 A
Experiment. nature of light
(B) Photo-electric (iii) Discrete P0 B
experiment energy levels
V
of atom V0 2V0
(C) Davison-Germer (iiii) Wave nature 9P0 V0 9 P0 V0
Experiment of electroc (1) (2)
nR 4nR
(iv) Structure of 3P0 V0 9 P0 V0
atom (3) (4)
2nR 2nR
3. Two identical wires A and B, each of length 'l', carry the same
current I. Wire A is bent into a circle of radius R and wire
-I ( ) -II ( ) ( ) B is bent to form a square of side 'a'. If BA and BB are the values
: of magnetic field at the centres of the circle and square
BA
respectively, then the ratio is :
List-I List-II BB
EN , A B 'l' / I
(A) (i)
A R , B 'a' ,
; BA BB % ;
(B) (iii) BA
= ] :
BB
(C) (iiii) 2 2 2 2

(1 ) (2) (3) (4)

8 2 8 16 2 16
LL
(iv) 4. An ideal gas undergoes a quasi static, reversible process in which
its molar heat capacity C remains constant. If during this process
the relation of pressure P and volume V is given by PVn = constant,
then n is given by (Here C P and C V are molar specific heat
(1) A-ii, B-i, C-iii (2) A-iv, B-iii, C-ii at constant pressure and constant volume, respectively):-
(3) A-i, B-iv, C-iii (4) A-ii, B-iv, C-iii ;
/ C ; P
A

JEE(MAIN)-2016 V PVn = (CP CV %

/ ) 'n' :-
1. A combination of capacitors is set up as shown in the figure.
C CV
The magnitude of the electric field, due to a point charge Q (1) n
C CP
(having a charge equal to the sum of the charges on the 4
µF and 9 µF capacitors), at a point 30 m from it , would equal: CP
(2) n
, = , Q CV
4 µF 9 µF ) C – CP
(3) n
} 30 m &{ = : C – CV

3 µF CP – C
(4) n
4 µF C CV
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

9 µF 5. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100 gives a full

scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is passed through
2 µF it. The value of the resistance, which can convert this
galvanometer into ammeter giving a full scale deflection for
+ – a current of 10A, is :-
8V 100 1 mA
(1) 480 N/C (2) 240 N/C 10A ,
(3 ) 360 N/C (4) 420 N/C :-
(1) 3 (2) 0.01
(3) 2 (4) 0.1
128 Physics Gutka
6. The region between two concentric spheres of radii 'a' and 9. An arc lamp requires a direct current of 10A at 80V to function.
If it is connected to a 220V (rms), 50 Hz AC supply, the series
A
'b', respectively (see figure), has volume charge density , inductor needed for it to work is close to :-
r , 80V 10A /
where A is a constant and r is the distance from the centre.
(DC) 220V (rms), 50 Hz
At the centre of the spheres is a point charge Q. The value
of A such that the electric field in the region between the spheres (AC) :-
will be constant, is :- (1) 0.065 H
'a' 'b' , ( = ) (2) 80 H
(3) 0.08 H
A (4) 0.044 H
&? ] A r
r
, Q A
JEE(MAIN)-2017
, &{ = :-
1. Which of the following statements is false ?
a (1) A rheostat can be used as a potential divider
Q (2) Kirchhoff's second law represents energy conservation
b
(3) Wheatstone bridge is the most sensitive when all the four
resistances are of the same order of magnitude.
2Q Q
(1) (2) (4) In a balanced wheatstone bridge if the cell and the
a2 2 a2 galvanometer are exchanged, the null point is disturbed.
Q 2Q
(3) 2 2 (4) 2
2 (b a ) (a b2 ) (1) /
7. A point particle of mass, moves along the uniformly rough (2) ;
track PQR as shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction, (3)
between the particle and the rough track equals . The particle
;
is released, from rest, from the point P and it comes to rest
at a point R. The energies, lost by the ball, over the parts, PQ
and QR, of the track, are equal to each other, and no energy
is lost when particle changes direction from PQ to QR.
EN 2.
(4)
;
] ,

In amplitude modulation, sinusoidal carrier frequency used is

The values of the coefficient of friction and the distance denoted by c and the signal frequency is denoted by m. The
x(=QR) are, respecitvely close to :- bandwidth ( m) of the signal is such that m
<< c. Which
m , , [ PQR ( = ) of the following frequencies is not contained in the modulated
wave?
? P
;
LL
R # PQ QR c

( )
[ ] PQ QR m m m

<< c
[ x(=QR) %:- (1) m + c (2) c – m (3) m (4) c
P 3. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25 cm is
placed at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens of
h=2m magnitude of focal length 20 cm. A beam of parallel light
falls on the diverging lens. The final image formed is :
A

30° R
(1) real and at a distance of 40 cm from the divergent lens
Horizontal Q
Surface (2) real and at a distance of 6 cm from the convergent lens
(3) real and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens
(1) 0.29 and 6.5 m (4) virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens.
(2) 0.2 and 6.5 m
25 cm , 20 cm
(3) 0.2 and 3.5 m
(4) 0.29 and 3.5 m 15 cm ,
8. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with amplitude :

2A (1) 40 cm
A. Its speed is trebled at the instant that it is at a distance (2) 6 cm
3
from equilibrium position. The new amplitude of the motion (3) 40 cm
is :- (4) 40 cm
A ; 4. The moment of inertia of a uniform cylinder of length and
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

2A radius R about its perpendicular bisector is I. What is the ratio

3 /R such that the moment of inertia is minimum ?

:- R ,
7A A I /
(1) (2) 41
3 3 R

(3) 3A (4) A 3 3 3 3
(1) 1 (2) (3) (4)
2 2 2
 Physics Gutka 129

5. A slender uniform rod of mass M and length is pivoted at 9. A particle A of mass m and initial velocity v collides with a
one end so that it can rotate in a vertical plane (see figure). m
There is negligible friction at the pivot. The free end is held particle B of mass which is at rest. The collision is head on,
2
vertically above the pivot and then released. The angular
and elastic. The ratio of the de–Broglie wavelengths to
acceleration of the rod when it makes an angle with the A B
after the collision is :
vertical is :
M , , + , m
m , v , -A
, ? ( = 2
/ ? .; + / -B ; ,
+ + ; /; ± A B
:
:- 2 1 1
A A A A
(1) (2) (3) (4) 2
z B 3 B 2 B 3 B
10 . An external pressure P is applied on a cube at 0°C so that it is
equally compressed from all sides. K is the bulk modulus of
the material of the cube and is its coefficient of linear
expansion. Suppose we want to bring the cube to its original
size by heating. The temperature should be raised by :
x 0°C ,, ? , P
3g 2g 3g 2g ? K
(1) cos (2) cos (3) sin (4) sin ; ; ?
2 3 2 3
6. Some energy levels of a molecule are shown in the figure. <+
The ratio of the wavelengths r = 1/ 2, is given by : 3 P P
= /; r (1) (2) 3PK (3) (4)
PK 3 K K
= 1
/ 2
:- EN 11 . An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards a
stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency 10
–E GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured by
4 2 the observer?
– E (speed of light = 3 × 108 ms–1 )
3
1
10 GHz ,
(microwave) }
–2E
:
–3E
( = 3 × 108 ms–1)
LL
(1) 17.3 GHz (2) 15.3 GHz
3 1
(1) r (2) r (3) 10.1 GHz (4) 12.1 GHz
4 3
4 2
(3) r (4) r JEE(MAIN)-2018
3 3
7. In a coil of resistance 100 , a current is induced by changing 1. The angular width of the central maximum in a single slit
the magnetic flux through it as shown in the figure. The diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slit is 1 m. The
A

magnitude of change in flux through the coil is :- slit is illuminated by monochromatic plane waves. If another
; 100 / slit of same width is made near it, Young’s fringes can be
= observed on a screen placed at a distance 50 cm from the
:- slits . If the observe d fringe width is 1 cm, what is slit
separation distance? (i.e. distance between the centres of each
slit.)
10 , ; ; 60°
Current 1 m , ;
(amp.)
; , ;
50 cm Young
Time 0.5 sec 1 cm
(1) 50 m (2) 75 m (3) 100 m (4) 25 m
(1) 250 Wb (2) 275 Wb 2. Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of respective radii
(3) 200 Wb (4) 225 Wb a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities + ,
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

8. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6.7 × 10 –2 Am2 and – and + respectively. The potential of shell B is :-
moment of inertia 7.5 × 10 –6 kg m 2 is performing simple / A, B C % a, b
harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field of 0.01 T. Time c (a < b < c) ] & ? %+ ,– +
taken for 10 complete oscillations is :
B :-
; 6.7 × 10–2 Am2 7.5 × 10–6 kg
m2 ; ]± , 0.01 T ;{= a2 b2 b2 c2
(1) c (2) a
10 ; : 0 b 0 b
(1) 6.98 s (2) 8.76 s
(3) 6.65 s (4) 8.89 s b2 c2 a2 b2
(3) a (4) c
0 c 0 a
130 Physics Gutka
3. A par tic le is mov ing in a circular path of radius 7. In a potentiometer experiment, it is found that no current
a und er the ac tio n of an attrac tiv e p ote ntial passes through the galvanometer when the terminals of the
cell are connected across 52 cm of the potentiometer wire.
k
U = – 2 . Its total energy is :- If the cell is shunted by a resistance of 5 , a balance is found
2r
when the cell is connected across 40 cm of the wire. Find
the internal resistance of the cell.
k
, U=– 2 a
2r
52 cm
:-
; 5 }
k 40 cm
(1 ) (2) Zero
2a 2 :
(1) 1.5 (2) 2
3 k k (3) 2.5 (4) 1
(3) (4)
2 a2 4a 2 8. A telephonic communication service is working at carrier
frequ ency o f 10 GHz. Only 10 % o f it is u tilize d for
4. A par allel plate capa citor of cap acitan ce
transmissio n. How many teleph onic chan nels can be
90 pF is connected to a battery of emf 20V. If a dielectric
transmitted simultaneou sly if eac h chan nel requires a
5 bandwidth of 5 kHz ?
material of dielectric constant K = is inserted between
3 ] 10 GHz

the plates, the magnitude of the induced charge will be :- 10% ;

90 pF , = 20V 5 kHz ,

; K=
5
3
,
EN (1) 2 × 10 4
?

(3 ) 2 × 10 6
(2) 2 × 10 5
(4) 2 × 10 3
:- 9. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through an ideal
polarizer A. Another identical polarizer B is placed behind
(1 ) 0.3 n C (2) 2.4 n C
(3) 0.9 n C (4) 1.2 n C I
A. The intensity of light beyond B is found to be . Now
5. A silver atom in a s olid osc illate s in s imp le
2
LL

ha rmo nic mo tio n in some direc tio n with a another identical polarizer C is placed between A and B. The
fr equ enc y of 1 0 12 /sec. What is th e force
I
co nstant of th e b onds co nne cting one atom intensity beyond B is now found to be . The angle between
8
with the other ? (Mo le wt. o f silv er =10 8 a nd
Avagadro number = 6.02 × 10 23 gm mole –1 ) polarizer A and C is :

, 10 /sec
12 I , A
A

, , B A ] B

( =108 I
,
(Avagadro) [; = 6.02 × 10 23 gm mole –1 ) 2
(1) 7.1 N/m C A B B
(2) 2.2 N/m
I
(3) 5.5 N/m A C :
8
(4) 6.4 N/m (1) 30º (2) 45º
6. It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear collision (3) 60º (4) 0º
with deuterium at rest, fractional loss of its energy is p d ; while 10 . On interchanging the resistances, the balance point of a meter
for its similar collision with carbon nucleus at rest, fractional
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

bridge shifts to the left by 10 cm. The resistance of their series

loss of energy is pc. The values of pd and pc are respectively: combination is 1 k . How much was the resistance on the
left slot before interchanging the resistances ?
, , , ;
{; pd
] 10 cm
1k
{ ; pc
pd pc % :
[ ?
(1) 505 k (2) 550 k
(1) ( .28, . 89) (2) (0, 0)
(3) 910 k (4) 990 k
(3) (0, 1) (4) ( .89, . 28)
 Physics Gutka 131

11 . From a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a 14 . All the graphs below are intended to represent the same motion.
One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
R , ,
small disc of radius is removed as shown in the figure.
3 %
distance
The moment of inertia of the remaining disc about an axis
perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through
centre of disc is :
(1 ) time
R
R 9M ,
3
] = position

,
:
(2) time

2R
3 velocity

(3 ) time
40 37
(1) MR 2 (2) 10 MR 2 (3) MR 2 (4) 4 MR 2
9 9 EN velocity
12 . In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v 0 strikes
a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final total kinetic
energy is 50 % greater than the original kinetic energy, the
(4) position
magnitude of the relative velocity between the two particles,
after collision, is :
, ; (collinear collision) ] v0 ,
15 . Two batteries with e.m.f 12 V and 13 V are connected in
, : , ;
LL
] 50 % parallel across a load resistor of 10 . The internal resistances
:
of the two batteries are 1 and 2 respectively. The voltage
v0 v0 v0 across the load lies between.
(1 ) 2 v0 (2) (3) (4)
2 2 4
13 . An EM wave from air enters a medium. The electric fields are
12 V 13 V , 10

%
A

z
E1 E 01xˆ cos 2 t in air
c 1 2

and E 2 E 02 xˆ cos k 2z ct in medium, where the wave

number k and frequency v refer to their values in air. The (1 ) 11.5 V and 11.6 V

medium is non-magnetic. If r1 and r2 refer to relative (2) 11.4 V and 11.5 V

permittivity of air and medium respectively, which of the (3) 11.7 V and 11.8 V
following options is correct ?
; /; {= (4) 11.6 V and 11.7 V

z 16 . A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit

E1 E 01xˆ cos 2 t
c
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

of radius R in a central force inversely proportional to the n th

E2 E 02 xˆ cos k 2z ct /; ] power of R. If the period of rotation of the particle is T, then,

[; k v R , , ; ]
R n ? ] ? ;
/; ; ; r1 r2 % ,
T %
/; ; ?
n
1
1 1 (1 ) T R2 (2) T R (n 1) / 2
r1 r1 r1 r1
(1 ) 2 (2) (3) (4) 4 (3 ) T R n/2 (4) T R 3/2 for any n
r2 r2 4 r2 2 r2
132 Physics Gutka
17 . If the series limit frequency of the Lyman series is v L, then 21 . A granite rod of 60 cm length is clamped at its middle point
the series limit frequency of the Pfund series is : and is set into longitudinal vibrations. The density of granite is
vL 2.7 × 103 kg/m3 and its Young's modulus is 9.27 × 1010 Pa. What
will be the fundamental frequency of the longitudinal
:
vibrations?
(1 ) 16 v L (2) v L/16
(3 ) v L/25 (4) 25 v L 60 cm , + /;
18 . In an a. c. circuit, the instantaneous e.m.f. and current are given
/; ? 2.7 × 103 kg/m3
by
9.27 × 1010 Pa /;
a. c. /
?

e = 100 sin 30 t (1) 2.5 kHz (2) 10 kHz

(3) 7.5 kHz (4) 5 kHz

i = 20 sin 30t
4 22 . The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32 × 10–27 kg.
If 10 23 hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall
In one cycle of a.c., the average power consumed by the circuit
of area 2 cm 2 at an angle of 45° to the normal, and rebound
and the wattless current are, respectively.
elastically with a speed of 10 3 m/s, then the pressure on the
a.c., , } ;; /
wall is nearly :
] %
3.32 × 10–27 kg 2 cm2
1000 50
(1 ) , 10 (2) , 0 1023 ;
2 2
45° 103 m/s ]
(3) 50, 0 (4) 50, 10
19 . Two moles of an ideal monoatomic gas occupies a volume
V at 27°C. The gas expands adiabatically to a volume 2V.
Calculate (a) the final temperature of the gas and (b) change
EN (1) 4.70 × 10 3 N/m 2
:

(2) 2.35 × 10 2 N/m 2

in its internal energy.
, 2 27°C V ? (3) 4.70 × 10 2 N/m 2

: } 2V (a) (4) 2.35 × 10 3 N/m 2

LL
, (b) 23 . Seven identical circular planar disks, each of mass M and radius
(1) (a) 195 K (b) –2.7 kJ R are welded symmetrically as shown. The moment of inertia
(2) (a) 189 K (b) –2.7 kJ of the arrangement about the axis normal to the plane and
(3) (a) 195 K (b) 2.7 kJ passing through the point P is :
(4) (a) 189 K (b) 2.7 kJ
20 . A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk ,
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical container. M R :
A

A massless piston of area a floats on the surface of the liquid, P :

covering entire cross section of cylindrical container. When
a mass m is placed on the surface of the piston to compress
the liquid, the fractional decrement in the radius of the sphere,

dr P
, is : O
r

} ,r , ]
K ], }
a , ]
< ,]
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

, m ] 55 73
(1) MR 2 (2) MR 2
2 2
dr
:
r 181 19
(3 ) MR 2 (4) MR 2
2 2
Ka mg mg Ka
(1 ) (2) (3) (4)
3mg 3Ka Ka mg
 Physics Gutka 133
6. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling of a car
by a light string of mass m (m<<M). When the car is at rest,
JEE(MAIN)-2019 the speed of transverse waves in the string is 60 ms–1. When
the car has acceleration a, the wave-speed increases to 60.5
1. When the switch S, in the circuit shown, is closed, then the
ms–1. The value of a, in terms of gravitational acceleration g,
value of current i will be : is closest to :
S i : M , m (m << M)
20V i1 C i2 10V
A i B 60 ms–1 a
2 60.5 ms–1 <+ ; g a

S %&
g g g g
V=0 (1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) 3 A (2) 5 A (3) 4 A (4) 2 A 5 20 10 30
2. A resistance is shown in the figure. Its value and tolerance are
7. A particle is moving with a velocity v K yiˆ xjˆ , where K
given respectively by:
= , % : is a constant. The general equation for its path is:
RED ORANGE v K yiˆ xjˆ ] K

VIOLET SILVER (1) xy = constant (2) y2 = x2 + constant

(1) 27 k (2) 270 k
(3) y = x2 + constant (4) y2 = x + constant
(3) 270 k (4) 27 k
8. A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source and it makes
3. A bar magnet is demagnetized by inserting it inside a solenoid a sharp image on a screen, kept 10 cm from the lens. Now
of length 0.2 m, 100 turns, and carrying a current of 5.2 A. a glass block (refractive index 1.5) of 1.5 cm thickness is placed
The coercivity of the bar magnet is : EN in contact with the light source. To get the sharp image again,
+ 0.2 m, 100 5.2 A / , the screen is shifted by a distance d. Then d is :
+ 10 cm ;
10 cm 1.5 cm
:
(1) 1200 A/m (2) 2600 A/m ( 1.5)
(3) 520 A/jm (4) 285 A/m % , d
4. A block of mass m, lying on a smooth horizontal surface, is ] d %&
attached to a spring (of negligible mass) of spring constant k. (1) 0.55 cm away from the lens
LL
The other end of the spring is fixed, as shown in the figure. (2) 1.1 cm away from the lens
The block is initally at rest in its equilibrium position. If now (3) 0.55 cm towards the lens
(4) 0
the block is pulled with a constant force F, the maximum speed
9. Three blocks A, B and C are lying on a smooth horizontal
of the block is :
surface, as shown in the figure. A and B have equal masses,
{ m , m while C has mass M. Block A is given an brutal speed v
k , .; towards B due to which it collides with B perfectly inelastically.
A

The combined mass collides with C, also perfectly inelastically

5
F [ th of the initial kinetic energy is lost in whole process. What
6
: is value of M/m ?
A, B C { A
B m ] C M A B
, v ; B
m F
C
F 2F F F 5
(1) (2) (3) (4)
[ ]
mk mk mk mk 6
M/m ?
5. Mobility of electrons in a semiconductor is defined as the ratio
A B C
of their drift velocity to the applied electric field. If, for an n- m m m
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

type semiconductor, the density of electrons is 1019m–3 and

(1) 4 (2) 5 (3) 3 (4) 2
their mobility is 1.6 m 2 /(V.s) then the resistivity of the
10. Drift speed of electrons, when 1.5 A of current flows in a copper
semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor contribution
wire of cross section 5 mm2, is v. If the electron density in copper
of holes is ignored) is close to:
is 9 ×1028 /m3 the value of v in mm/s is close to (Take charge
of electron to be =1.6 × 10–19C)
{= : ; n- { 5 mm 2 1.5A /
, ? 1019m–3 1.6 m2/(V.s) v ;
( ; n- ] % 9 ×10 28 /m 3 v mm/s %
; .; ) %& = 1.6 × 10 –19C )
(1) 2 m (2) 0.4 m (3) 4 m (4) 0.2 m (1) 0.2 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 0.02
134 Physics Gutka
11. In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are placed 0.320 16. In a car race on straight road, car A takes a time t less than car B
mm apart. Light of wavelength = 500 nm is incident on the at the finish and passes finishing point with a speed 'v' more
slits. The total number of bright fringes that are observed in than that of car B. Both the cars start from rest and travel with
the angular range –30° 30°is: constant acceleration a1 and a2 respectively. Then 'v' is equal to:
0.320 mm /; , ] A B
= 500 nm ; –30° t ; B
30° [; : v a1 a2
(1) 320 (2) 641 (3) 321 (4) 640
'v' :
12. At a given instant, say t = 0, two radioactive substances A and
a1 a 2 2a1a 2
RB (1) t (2) 2a1a 2 t (3) t (4) a 1a 2 t
B have equal activities. The ratio 2 a1 a 2
R A of their activities after 17. A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300 V to
time t itself decays with time t as e–3t. [f the half-life of A is a step down transformer with its primary windings having
m2, the half-life of B is : 4000 turns. The output power is delivered at 230 V by the
, { ]t=0 ±A B, transformer. If the current in the primary of the transformer
is 5A and its efficiency is 90%, the output current would be:
RB
;t ] ;t e–3t 2300 V , , ]
RA
4000 ] 230 V
? ; A n2 ] B :
; 5A
ln2 ln2 / 90% ] / :
(1) (2) 2 ln2 (3) (4) 4 ln2
2 4 (1) 25 A (2) 50 A (3) 35 A (4) 45 A
13. A rod of length 50cm is pivoted at one end. It is raised such 18. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is
that if makes an angle of 30° from the horizontal as shown EN maintained. It is giving out 0.74 m3 water per minute through
and released from rest. Its angular speed when it passes a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of the centre
through the horizontal (in rad s–1) will be (g = 10ms–2 ) of the opening from the level of water in the tank is close to:
50cm , + , { 30° , [
] ] + ; +{ , 2 cm 0.74 m3/min
; rad s–1 :
:g = 10ms–2) :
(1) 9.6 m (2) 4.8 m (3) 2.9 m (4) 6.0 m
LL
19. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in circular orbit
around the earth. An object of mass 'm' is ejected from the
30°
satellite such that it just escapes from the gravitational pull of
the earth. At the time of ejection, the kinetic energy of the
30 30 20 object is :
(1) 30 (2) (3) (4)
2 2 3 % , v ?
14. The magnetic field associated with a light wave is given, at ,
A

'm'
the origin, by
;
B = B0 [sin(3.14 × 107)ct + sin(6.28 × 107)ct]. If this light falls
on a silver plate having a work function of 4.7 eV, what will :
be the maximum kinetic energy of the photo electrons ?
3 2 1
(c = 3 × l08ms–1, h = 6.6 × 10–34 J-s) (1) mv (2) mv2 (3) 2mv2 (4) mv 2
2 2
, ; ;{= :
20. In a Young's double slit experiment with slit separation 0.1
B = B0 [sin(3.14 × 107)ct + sin(6.28 × 107)ct]. ; ,
] 4.7 eV ] 1
mm, one observes a bright fringe at angle rad by using
40
( : c = 3 × l08ms–1, h = 6.6 × 10–34 J-s) light of wavelength 1. When the light of wavelength 2 is used
(1) 7.72 eV (2) 8.52 eV a bright fringe is seen at the same angle in the same set up.
(3) 12.5 eV (4) 6.82 eV Given that 1 and 2 are in visible range (380 nm to 740 nm),
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

15. The position co-ordinates of a particle moving in a 3-D their values are :
coordinate system is given by ; }& 0.1 mm ]
; ; , 1
: 1 } rad
40
x = a cos t 2 /;
y = a sin t ; ( 380 nm
1 2
and z = a t
The speed of the particle is :
740 nm ) :
(1) 380 nm, 500 nm (2) 625 nm, 500 nm
:
(3) 380 nm, 525 nm (4) 400 nm, 500 nm
(1) a (2) 3a (3) 2a (4) 2a
 Physics Gutka 135
21. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of 27. A homogeneous solid cylindrical roller of radius R and mass
10–4 m3s–1. Water is also leaking out of a hole of area 1 cm2 M is pulled on a cricket pitch by a horizontal force. Assuming
rolling without slipping, angular acceleration of the cylinder
at its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains
is :
steady, then this height is:
M R , ,
10–4 m3s–1 { F] [ ;
1 cm2 { , ; <+ ] ; :
: 3F F 2F F
(1) 4 cm (2) 2.9 cm (3) 1.7 cm (4) 5.1 cm (1) (2) (3) (4)
2m R 3m R 3m R 2m R
22. The density of a material in SI units is 128 kg m–3. In certain 28. A plano convex lens of refractive index µ 1 and focal length
units in which the unit of length is 25 cm and the unit of mass f1 is kept in contact with another plano concave lens of refractive
is 50 g, the numerical value of density of the material is : index µ 2 and focal length f2. If the radius of curvature of their
SI , ? 128 kg m–3 , , ] spherical faces is R each and f1 = 2f2, then µ 1 and µ 2 are related
as :
25 cm 50 g ] ?
:
µ1 f1 , µ2

(1) 410 (2) 640 (3) 16 (4) 40

f2 ;
23. A block of mass m is kept on a platform which starts from rest ; R f1 = 2f2 ] µ1
with constant acceleration g/2 upward, as shown in fig. Work µ2 :
done bv normal reaction on block in time t is : (1) µ 1 + µ 2 = 3 (2) 2µ 1 – µ 2 = 1
m , , (3) 2µ 2 – µ 1 = 1 (4) 3µ 2 – 2µ 1 = 1
29. Three Carnot engines operate in series between a heat source
g/2
at a temperature T 1 and a heat sink at temperature T4 (see
(normal reaction) } ;t
:

m g
EN figure). There are two other reservoirs at temperature T2, and
T3, as shown, with T2 > T2 > T3 > T4 . The three engines are
equally efficient if:
a=2 T1 , T4
, ( = T2
3mg2 t 2 mg 2 t 2 mg 2 t 2
(1) 0 (2) (3) (4) T3 ; T1 > T2 > T3 > T4
8 8 8
{ ]; :
LL
24. Two guns A a nd B can f ire bullets at spe eds T1
1 km/s and 2 km/s respectively. From a point on a horizontal 1/3 1/3
(1) T2 T12 T4 ; T3 T1 T42
ground, they are fired in all possible directions. The ratio of 1

maximum areas covered by the bullets fired by the two guns, 1/ 3 1/ 3

T2
on the ground is : (2) T2 T1T42 ; T3 T12 T4
2

A B % 1 km/s 2 km/s 1/ 4 1/ 4 T3
{ (3) T2 T13 T4 ;T3 T1 T43
A

} (4) T2 (T1 T4 )1 / 2 ; T3 (T12 T4 )1 / 3 T4

{ : 30. The actual value of resistance R, shown in the figure is 30 .
(1) 1 : 2 (2) 1 : 4 (3) 1 : 8 (4) 1 : 16 This is measured in an experiment as shown using the standard
25. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both ends. The
tension in the string is 8.0 N. The siring is set into vibration V
formula R = , where V and I are the readings of the
using an externa l vibr ator of freque ncy 100 Hz. The I
separation between successive nodes on the string is close to: voltmeter and ammeter, respectively. If the measured value
1m 5g , <+ of R is 5% less, then the internal resistance of the voltmeter
8.0 N 100 Hz , = is :
= R 30 ;
: V
=R= ] V I %
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(1) 16.6 cm (2) 20.0 cm (3) 10.0 cm (4) 33.3 cm I

26. In an electron microscope, the resolution that can be achieved
; R 5%
is of the order of the wavelength of electrons used. To resolve a width
of 7.5 × 10–12m, the minimum electron energy required is close to : %&
/
V
7.5 × 10–12m
A
: R
(1) 100 keV (2) 500 keV
(3) 25 keV (4) 1 keV
(1) 350 (2) 570 (3) 35 (4) 600
136 Physics Gutka
31. A hoop and a solid cylinder of same mass and radius are made 35. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of 1.5 kHz.
of a permanent magnetic material with their magnetic moment The number of overtones that can be distinctly heard by a
parallel to their respective axes. But the magnetic moment of person with this organ pipe will be : (Assume that the highest
hoop is twice of solid cylinder. They are placed in a uniform frequency a person can hear is 20,000 Hz)
magnetic field in such a manner that their magnetic moments 1.5 kHz
make a small angle with the field. If the oscillation periods of } : [; (
hoop and cylinder are Th and Tc respectively, then : } 20,000 Hz )
; , ; ( ) (1) 7 (2) 5 (3) 6 (4) 4
; 36. Two kg of a monoatomic gas is at a pressure of 4×104 N/m2.
The density of the gas is 8 kg /m 3. What is the order of energy
; ;
of the gas due to its thermal motion ?
; ;{= ;
, 4 × 104 N/m2 ?
{= ; %
8 kg/m3 ; %&
Th Tc %&
(1) 10 3 J (2) 10 5 J (3) 106 J (4) 10 4 J
(1) Th = 0.5 Tc (2) Th = 2 Tc
(3) Th = 1.5 Tc (4) Th = Tc 37. The Wheatstone bridge shown in Fig. here, gets balanced
32. Consider the nuclear fission when the carbon resistor used as R1 has the colour code (
Orange, Red, Brown). The resistors R2 and R4 are 80 and
;
40 respectively.
Ne20 2He4 + C12 Assuming that the colour code for the carbon resistors gives
Given that the binding energy/nucleon of Ne 20, He4 and C12 their accurate values, the colour code for the carbon resistor,
are, respectively, 8.03 MeV, 7.07 MeV and 7.86 MeV, identify used as R3, would be :
the correct statement : R1 :
Ne20, He4 C12 % 8.03 MeV, ( ] ] ) R2 R4 %
7.07 MeV 7.86 MeV %& EN 80 40
(1) 8.3 MeV energy will be released , ; R3 :
(2) energy of 12.4 MeV will be supplied
(3) energy of 11.9 MeV has to be supplied , %&
(4) energy of 3.6 MeV will be released
33. Consider a Young's double slit experiment as shown in figure. R1 R2
What should be the slit separation d in terms of wavelength
G
such that the first minima occurs directly in front of the slit
(S1 ) ? R3 R4
LL
; }& /; d /
(S1) + –

(1) Red, Green, Brown (2) Brown, Blue, Brown

(3) Grey, Black, Brown (4) Brown, Blue, Black
S1 P 38. A hydrogen atom, initially in the ground state is excited by
1st minima
absorbing a photon of wavelength 980Å. The radius of the
A

Source d atom in the excited state, it terms of Bohr radius a0, will be:

S2 980Å
Screen a0
2d
%&
(hc = 12500 eV – Å)
(1) 2 5 2 (2) 5 2 (1) 9a 0 (2) 25a 0 (3) 4a 0 (4) 16a 0
39. A liquid of density is coming out of a hose pipe of radius
a with horizontal speed v and hits a mesh. 50% of the liquid
(3) 5 2 (4) 2 5 2 passes through the mesh unaffected. 25% looses all of its
34. The eye can be regarded as a single refracting surface . The momentum and 25% comes back with the same speed. The
resultant pressure on the mesh will be :
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

radius of curvature of this surface is equal to that of cornea

(7.8 mm). This surface separates two media of refractive
a { v
indices 1 and 1.34. Calculate the distance from the refracting
surface at which a parallel beam of light will come to focus. , 50% ] 25%
, ] ; 25%

(7.8 mm) ; 1 1.34 %&

/; ,
3 2 1 2 1 2
%& (1) pv2 (2) pv (3) pv (4) pv
4 2 4
(1) 2 cm (2) 1 cm (3) 3.1 cm (4) 4.0 cm
 Physics Gutka 137
40. An electromagnetic wave of intensity 50 Wm–2 enters in a 45. In the given circuit the current through Zener Diode is close
medium of refractive index 'n' without any loss. The ratio of to :
the magnitudes of electrric fields, and the ratio of the
magnitudes of magnetic fields of the wave before and after / %&
entering into the medium are respectively, given by :
50 Wm–2 , ; 'n' , /
{; /; R1 500
{ ;{ % %&

12V
1 R2 1500 V2=10V R2
1 1 n,
(1) , (2)
n n n

1 (1) 6.0 mA (2) 4.0 mA

(3) n, n (4) , n
n (3) 6.7 mA (4) 0.0 mA
41. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of linear density 46. The variation of refractive index of a crown glass thin prism
5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin(450 t – 9x) where distance and time
with wavelength of the incident light is shown. Which of the
are measured is SI units. The tension in the string is :
following graphs is the correct one, if D m is the angle of
5 g/m ;?
minimum deviation?
y = 0.03 sin(450 t – 9x) ; SI
%&
(1) 10 N (2) 12.5 N (3) 7.5 N (4) 5 N /; ; Dm
42. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height h from the
earth surface, such that h << R where R is the radius of the
earth. Assuming that the effect of earth's atmosphere can be
1.535
neglected the minimum increase in the speed requried so that EN
the satellite could escape from the gravitational field of earth 1.530
is : 1.525
h , , ; ? 1.520
h << R R 1.515
.; ; , 1.510 (nm)
400 500 600 700
;{= %&
Dm
(1) gR 2 1 (2) 2gR
LL

gR
(3) gR (4)
2 (1)
43. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has time

t (nm)
dependent displacement given by x t A sin . The ratio 400 500 600 700
90
A

of kinetic to potential energy of this particle at t = 210 s will Dm

be :
,, ;
t (2)
x t Asin t = 210 s ,
90
%& (nm)
400 500 600 700
1 1
(1) 2 (2) (3) (4) 1
9 3 Dm
44. Ice at –20° C os added tp 50 g of water at 40°C. When the
temperature of the mixture reaches 0°C, it is found that 20 g
of ice is still unmelted. The amount of ice added to the water (3)
was close to
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(Specific heat of water = 4.2 J/g/°C)

Specific heat of Ice = 2.1 J/g/°C (nm)
Heat of fusion of water at 0°C = 334 J/g) 400 500 600 700
40°C 50g –20° C Dm
0°C 20 g
%
( = 4.2 J/g/°C) (4)
= 2.1 J/g/°C
0°C = 334 J/g)
(nm)
(1) 50 g (2) 40 g (3) 60 g (4) 100 g 400 500 600 700
138 Physics Gutka
47. An object is at a distacen of 20 m from a convex lens of focal 52. A particle of mass m and charge q is in an electric and magnetic
length 0.3 m. The lens forms an image of the object. If the field given by
object moves away from the lens at a speed of 5 m/s, the speed
m q ,
and direction of the image will be :
0.3 m , 20 m E 2iˆ 3ˆj ; B 4 ˆj 6kˆ .
} ; ; 5 m/s The charged particle is shifted from the origin to the point
P(x = 1 ; y = 1) along a straight path. The magnitude of the
%&
total work done is :-
(1) 0.92 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(2) 2.26 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens , ;{=
(3) 1.16 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens P(x = 1 ; y = 1) ,
(4) 3.22 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens
48. A paramagnetic substance in the form of a cube with sides
%&
1 cm has a magnetic dipole moment of 20 × 10 –6
J/T when (1) (0.35)q (2) (0.15)q (3) (2.5)q (4) 5q
53. In the figure shown, after the switch 'S' is turned from position
a magnetic intensity of 60 × 103 A/m is applied. Its magnetic
'A' to position 'B', the energy dissipated in the circuit in terms
susceptibility is :-
of capacitance 'C' and total charge 'Q' is:
1 cm ? ; ] ; 60 × 103
= 'S' 'A' 'B'
–6
A/m ; }/ 20 ×10 J/T / 'C' 'Q' : ] {
; % %&
(1) 2.3 × 10 –2 (2) 3.3 × 10 –2 A B
(3) 3.3 × 10 –4 (4) 4.3 × 10 –2
S
49. In the circuit , the potential difference between A and B is:-
C 3C
A B %&

5
M
1

1
1V

2V 10
EN 54.
(1)
3 Q2
8 C
(2)
3 Q2
4 C
A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central
(3)
1 Q2
8 C
(4)
5 Q2
8 C

A D C B 1 2
potential field U(r) = kr . If Bohr's quantization conditions
1 3V 2
N
are applied, radii of possible orbitals and energy levels vary
(1) 6 V (2) 1 V (3) 3 V (4) 2 V with quantum number n as:
LL
50. A galvanometer having a resistance of 20 and 30 divisions
1 2
on both sides has figure of merit 0.005 ampere/division. The m , U(r) = kr . ; {=
2
resistance that should be connected in series such that it can
be used as a voltmeter upto 15 volt, is :- ; ? ;
/ 20
[; n
%&
30 ] / 0.005 /
A

] 15 V , : 1 1
(1) rn n2 , En (2) rn n , En
n2 n

(1) 80 (2) 120 (3) 125 (4) 100 (3) rn n, En n (4) rn n , En n

55. The galvanometer deflection, when key K1 is closed but K2
51. In a process, temperature and volume of one mole of an ideal
is open, equals 0 (see figure). On closing K2 also and adjusting
monoatomic gas are varied according to the relation VT =
K, where K is a constant. In this process the temperature of R2 to 5 , the deflection in galvanometer becomes
0
. The
the gas is incresed by T. The amount of heat absorbed by 5
resistance of the galvanometer is, then, given by [Neglect the
gas is (R is gas constant) :
internal resistance of battery]:
], , , ] K1 K2 0 ( =
VT = K ] K 0
.
K2 R2 5
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

T <+ } 5
( .; ):
(R ) :-
K2 R2
R1=220
1 3
(1) R T (2) R T
2 2 G

1 2K
(3) KR T (4) T
2 3 K1
(1) 12 (2) 25 (3) 5 (4) 22
 Physics Gutka 139
56. Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is shown below: 60. The mean intensity of radiation on the surface of the Sun is
about 108 W/m2. The rms value of the corresponding magnetic
= }&
field is closest to :
/; 10 8 W/m 2
;{= :
(1) 10 2 T (2) 10 –4 T (3) 1T (4) 10 –2 T
61. Water from a pipe is coming at a rate of 100 litres per minute.
If the radius of the pipe is 5 cm, the Reynolds number for the
flow is of the order of : (density of water = 1000 kg/m 3 ,
coefficient of viscosity of water = 1mPas)
If the whole set up is immersed in water without disturbing
the object and the screen position, what will one observe on 100 ;
the screen ? 5 cm ] [; %( ?
= 1000 kg/m3, = 1mPa s)
(1) 10 6 (2) 10 3 (3) 10 4 (4) 10 2
(1) Image disappears ; ) 62. A 200 resistor has a certain color code. If one replaces the
red color by green in the code, the new resistance will be :
(2) No change )
(3) Erect real image ) 200 , , (color code) ;
&
(4) Magnified image )
(1) 100 (2) 400 (3) 500 (4) 300
57. A simple harmonic motion is represented by:
63. Voltage rating of a parallel plate capacitor is 500V. Its dielectric
:
can withstand a maximum electric field of 106 V/m. The plate
y = 5(sin3 t+ 3 cos3 t) cm area is 10 –4 m 2 . What is the dielectric constant is the
The amplitude and time period of the motion are:
EN capacitance is 15 pF?
(given 0 = 8.86 × 10–12 C 2/Nm2 )
:
= (rating) 500V
3 2
(1) 5cm, s (2) 5cm, s 106 V/m {= {
2 3
3 2 10–4 m2 ; = / 15 pF
(3) 10cm, s (4) 10cm, s &
2 3
( 0 = 8.86 × 10–12 C2/Nm2)
(1) 3.8 (2) 4.5 (3) 6.2 (4) 8.5
LL

64. An alternating voltage v(t) = 220 sin 100 t volt is applied to

58.
a purely resistance load of 50 . The time taken for the current

to rise from half of the peak value to the peak value is :

In the figure, given that VBB supply can vary from 0 to 5.0
V, VCC = 5V, dc = 200, RB = 100 k , RC=l k and VBE=1.0 v(t) = 220 sin 100 t , 50
A

V, The minimum base current and the input voltage at which

/
the transistor will go to saturation, will be, respectively :
VBB 0 5.0 V <+ ; &
VCC = 5V, dc = 200, RB = 100 k , RC = l k (1) 2.2 ms (2) 5 ms (3) 3.3 ms (4) 7.2 ms
VBE = 1.0 V 65. A common emitter amplifier circuit, built using an npn
] % : transistor, is shown in the figure. Its dc current gain is 250,
RC = 1k and VCC = 10 V. What is the minimum base current
(1) 20 A and 3.5V (2) 25 A and 3.5V
for VCE to reach saturation ?
(3) 25 A and 2.5V (4) 20 A and 2.8V
= , npn }
59. A galvanometer, whose resistance is 50 ohm, has 25 divisions
in it. When a current of 4 ×10 –4 A passes through it, its needle dc 250 RC = 1k VCC =
(pointer) deflects by one division. To use this galvanometer as 10 V VCE (saturation) /
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

a voltmeter of range 2.5 V, it should be connected to a resistance ?

of:
50 , 25
RB RC
4 × 10 –4 A / ( ),
2.5 V :
: VB V CC
(1) 6250 ohm (2) 250 ohm
(3) 200 ohm (4) 6200 ohm
(1) 100 µA (2) 7 µA (3) 40 µA (4) 10 µA
140 Physics Gutka
66. In the circuit shown, a four-wire potentiometer is made of a
70. The electric field in a region is given by E Ax B ˆi , where
400 cm long wire, which extends between A and B. The
resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire is r = 0.01 E is in NC–1 and x is in metres. The values of constants are
/cm. If an ideal voltmeter is connected as shown with jockey A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI unit. If the potential at x = 1
J at 50 cm from end A, the expected reading of the voltmeter is V1 and that at x = –5 is V2, then V1 – V2 is :-
will be :-
{= E Ax B ˆi ] E NC–1 x
, 400 cm A
B ( = , ]A = 20 SI unit B = 10 SI unit ;
x=1 V1 x = –5 V2 V1 – V2 :-
r = 0.01 /cm ; ,
(1) –48 V (2) –520 V (3) 180 V (4) 320 V
J A 50 cm ] 71. A convex lens (of focal length 20 cm) and a concave mirror,
: having their principal axes along the same lines, are kept
80 cm apart from each other. The concave mirror is to the
1 .5 V , 1 .5 V , V right of the convex lens. When an object is kept at a distance
0 .5 , 0 .5 A of 30 cm to the left of the convex lens, its image remains at
J
50 cm the same position even if the concave mirror is removed. The
maximum distance of the object for which this concave mirror,
by itself would produce a virtual image would be :-
1 ( 20 cm) , ] [;
B ] , 80 cm _
1 0 0 cm
,
(1) 0.20 V (2) 0.25 V
30 cm ]
(3) 0.75 V (4) 0.50V
]
67. Calculate the limit of resolution of a telescope objective having EN
a diameter of 200 cm, if it has to detect light of wavelength
] , [ ] :-
500 nm coming from a star :- (1) 20 cm (2) 10 cm (3) 25 cm (4) 30 cm
72. A nucleus A, with a finite de-broglie wavelength A, undergoes
500 nm /; (detect)
spontaneous fission into two nuclei B and C of equal mass.
200 cm
B flies in the same direction as that of A, while C flies in the
:- opposite direction with a velocity equal to half of that of B.
(1) 305 × 10 –9 radian The de-Broglie wavelengths B and C of B and C are
(2) 152.5 × 10 –9 radian respectively :-
(3) 610 × 10 –9 radian
LL
/; A , A %
(4) 457.5 × 10 –9 radian
B C B A C
68. A rocket has to be launched from earth in such a way that
it never returns. If E is the minimum energy delivered by the B B C /
rocket launcher, what should be the minimum energy that the ] B C % :-
launcher should have if the same rocket is to be launched from (1) 2 A, A (2) A, 2 A
the surface of the moon ? Assume that the density of the earth
A

and the moon are equal and that the earth's volume is 64 times (3)
A A
A, (4) , A
the volume of the moon :- 2 2

73. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The bob

(launcher) E of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-viscous liquid.
, } 1
? The density of the liquid is th of the material of the bob.
16
64 :- If the bob is inside liquid all the time, its period of oscillation
in this liquid is :
E E E E
(1) (2) (3) (4)
4 16 32 64 T ,
69. A damped harmonic oscillator has a frequency of 5 oscillations
per second. The amplitude drops to half its value for every 10 1
] ? ? ] ;
16
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

1
oscillations. The time it will take to drop to of the original ;; % :
1000
amplitude is close to :-
5 1 1
(1) 4T (2) 2T
15 10
1
10
1000
1 1
; :- (3) 4T (4) 2T
14 14
(1) 100 s (2) 20 s (3) 10 s (4) 50 s
 Physics Gutka 141
74. The pressure wave, P = 0.01 sin [1000t – 3x] Nm–2, corresponds to 78. The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given
the sound produced by a vibrating blade on a day when atmospheric by :
temperature is 0°C. On some other day, when temperature is T, the
speed of sound produced by the same blade and at the same frequency B B0 iˆ cos(kz – t) B1ˆjcos(kz t) where B0=3 ×10–5 T
is found to be 336 ms–1 . Approximate value of T is : and B1 = 2 × 10–6 T. The rms value of the force experienced by
a stationary charge Q = 10–4 C at z = 0 is closest to :
, / : ,
; ; {= :
P = 0.01 sin [1000t – 3x] Nm–2 0°C
B B0 iˆ cos(kz – t) B1ˆjcos(kz t)
T } /
336 ms–1 T : B0= 3 × 10–5 T B1 = 2 × 10–6 T ,
Q = 10–4 C z=0 /;
(1) 15°C (2) 12°C (3) 4°C (4) 11°C
:
75. An NPN transistor is used in common emitter configuration (1) 0.9 N (2) 0.1 N
as an amplifier with 1 k load resistance. Signal voltage of (3) 3 × 10–2 N (4) 0.6 N
10 mV is applied across the base-emitter. This produces a 3
mA change in the collector current and 15µA change in the 79. A moving coil galvanometer has a coil with 175 turns and
base current of the amplifier. The input resistance and voltage area 1 cm 2 . It uses a torsion band of torsion constant
gain are : 10–6 N-m/rad. The coil is placed in a maganetic field B parallel
to its plane. The coil deflects by 1° for a current of 1 mA. The
NPN , (amplifier) value of B (in Tesla) is approximately :-
1k 10 mV / 175 1 cm2 ,
/ 3 mA 10–6 N-m/rad , +
/ 15µA , ;{= B 1mA
(gain) : EN 1° B ( ) :-
(1) 10 –3 (2) 10 –1 (3) 10 –4 (4) 10 –2
(1) 0.33 k , 1.5 (2) 0.67 k , 200
80. 50 W/m2 energy density of sunlight is normally incident on
(3) 0.33 k , 300 (4) 0.67 k , 300 the surface of a solar panel. Some part of incident energy
(25%) is reflected from the surface and the rest is absorbed.
76. A ball is thrown vertically up (taken as +z-axis) from the ground. The force exerted on 1m 2 surface area will be close to
The correct momentum-height (p-h) diagram is : (c = 3 × 108 m/s) :-

( +z-axis) 50 W/m2 ?
LL

(p-h) = % (25%)

1m2
p p
:- (c = 3 × 108 m/s)
(1) h (2) h
O O (1) 15 × 10–8 N (2) 35 × 10 –8 N
A

(3) 10 × 10–8 N (4) 20 × 10 –8 N

81. The area of a square is 5.29 cm2. The area of 7 such squares
taking into account the significant figures is :-
p
p { 5.29 cm2 , {
h :-
(3) O (4) h
O
(1) 37 cm2 (2) 37.0 cm 2
(3) 37.03 cm 2 (4) 37.030 cm 2
77. A stationary horizontal disc is free to rotate about its axis. When 82. A wedge of mass M = 4m lies on a frictionless plane. A particle
a torque is applied on it, its kinetic energy as a function of of mass m approaches the wedge with speed v. There is no
, where is the angle by which it has rotated, is given as friction between the particle and the plane or between the
k 2. If its moment of inertia is I then the angular acceleration particle and the wedge. The maximum height climbed by the
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

of the disc is : particle on the wedge is given by :-

{ %? = M = 4m , (wedge) , ?
, ] k 2 m , v
] ; I ; ? }
; : ? } <+
:-
k k k 2k
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2I I 4I I 2v2 v2 2v2 v2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
7g g 5g 2g
142 Physics Gutka
83. In a conductor, if the number of conduction electrons per unit 88. The graph shows how the magnification m produced by a thin
volume is 8.5 × 1028 m–3 and mean free time is 25ƒs (femto lens varies with image distance v. What is the focal length of
second), it's approximate resistivity is :- the lens used ?

; [; , 8.5 × , m v
1028 m–3 /; ; 25ƒs ( )
:-

(me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) m

(1) 10 –5 m (2) 10 –6 m
c
(3) 10 –7 m (4) 10 –8 m

84. Figure shows charge (q) versus voltage (V) graph for series
v
and parallel combination of two given capacitors. The a b
capacitances are :

(q) b2 c b2 a b
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(V) = / a ac c c
:
89. A submarine experiences a pressure of 5.05 × 106 Pa at a
depth of d1 in a sea. When it goes further to a depth of d2 ,
q( C) it experiences a pressure of 8.08 × 106 Pa. ,Then d2 – d1 is
A
approximately (density of water = 103 kg/m3 and acceleration
due to gravity = 10 ms–2 )
500 B EN d1 , 5.05 × 106 Pa
80
10V ; d2 8.08 × 106 Pa
V(Volt)
d2 – d1 ( %
(1) 50 F and 30 F (2) 20 F and 30 F = 103 kg/m3 ; = 10 ms–2)

(3) 60 F and 40 F (4) 40 F and 10 F (1) 500 m (2) 400 m (3) 300 m (4) 600 m
LL
85. A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor (resistivity 90. A simple pendulum of length L is placed between the plates
= 1.7 ×10–8 m) of radius of cross-section 5 mm. Find the mobility of a parallel plate capacitor having electric field E, as shown
of the charges if their drift velocity is 1.1 × 10 –3 m/s.
in figure. Its bob has mass m and charge q. The time period
5 mm ( = 1.7 × 10–8 m) of the pendulum is given by :

, 5A / ; L , , = ;]
1.1 × 10–3 m/s
{=E ] m
A

(1) 1.3 m2/Vs (2) 1.5 m 2/Vs q :

(3) 1.8 m2/Vs (4) 1.0 m 2/Vs

86. The displacement of a damped harmonic oscillator is given +

+
by + L
+
x(t ) = e–01.1t cos (10 t + ). Here t is in seconds. +
+ m
+ q
The time taken for its amplitude of vibration to drop to half +
+
of its initial value is close to : +
+
+
]
E
x(t ) = e–0.1t cos (10 t + ). t
; :
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(1) 13 s (2) 7 s (3) 27 s (4) 4 s L L

(1) 2 (2) 2
qE
2 qE
87. An npn transistor operates as a common emitter amplifier, with g2 g
m m
a power gain of 60 dB. The input circuit resistance is 100
and the output load resistance is 10 k . The common emitter
current gain is :
L L
(3) 2 (4) 2
npn 60 dB qE q2E2
g g2
100 m m2
10 k / :

(1) 6 0 (2) 10 4 (3) 6 × 10 2 (4) 10 2

 Physics Gutka 143
91. The value of numerical aperature of the objective lens of a 94. The transfer characteristic curve of a transistor, having input
microscope is 1.25. If light of wavelength 5000 Å is used,
and output resistance 100 and 100 k respectively, is shown
the minimum separation between two points, to be seen as
in the figure. The Voltage and Power gain, are respectively:
distinct, will be :
] % 100 100 k
[; } (numerical
; ]
aperature) 1.25 ; 5000 Å /;
%:
]
:

(1) 0.24 m (2) 0.48 m

(3) 0.12 m (4) 0.38 m (400, 20)
92. A progressive wave travelling along the positive x-direction
IC (300, 15)
is represented by y(x, t) = A sin (kx – t + ). Its snapshot at (mA)
t = 0 is given in the figure: (200, 10)

x- y(x, t) = A sin (100, 5)

(kx – t + ), t=0 [ =
Ib ( A)
:

y (1) 5 × 104 , 5 × 105

A (2) 5 × 104 , 5 × 106

x

For this wave, the phase is :

EN (3) 5 × 104 , 2.5 × 106

(4) 2.5 × 104 , 2.5 × 106

95. A galvanometer of resistance 100 has 50 divisions on its
,] : scale and has sensitivity of 20 A/division. It is to be converted
to a voltmeter with three ranges, of 0–2 V, 0–10 V and
(1) 0 (2) 0–20 V. The appropriate circuit to do so is :
2
LL
100
50 20 A/ , ,
(3) (4)
2 ] 0–2 V, 0–10 V 0–20 V

93. An electromagnetic wave is represented by the electric field

, :

E E 0 nˆ sin[ t (6y 8z)] . Taking unit vectors in x, y and z G R1 = 1900

A

R1 R2 R3 R2 = 9900
(1)
directions to be ˆi, ˆj, kˆ , the direction of propogation ŝ , is : R3 = 19900
2V 10V 20V
; ] {=

; R1 R2 R3
E E 0 nˆ sin[ t (6y 8z)] , x, y
G R1 = 2000
z % ˆi, ˆj,kˆ , ŝ , (2) R2 = 8000
R3 = 10000
: 2V 10V 20V

4ˆj 3kˆ
(1) ŝ G R1 = 19900
5 R1 R2 R3 R2 = 9900
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(3)
R3 = 1900
20V 10V 2V
3iˆ 4ˆj
(2) ŝ
5
R1 R2 R3
3jˆ 4kˆ G R1 = 1900
(3) ŝ 5 R2 = 8000
(4)
R3 = 10000
2V 10V 20V
4kˆ 3jˆ
(4) ŝ
5
144 Physics Gutka
96. To verify Ohm's law, a student connects the voltmeter across
RA Ig
the battery as, shown in the figure. The measured voltage is
(3) RARV = G2 and R (I0 Ig )
plotted as a function of the current, and the following graph V
is obtained:
2
], , I0 Ig RA Ig
(4) R A R V G2 and
] (V) / Ig RV I0 Ig
(I) ] 99. Consider the LR circuit shown in the figure. If the switch S
is closed at t = 0 then the amount of charge that passes through
V L
the battery between t = 0 and t = is :
R
= , LR ; t=0 S ]
internal
Resistance Ammeter L
t=0 t=
R
:
R
L R
V
1.5V
i

E S
V0
I 1000 mA EL EL
If V0 is almost zero, identify the correct statement: (1) (2)
7.3R 2 2.7R 2
V0 ; ] ,
EN :
(1) The value of the resistance R is 1.5 7.3EL 2.7EL
(3) (4)
R 1.5 R2 R2
(2) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and the value of R is 1.5 100. A solid sphere, of radius R acquires a terminal velocity 1 when
1.5 V R 1.5 falling (due to gravity) through a viscous fluid having a coefficient
(3) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and its internal resistance of viscosity . The sphere is broken into 27 identical solid
is 1.5 spheres. If each of these spheres acquires a terminal velocity,
, , = 1.5 V =1.5 2, when falling through the same fluid, the ratio ( 1/ 2) equals:

(4) The potential difference across the battery is 1.5 V when R , ] , ( ;

LL
it sends a current of 1000 mA. ) 1 ; 27
= 1.5 V, ; 1000 mA
2 ]
( 1/ 2) :
97. A magnetic compass needle oscillates 30 times per minute (1) 1/27 (2) 1/9 (3) 27 (4) 9
at a place where the dip is 45º, and 40 times per minute where 101. A small speaker delivers 2 W of audio output. At what distance
the dip is 30º. If B1 and B2 are respectively the total magnetic
from the speaker will one detect 120 dB intensity sound ?
field due to the earth at the two places, then the ratio B1/B2
A

is best given by : [Given reference intensity of sound as 10–12W/m2 ]

% 45° 30° , 2W /
; , % 30 40 ; ] / 120 dB ?[ %/ (reference)
;{= % B1 B2 ] = 10–12W/m2]
B1/B2 : (1) 10 cm (2) 30 cm (3) 40 cm (4) 20 cm
(1) 2.2 (2) 1.8 (3) 0.7 (4) 3.6 102. A plane electromagnetic wave having a frequency = 23.9
98. A moving coil galvanometer, having a resistance G, produces GHz propagates along the positive z-direction in free space.
full scale deflection when a current Ig flows through it. This The peak value of the electric field is 60 V/m. Which among
galvanometer can be converted into (i) an ammeter of range the following is the acceptable magnetic field component in
0 to I0 (I0 > Ig) by connecting a shunt resistance RA to it and the electromagnetic wave ?
(ii) into a voltmeter of range 0 to V(V = GI0) by connecting = 23.9 GHz , ; /
a series resistance RV to it. Then,
G , / / Ig z- {=
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

/ 0 I0 (I0 > Ig) , 60 V/m ;{=

RA / 0 V(V = GI0) ?
, RV ] : (1) B 2 10 7 sin(0.5 103 z 1.5 1011 t)iˆ
2
Ig RA I0 Ig (2) B 2 10 7 sin(1.5 10 2 x 0.5 1011 t) ˆj
(1) R A R V G2 and
I0 Ig RV Ig
(3) B 2 10 7 sin(0.5 103 z 1.5 1011 t)iˆ
2
RA Ig (4) B 60 sin (0.5 10 3 x 1.5 1011 t)kˆ
(2) RARV = G2 and
RV I0 Ig
 Physics Gutka 145
5. The radius of gyration of a uniform rod of length l, about an

l
JEE(MAIN)-2020 axis passing through a point away from the centre of the
4
rod, and perpendicular to it, is :
1. The time period of revolution of electron in its ground state
orbit in a hydrogen atom is 1.6 × 10–16 s. The frequency of l
l , , +
revolution of the electron in its first excited state (in s–1) is: 4
+ (radius of gyradtion)
%
1.6 ×10–16 s ,
(frequency of revolution) (s–1 ) : 1 7 3 1
(1) l (2) l (3) l (4) l
(1) 6.2 × 1015 (2) 5.6 × 1012 8 48 8 4
(3) 7.8 × 1014 (4) 1.6 × 1014 6. Three point particles of masses 1.0 kg, 1.5 kg and 2.5 kg
are placed at three corners of a right angle triangle of sides
2. A 60 HP electric motor lifts an elevator having a maximum
4.0 cm, 3.0 cm and 5.0 cm as shown in the figure. The center
total load capacity of 2000 kg. If the frictional force on the
of mass of the system is at a point:
elevator is 4000 N, the speed of the elevator at full load is
4.0 cm, 3.0 cm 5.0 cm
close to: (1 HP = 746 W, g = 10 ms–2 )
] 1.0 kg, 1.5 kg 2.5 kg
2000 kg { , , 60 HP , ( = ; %
; , ? 4000
2.5 kg
N ] { ,,
(1 HP = 746 W, g = 10 ms–2 ) 5 cm
EN 4 cm
(1) 1.7 ms–1 (2) 2.0 ms–1
1.0 kg 1.5 kg
(3) 1.9 ms–1 (4) 1.5 ms–1 3 cm
3. As shown in the figure, a bob of mass m is tied by a massless
(1) 1.5 cm right and 1.2 cm above 1 kg mass
string whose other end portion is wound on a fly wheel (disc)
of radius r and mass m. When released from rest the bob starts (1kg 1.5 cm 1.2 cm )
falling vertically. When it has covered a distance of h, the angular (2) 0.9 cm right and 2.0 cm above 1 kg mass
speed of the wheel will be :
(1kg 0.9 cm 2.0 cm
LL
= ]m , )
, (3) 0.6 cm right and 2.0 cm above 1 kg mass
r m ;
(1kg 0.6 cm 2.0 cm )
, h ;
(4) 2.0 cm right and 0.9 cm above 1 kg mass
;
(1kg 2.0 cm 0.9 cm )
m
A

7. A non-isotropic solid metal cube has coefficients of linear

r expansion as :
5 × 10 –5 /°C along the x-axis and 5 × 10 –6 /°C along the
y and the z-axis. If the coefficient of volume expansion of the
m solid is C × 10–6 /°C then the value of C is ______.

1 2gh 3 , ? ; %
(1) (2) r
r 3 4gh 5 ×10–5/°C x- 5 × 10–6/°C, y z- ;
C × 10–6/°C ] C ______.
1 4gh 3 (1) 60 (2) 40 (3) 30 (4) 20
(3) (4) r
r 3 2gh
8. An elevator in a building can carry a maximum of 10 persons,
4. Which of the following gives a reversible operation? with the average mass of each person being 68 kg. The mass
of the elevator itself is 920 kg and it moves with a constant
, ;
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

speed 3 m/s. The frictional force opposing the motion is

6000 N. If the elevator is moving up with its full capacity, the
power delivered by the motor to the elevator (g = 10 m/s2 )
(1) (2) must be at least :
,, 68 kg
10 [ , 920 kg ;
(3) (4) 3 m/s , ? 6000 N ;
{
} : (g = 10 m/s2)
(1) 56300 W (2) 48000 W (3) 66000 W (4) 62360 W
146 Physics Gutka
(T) B 12. A 60 pF capacitor is fully charged by a 20 V supply. It is then
disconnected from the supply and is connected to another
2.0 uncharged 60 pF capactior is parallel. The electrostatic energy
that is lost in this process by the time the charge is redistributed
between them is (in nJ) ____.
1.0
–150 –50
60 pF , = 20 V
9. H 60 pF , =
50 150 A/m (parallel connection)
–1.0 {
nJ _______
–2.0 (1) 6 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 5

The figure gives experimentally measured B vs. H variation 13. M gram s of ste am at 100°C is mix ed w ith
in a ferromagnetic material. The retentivity, co-ercivity and 200 g of ice at its melting point in a thermally insulated
saturation, respectively, of the material are: container. If it produces liquid water at 40°C [heat of
vaporization of water is 540 cal/ g and heat of fusion of ice
= , ; (ferromagnetic) , }
is 80 cal/g], the value of M is______.
B vs. H / ]
100°C M 200 ,
%
(1) 150 A/m, 1.0 T and 1.5 T
; 40°C M :
(2) 1.0 T, 50 A/m and 1.5 T
EN ( 540 cal/ g
(3) 1.5 T, 50 A/m and 1.0 T
80 cal/g )
(4) 1.5 T, 50 A/m and 1.0 T
(1) 40 g (2) 20 g (3) 80 g (4) 10 g
10. An ideal fluid flows (laminar flow) through a pipe of non-uniform
diameter. The maximum and minimum diameters of the pipes 14. Consider two solid spheres of radii R1 = 1m, R2 = 2m and
are 6.4 cm and 4.8 cm, respectively. The ratio of the minimum masses M1 and M2, respectively. The gravitational field due
and the maximum velocities of fluid in this pipe is: M1
to sphere (1) and (2) are shown. The value of
, , ; M2 is :
LL

% 6.4 cm 4.8 cm
R1 = 1m R2 = 2m
:
% M1 M2 ] (1) (2)

3 3 81 9
(1) (2) (3) (4) M1
2 4 256 16 = = :
M2
A

11. Tw o idea l Ca rnot e ngines ope ra te in ca scade

Gravitational field E

(all heat given up by one engine is used by the other engine

to produce work) between temperatures, T 1 and T2 . The 4
temperature of the hot reservoir of the first engine is T1 and
3
(2)
the temperature of the cold reservoir of the second engine 2
is T2. T is temperature of the sink of first engine which is also
(1)
1
the source for the second engine. How is T related to T 1 and
T2, if both the engines perform equal amount of work ? 0 1 2 3 4 5 radius R
(, } 1 2
(1) (2)
} ) T1 T2 2 3
, 1 1
(3) (4)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

T1 T2 3 6
15. The critical angle of a medium for a specific wavelength, if
T ;
the medium has r elative pe rmittivity 3 a nd r elative
T, T1 T2 :
4
permeability for this wavelength, will be :
2T1T2 3
(1) T = (2) T = T1T2
T1 T2 /; ], ?; 3

4
T1 T2 ?; /; %
(3) T = (4) T = 0 3
2
(1) 60° (2) 15° (3) 45° (4) 30°
 Physics Gutka 147
16. Boolean relation at the output stage-Y for the following circuit 20. A galvanometer having a coil resistance 100 gives a full
is :
scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed through
Y % it. What is the value of the resistance which can convert this

+5V galvanometer into a voltmeter giving full scale deflection for

A a potential difference of 10 V?

Output-Y 100 1 mA

B ; ; , ,
5V
10 V
?

(1) A + B (2) A B (3) A B (4) A B (1) 9.9 k (2) 8.9 k

17. At time t = 0 magnetic field of 1000 Gauss is passing
perpendicularly through the area defined by the closed loop (3) 7.9 k (4) 10 k
shown in the figure. If the magnetic field reduces linearly to 21. A simple pendulum is being used to determine th value of
500 Gauss, in the next 5s, then induced EMF in the loop is: gravitational acceleration g at a certain place. Th length of
;t=0 = , 1000 the pendulum is 25.0 cm and a stop watch with 1s resolution
measures the time taken for 40 oscillations to be 50 s. The
;{= ; 5s ;{=
accuracy in g is :
; (linear) ? 500 ]

g ; 25.0
16cm EN cm 40 , 1s (resolution)
; 50 s g (accuracy)
2cm
4cm :
(1) 3.40% (2) 5.40%
(3) 4.40% (4) 2.40%
(1) 36 µV (2) 48 µV (3) 56 µV (4) 28 µV
18. A one metre long (both ends open) organ pipe is kept in a gas 1
22. A carnot engine having an efficiency of is being used as
that has double the density of air at STP. Assuming the speed 10
LL
of sound in air at STP is 300 m/s, the frequency difference a refrigerator. If the work done on the refrigerator is 10 J,
between the fundamental and second harmonic of this pipe is the amount of heat absorbed from the reservoir at lower
________ Hz. temperature is :
[ ,, , ,
1
] ? ? ; (efficiency) ,
10
, /
A

300 m/s,
;
; ________ Hz.
10 J
(1) 105.00 to 105.50 (2) 103.00 to 104.20
:
(3) 106.00 to 107.20 (4) 101.00 to 103.00
(1) 99 J (2) 100 J (3)90 J (4) 1 J
19. A plane electromagne tic wa ve of freque ncy
23. In the given circuit, value of Y is :
25 GHz is propagating in vacuum along the
z-direction. At a particular point in space and time, the magnetic Y :

field is given by B 5 10 8 ˆj T . The corresponding electric 1

field E is (speed of light c = 3 × 108 ms–1 )

25 GHz , ; z- Y
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

; , ; , ;{=
0
B 5 10 8 ˆjT ; {= E %(
c = 3 × 108 ms–1) (1) will not execute )

(1) 1.66 × 10–16 î V / m (2) 15 ˆi V / m (2) 0 ;)

(3) toggles between 0 and 1 (0 1 ? <+ )
(3) 1.66 10 16 ˆi V / m (4) 15 ˆi V / m
(4) 1
148 Physics Gutka
24. Consider a force F xiˆ yjˆ . The work done by this force 29. A vessel of depth 2h is half filled with a liquid of refractive

in moving a particle from point A(1, 0) to B(0, 1) along the index 2 2 and the upper half with another liquid of refractive
line segment is :
(all quantities are in SI units) index 2 . The liquids are immiscible. The apparent depth
, F xiˆ yjˆ . , A(1, 0) of the inne r surface of the bottom of vesse l
B(0, 1) = } will be :
:
2h , ; 2
( SI )
Y 2 2 h , 2
B(0, 1)

X h
(0, 0) A(1, 0) h 3 h
(1) (2) h 2 (3) 2 2 1 (4)
2 4 3 2
3 1
(1) J (2) 1 J (3) 2 J (4) J
2 2
25. The electric fields of two plane electromagnetic plane waves 30. Three harmonic waves having equal frequency and same
in vacuum are given by

E1 E 0 ˆjcos( t kx) and E 2 E 0 kˆ cos( t ky) intensity I0, have phase angles 0, and – respectively.
4 4
At t = 0, a particle of charge q is at origin with a velocity
When they are superimposed the intensity of the resultant wave
v 0.8 cjˆ (c is the speed of light in vacuum). The instantaneous is close to :
force experienced by the particle is : EN I0 %
; {=
E1 E 0 ˆjcos( t kx) E2 E 0 kˆ cos( t ky) 0, – /; (superimposed)
4 4
;t=0 q , v 0.8 cjˆ (c
:
) :
(1) 5.8 I 0 (2) 0.2 I0 (3) I0 (4) 3 I0
(1) E 0 q ( 0.8iˆ ˆj k)
ˆ (2) E 0 q (0.8iˆ ˆj 0.4k)
ˆ
31. In a fluorescent lamp choke (a small transformer) 100 V of
LL
(3) E 0 q (0.8iˆ ˆj 0.2k)
ˆ (4) E 0 q (0.4 ˆi 3ˆj 0.8k)
ˆ reverse voltage is produced when the choke current changes
uniformly from 0.25 A to 0 in a duration of 0.025 ms. The
26. Consider two ide al dia tomic ga se s A and B at some
temperature T. Molecules of the gas A are rigid, and have a self-inductance of the choke (in mH) is e stimated to
mass m. Molecules of the gas B have an additional vibrational be__________ .
m ( ) /
mode, and have a mass . The ratio of the specific heats
4
0.025 ms 0.25 A , : ? ;
A

(CAV and C BV ) of gas A and B, respectively is : 100 V

T A B (self-inductance) mH _______ .
A < m B
(1) 10 (2) 20 (3) 5 (4) 8
m
A B ] % 32. Both the diodes used in the circuit shown are assumed to be
4 ideal and have negligible resistance when these are forward
C AV CBV : biased. Built in potential in each diode is 0.7 V. For the input
voltages shown in the figure, the voltage (in Volts) at point A
(1) 7 : 9 (2) 5 : 7 (3) 3 : 5 (4) 5 : 9
is__________ .
27. A pa rt icle m oving wi th k inet ic e ne rgy E ha s
de Broglie wavelength . If energy E is added to its energy,
the wavelength become /2. Value of E, is : ) .;
(Built in potential), 0.7 V =
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

E , /; ; E
; /; /2 E : (input) A ( ) _________

(1) 2E (2) E (3) 3E (4) 4E

A
28. If the screw on a screw-gauge is given six rotations, it moves Vin = 12.7V 4V
by 3 mm on the main scale. If there are 50 divisions on the
circular scale the least count of the screw gauge is :
; % ? ; ; [; 3 mm
0V 0V
; ; ; 50
? (1) 8 V (2) 3.3 V (3) 12 V (4) 6
(1) 0.001 mm (2) 0.001 cm (3) 0.02 mm (4) 0.01 cm
 Physics Gutka 149
36. The displacement time graph of a particle executing S.H.M.
\\\\
is given in figure : (sketch is schematic and not to scale)

\\\
Object

\\
,, ; =

\\\ \\ \\\\\\\\\\\
33. ( = )
20 16 12 8 4
(cm)

displacement
\\\ 2T

\
4
O 3T T 5T time (s)
T
A spherical mirror is obtained as shown in the figure from a 4 4 4
hollow glass sphere. If an object is positioned in front of the
mirror, what will be the nature and magnification of the image Which of the following statements is/are true for this motion?
of the object ? (Figure drawn as schematic and not to scale)
= ], [ , ;
3T
; , ; (A) The force is zero t
4
( =
) 3T
(t ; )
(1) Inverted, real and magnified ( , , ) 4

(2) Erect, virtual and magnified ( , , ) (B) The acceleration is maximum at t = T

(3) Erect, virtual and unmagnified ( , , ) (t = T )

(4) Inverted, real and unmagnified , , ) T

(C) The speed is maximum at t
34. Magnetic materials used for making permanent magnets (P) 4
and magnets in a transformer (T) have different properties of EN
the following, which property best matches for the type of T
(t )
magnet required ? 4
(P) (T) ,
T
; (D) The P.E. is equal to K.E. of the oscillation at t
2

(1) T : Large retentivity, small coercivity T

(t , )
(T : / , ) 2
LL

(2) P : Small retentivity, large coercivity (1) (A), (B) and (D) (2) (B), (C) and (D)

(P : / , ) (3) (A) and (D) (4) (A), (B) and (C)

(3) T : Large retentivity, large coercivity 37. A heat engine is involved with exchange of heat of 1915 J,
–40 J, +125 J and QJ, during one cycle achieving an efficiency
(T : / , )
of 50.0%. The value of Q is:
(4) P : Large retentivity, large coercivity
A

(P : / , ) 50.0% , 1915 J, –40 J, +125 J –QJ

, , Q &
(1) 640 J (2) 400 J (3) 980 J (4) 40 J
35. 0 25 50 75 100 38. In a Young's double slit experiment, 16 fringes are observed
A B in a certain segment of the screen when light of wavelength
2m 700 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400
nm, the number of fringes observed in the same segment of
Shown in the figure is rigid and uniform one meter long rod the screen would be :
AB held in horizontal position by two strings tied to its ends
}& 700 nm /; ,
and attached to the ceiling. The rod is of mass 'm' and has
[; 16 ; /; 400 nm
another weight of mass 2 m hung at a distance of 75 cm from
[; &
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

A. The tension in the string at A is :

(1) 28 (2) 24 (3) 18 (4) 30
= , , <+ , + AB
39. In a hydrogen atom the electron makes a transition from
} { + (n + 1)th level to the nth level. If n>>l, the frequency of radiation
'm' A 75 cm 2m emitted is proportional to :

A : (n + 1)th nth ;
(1) 2 mg (2) 0.5 mg n>>l

(3) 0.75 mg (4) 1 mg 1 1 1 1

(1) (2) (3) (4)
n4 n3 n2 n
150 Physics Gutka
40. In a plane electromagnetic wave, the directions of electric field 45. A uniform thin rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs
vertically from a rigid support and a block of mass 2 kg is
and magnetic field are represented by k̂ and 2iˆ 2ˆj ,
attached to its free end. A transverse short wavetrain of
respectively. What is the unit vector along direction of wavelength 6 cm is produced at the lower end of the rope.
propagation of the wave. What is the wavelength of the wavetrain (in cm) when it reaches
; {= ;{= the top of the rope ?

% k̂ 2iˆ 2ˆj , 12 m 6 kg
2 kg , [
6 cm /; ,
1 ˆ ˆ 1 ˆ ˆ (wavetrain) ;
(1) i j (2) i 2j
2 5 /; (cm ) %
(1) 9 (2) 12 (3) 6 (4) 3
1 ˆ ˆ 1 ˆ ˆ
(3) 2i j (4) j k 46. In a Young's double slit experiment, light of
5 2 500 nm is used to produce an interference pattern. When the
41. Using screw gauge of pitch 0.1 cm and 50 divisions on its distance between the slits is 0.05 mm, the angular width (in
circular scale, the thickness of an object is measured. It should degree) of the fringes formed on the distance screen is close to:
correctly be recorded as : , }& 500 nm
, ; ; 0.05 mm
0.1cm ; 50 ; ( )
% (1) 0.07° (2) 0.17° (3) 1.7° (4) 0.57°
(1) 2.123 cm (2) 2.125 cm
47.
(3) 2.121 cm (4) 2.124 cm EN
42. Moment of inertia of a cylinder of mass M, length L and radius
R about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular

R2 L2
to the axis of the cylinder is I M . If such a cylinder Consider a gas of triatomic molecules. The molecules are
4 12
assumed to the triangular and made of massless rigid rods
is to be made for a given mass of material, the ratio L/R for whose vertices are occupied by atoms. The internal energy
it to have minimum possible I is :- of a mole of the gas at temperature T is :
LL
(cylinder) , ; ;
; (rigid)
R2 L2
I M ] M T , %
4 12

]R L ; , , 9 3 5
(1) RT (2) RT (3) RT (4) 3RT
, 2 2 2
A

L/R % 48. A perfectly dimagnetic sphere has a small spherical cavity at

its centre, which is filled with a paramagnetic substance. The
2 3 3 2 whole system is placed in a uniform magnetic field B . Then
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3 2 2 3 the field inside the paramagnetic substance is:
43. A balloon filled with helium (32°C and 1.7 atm.) bursts. ; (dimagnetic) , ,
Immediately afterwards the expansion of helium can be , ; (paramagnetic)
considered as :
; , , ;{= B
32°C,
; ; ;{= :
1.7 ;
; %
(1) Irreversible isothermal ( ;: ) P
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(2) Irreversible adiabatic( ; ;)

(1) Zero ( ;)
(3) Reversible adiabatic ( : )
(2) B
(4) Reversible isothermal ( ;)
(3) much large than B but opposite to B
44. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 a nd 1.02
atmosphere, respectively. The ratio of their volumes is : (B B )
% (4) much large than B and parallel to B
1.01 1.02 %
(B B )
(1) 8 : 1 (2) 0.8 : 1 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 4 : 1
 Physics Gutka 151
49. Concentric metallic hollow spheres of radii R and 4R hold 54. A galvanometer coil has 500 turns and each turn has an
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Given that surface charge average area of 3 × 10–4 m2. If a torque of 1.5 Nm is required
densities of the concentric spheres are equal, the potential to keep this coil parallel to magnetic field when a current of
difference V(R) – V(4R) is:
0.5 A is flowing through it, the strength of the field
, ;[ R 4R (in T) is _______ .
% Q1 Q2 ; [ ; ? 500 (turns) ?
(surface charge density) V(R) – V(4R)
3 × 10–4 m2 ; 0.5A /
:
, ;{= {= 1.5 Nm
3Q1 Q2 3Q1 3Q 2 ; {= _______
(1) (2) (3) (4)
16 0 R 4 0 R 4 0R 4 0R (1) 20 (2) 10 (3) 5 (4) 2

50. A block of mass m attached to massless spring is performing 55. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the
oscillatory motion of amplitude 'A' on a frictionless horizontal distance between two peaks (crests) is 5 m, while the distance
plane. If half of the mass of the block breaks off when it is passing between one crest and one trough is 1.5 m. The possible
through its equilibrium point, the amplitude of oscillation for wavelengths (in m) of the waves are :
the remaining system become f A. The value of f is:
, ( )
m , , , /; 5m , , /; 1.5 m
{ A ;
/; (m ) %&
; ; ,
1 1 1
; fA f : (1) 1, 2, 3, ........ (2) , , , ...
2 4 6
1 1 1 1 1
(1) (2) 2 (3) 1 (4) (3) 1, 3, 5, ..... (4) , , , ...
2 EN 2 1 3 5
56. A small bar magnet is moved through a coil at constant speed
51. The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave propagating
from one end to the other. Which of the following series of
along the x direction in vacuum is E E 0 ˆjcos( t kx). The observations wil be seen on the galvanometer G attached across
magnetic field B , at the moment t = 0 is : the coil ?

; ] x ] + ,
G
= E E 0 ˆjcos( t kx). ;t=0 ;{= :
LL

(1) B E0 cos(kx) ˆj
0 0
G
E0
(2) B cos(kx)kˆ
0 0 a
magnet
(3) B E0 0 0 cos(kx)kˆ c b
A

Three positions shown describe : (a) the magnet's entry (b)

E0
(4) B cos(kx)ˆj magnet is completely inside and (c) magnet's exit.
0 0

52. Amount of solar energy received on the earth's surface per (a) _ (b) (c)
unit area per unit time is defined a solar constant. Dimension
of solar constant is:
(a) (b) (c)
{ ;
: (1)
(1) ML2 T–2 (2) MLT–2
(3) M2L0T–1 (4) ML0 T–3 (a) (b) (c)
53. A calorimeter of water equivalent 20 g contains 180 g of
(2)
water at 25°C. 'm' grams of steam at 100°C is mixed in it
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

till the temperature of the mixure is 31°C. The value of 'm'

is close to (Latent heat of water = 540 cal g–1, specific heat (a) (b) (c)
of water = 1 cal g–1 °C–1 )
( 20 g) 25°C 180 g (3)

100°C 'm'
31°C m ( = 540 cal g–1, (a) (b) (c)
= 1 cal g–1 °C–1)
(4)
(1) 2.6 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 3.2
152 Physics Gutka
57. Identify the operation performed by the circuit given below: 61. Ten charges are placed on the circumference of a circle of
radius R with constant angular separation between successive
} (operation)
charges. Alternate charges 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 have charge (+q) each,
:- while 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 have charge (–q) each. The potential V
and the electric field E at the centre of the circle are
A respectively:
(Take V = 0 at infinity)

B R , 10 ,
; , 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
% (+q) 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 % (–q)
C
(V) { = (E) %
(1) AND (2) NAND ( V=0 ,)
(3) OR (4) NOT
10q 10q
58. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of (1) V ;E
6 A/m when it is placed in an external magnetic field of
4 0R 4 0 R2
0.4 T at a temperature of 4 K. When the sample is placed
in an external magnetic field of 0.3 T at a temperature of 10q
(2) V 0, E
24 K, then the magnetisation will be : 4 0 R2
; , 4K 0.4 T (3) V = 0, E = 0
; {= ]
10q
6 Am–1 ; 24 K 0.3 T ; (4) V ;E 0
EN 4 0
R
= , %&
62. A radioactive nucleus decays by two different processes. The
(1) 4 A/m (2) 0.75 A/m
half life for the first process is 10 s and that for the second is
(3) 2.25 A/m (4) 1 A/m 100s. the effective half life of the nucleus is close to:
59. Activities of three radioactive substances A, B and C are
represented by the curves A, B and C, in the figure. Then
10s 100 s /
their half-lives T1 (A) :T1 (B):T1 (C) are in the ratio : %
LL
2 2 2
(1) 9 sec (2) 55 sec (3) 6 sec (4) 12 sec
A, B C, = %
63. A galvanometer is used in laboratory for detecting the null point
A, B C ] in electrical experiments. If, on passing a current of 6mA it
produces a deflection of 2°, its figure of merit is close to :
T1 (A) :T1 (B):T1 (C) , :
2 2 2 , ;
A

; 6 mA / 2°
In R ] (figure of merit) %
6
A (1) 3 × 10–3 A/div.( )
4
B (2) 333° A/div.( )
2 C
0 (3) 6 × 10–3 A/div.( )
5 10 t (yrs)
(4) 666° A/div. ( )
(1) 3 : 2 : 1 (2) 4 : 3 : 1
64. A satellite is in an elliptical orbit around a planet P. It is observed
(3) 2 : 1 : 3 (4) 2 : 1 : 1 that the velocity of the satellite when it is farthest from the
planet is 6 times less than that when it is closest to the planet.
60. An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2 ,
The ratio of distances between the satellite and the planet at
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the transmission closest and farthest points is :
line is approximately:
P , ;
] 2 ] 220 V 1
] 6
kW :

(1) 72% (2) 96% :

(3) 91% (4) 85% (1) 1 : 6 (2) 3 : 4 (3) 1 : 3 (4) 1 : 2
 Physics Gutka 153
65. For the given input voltage waveform Vin(t), the output voltage 67. An AC circuit has R = 100 , C = 2 µF and L = 80 mH,
waveform VD(t), across the capacitor is correctly depicted by:
connected in series. The quality factor of the circuit is :
Vin(t) = V0(t)
: AC R = 100 , C = 2 µF L = 80 mH,

1k :

+5V (1) 0.5 (2) 2 (3) 20 (4) 400

5µs
10nF V0(t) 68. A part of a complete circuit is shown in the figure. At some
instant, the value of current I is 1 A and it is decreasing at a
0V t
0 5µs rate of 102A s–1. The value of the potential difference VP –
VQ, (in volts) at that instant, is.
V0(t)
= , { ]/ I
3V 1A ; 102A s–1 ? { ] VP
– VQ ( ) _______
(1) 2V

t L = 50mH
5µs 10µs 15µs I R=2

P Q
V0(t) 30V

(1) 33 (2) 28 (3) 23 (4) 30

2V
69. A double convex lens has power P and same radii of curvature
(2) EN R of both the surfaces. The radius of curvature of a surface
t of a plano-convex lens made of the same material with power
5µs 10µs 15µs 1.5 P is:

V0(t) P , R
1.5 P

(3) 2V
LL

t R
(1) (2) 2R
5µs 10µs 15µs 2

V0(t)
3R R
(3) (4)
2 3
2V
A

70. A circuit to verify Ohm's law uses ammeter and voltmeter in

(4) series or parallel connected correctly to the resistor. In the
t circuit:
5µs 10µs 15µs
] ]; ,
66. A screw gauge has 50 divisions on its circular scale. The
;
circular scale is 4 units ahead of the pitch scale marking, prior
to use. Upon one complete rotation of the circular scale, a &
displacement of 0.5 mm is noticed on the pitch scale. The
(1) ammeter is always connected series and voltmeter in
nature of zero error involved, and the least count of the screw
parallel.
gauge, are respectively :
( )
( ) ; 50 ] ;
4 ; , (2) Both, ammeter and voltmeter mast be connected in series.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

0.5 mm ;= ( )
: (3) Both ammeter and voltmeter must be connected in
(1) Negative, 2 µm ( , 2 µm) parallel.

(2) Positive, 10 µm ( , 10 µm) ( )

(3) Positive, 0.1 µm ( , 0.1 µm) (4) ammeter is always used in parallel and voltmeter is series.

(4) Positive, 0.1 mm ( , 0.1 mm) ( )

154 Physics Gutka
71. Given the masses of various atomic particles

( )
JEE(MAIN)-2021
m p = 1.0072u, m n = 1.0087u,
1. Two stars of masses m and 2m at a distance d rotate about
m e = 0.000548u, mv = 0, m d = 2.0141u, their common centre of mass in free space. The period of
revolution is :
where p p ro to n, n ne ut r o n , e e l e ct r on ,
m 2m d ]
v antineutrino and d deuteron. Which of the following
%?
process is allowed by momentum and energy conservation?

( p ,n ,e , v ,. ( ) 1 d3 d3
(1) (2) 2
2 3Gm 3Gm
d
) 1 3Gm 3Gm
(3) (4) 2
2 d3 d3
(1) n + p d+
2. A ball will a speed of 9 m/s collides with another identical ball
(2) e+ + e–
at rest. After the collision, the direction of each ball makes an
(3) n + n deuterium atom ( ) angle of 30° with the original direction. The ratio of velocities
of the balls after collision is x : y, where x is ________.
electron bound to the nucleus ( )
9 m/s ;
(4) p n + e+ + v
72. A student measuring the diameter of a pencil of circular EN 30° x:y
cross-section with the help of a vernier scale records the
following four readings 5.50 mm, 5.55 mm, 5.45 mm; 5.65 x ________
mm. The average of these four readings is 5.5375 mm and (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
the standard deviation of the data is 0.07395 mm. The
3. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion
average diameter of the pencil should therefore be recorded
A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
as:
, , , A R
,,
LL
Assertion A : The escape velocities of planet
5.50
A and B are same. But A and B are of unequal mass.
mm, 5.55 mm, 5.45 mm; 5.65 mm
A: A B
5.5375 mm ( ) 0.07395
A B
mm
Reason R : The product of their mass and
(1) (5.5375 ± 0.0739) mm
A

radius must be same, M1R1 = M2R2

(2) (5.538 ± 0.074) mm
R:
(3) (5.54 ± 0.07) mm
M1R1 = M2R2
(4) (5.5375 ± 0.0740) mm
In the light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate
73. The output characteristics of a transistor is shown in the figure.
answer from the options given below :
When VCE is 10 V and 1 C = 4.0 mA, then value of ac
is________ . , , :-
(1) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct
VCE
explanation of A
10 V 1C = 4.0 mA ] ac ________ .
A R R A [;
(IB)
(2) A is correct but R is not correct
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

8 60 µA
50 µA A R
(IC) in mA

6 40 µA (3) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation

30 µA
4 of A
20 µA
2 10 µA A R R A [;
(4) A is not correct but R is correct
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
(VCE) in volts A R
(1) 150 (2) 140 (3) 160 (4) 130
 Physics Gutka 155
4. Find the gravitational force of attraction between the ring and
6. As shown in the figure, a block of mass 3 kg is kept on a
sphere as shown in the diagram, where the plane of the ring

is perpendicular to the line joining the centres. If 8 R is the 1

horizontal rough surface of coefficient of friction . The
3 3
distance between the centres of a ring (of mass 'm') and a
sphere (mass 'M') where both have equal radius 'R'. critical force to be applied on the vertical surface as shown
at an angle 60° with horizontal such that it does not move,
, , 8R 'R' will be 3x. The value of x will be

m R M ; 1
, 3 kg
( )% 3 3
m M [ { { 60°

R , ]
R
] 3x x __________
x – Y
8R
3 1
[g = 10 m/s2; sin 60° = ; cos 60° = ]
2 2
8 GmM 2 2 GMm
(1) (2)
9 R 3 R2
1 –
µ= – m = 3 kg
3 3
1 GMm 8 GmM
(3) (4) 60°
3 8 R2 27 R 2
EN (1) 1.19 (2) 3.33 (3) 4.67 (4) 6.28
5. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion
7. The trajectory of a projectile in a ve rtical plane is
A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
y= x – x 2, where and are constants and x & y are
, , , A R respectively the horizontal and vertical distances of the projectile
Assertion A : Body 'P' having mass M moving with speed from the point of projection. The angle of projection and
'u' has head-on collision elastically with another body 'Q' having the maximum height attained H are respectively given by :
mass 'm' initially at rest. If m << M, body 'Q' will have a maximum ; ;& y = x – x 2, ];
speed equal to '2u' after collision.
LL
x y % ; {
A: 'u' M P } H
m ; 'Q'
; m << M ] 'Q' '2u'
2 2
1 1
(1) tan , (2) tan ,
4 2
Reason R : During elastic collision, the momentum and kinetic
A

energy are both conserved.

2 2
1 4 1
R: (3) tan , (4) tan ,
In the light of the above statements, choose the most appropriate
answer from the options given below : 8. A cord is wound round the circumference of wheel of radius
r. The axis of the wheel is horizontal and the moment of inertia
, , ,%
about it is I. A weight mg is attached to the cord at the end.
(1) A is not correct but R is correct.
The weight falls from rest. After falling through a distance 'h',
A R the square of angular velocity of wheel will be :-
(2) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct r ,
explanation of A.
, { { % I
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

A R R A [;
mg ;
(3) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation
'h' , ;
of A.

A R R A [; 2mgh 2mgh
(1) (2)
(4) A is correct but R is not correct. I 2mr 2 I mr 2

A R
2gh
(3) 2gh (4)
I mr 2
156 Physics Gutka
9. A scooter accelerates from rest for time t1 at constant rate a1
and then retards at constant rate a2 for time t2 and comes to a (ms–1)
t1
rest. The correct value of
t 2 will be :-
; t1 a1 18
(2)
2
t1 0
; t2 a2 200 400 x(m)
t2
a (ms–2)

a1 a 2 a2
(1) (2)
a2 a1 18
(3)
2
a1 a1 a 2 0
(3) (4) 200 400 x(m)
a2 a1 –2
a (ms )
10. Four equal masses, m each are placed at the corners of a
square of length (l) as shown in the figure. The moment of
inertia of the system about an axis passing through A and 18
(4)
parallel to DB would be : 2
] (m) ] (l) 0 200 400 x(m)
( = ) ;
1
12. A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity 10 3 ms along
A DB % EN
D l C X-axis, hits another ball of mass 20 kg which is at rest. After
m m
collision, the first ball comes to rest and the second one
disintegrates into two equal pieces. One of the pieces starts
l l moving along Y-axis at a speed of 10 m/s. The second piece
starts moving at a speed of 20 m/s at an angle (degree)

m m with respect to the X-axis. The configuration of pieces after

l
LL
A B collision is shown in the figure. The value of is _______.
(1) ml 2 (2) 2 ml2
(3) 3 ml2 (4) 3 ml 2
1
10 k g ] 10 3 ms ]
11. The velocity-displacement graph describing the motion of a
bicycle is shown in the figure.
X- ] 20 kg
, ,
A

]
, ] Y-
–1
v (ms ) 10 m/s X-
50
( ) , 20 m/s
=
10
_______
0 200 400 x(m)
(1) 15° (2) 30°

The acceleration-displacement graph of the bicycle's motion (3) 45° (4) 60°
is best described by :
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

After Collision
] Y

a (ms–2) X axis

18
(1)
2
0 200 400 x(m)
 Physics Gutka 157
13. The vernier scale used for measurement has a positive zero 15. Two blocks (m = 0.5 kg and M = 4.5 kg) are arranged on
error of 0.2 mm. If while taking a measurement it was noted a horizontal frictionless table as shown in figure. The coefficient
that '0' on the vernier scale lies between 8.5 cm and 8.6 cm,
3
of static friction between the two blocks is . Then the
7
vernier coincidence is 6, then the correct value of measurement maximum horizontal force that can be applied on the larger
is : (least count = 0.01 cm) block so that the blocks move together is ______ N.
, , ,] 0.2 mm [Take g as 9.8 ms–2 ]

/ = ;] ; (m = 0.5 kg M = 4.5 kg) { ?

; '0', 8.5cm 8.6cm /; ( ) (
6 [ ] _____ cm 3
/; ?
( = 0.01 cm)
7

(1) 8.36 cm { ,
(2) 8.54 cm ______ N ( ) [g = 9.8 ms–2]
(1) 14 (2) 28 (3) 21 (4) 42
(3) 8.58 cm
m
(4) 8.56 cm
M F
14. A ma ss M hangs on a ma ssle ss rod of
16. A boy of mass 4 kg is standing on a piece of wood having
length l which rotates at a constant angular frequency. The
mass 5kg . If the coefficient of friction between the wood and
mass M moves with steady speed in a circular path of constant
the floor is 0.5, the maximum force that the boy can exert
radius. Assume that the system is in steady circular motion with EN on the rope so that the piece of wood does not move from
constant angular velocity w. The angular momentum of M its place is ________N. [Take g = 10 ms–2 ]
about point A is LA which lies in the positive z direction and
4 kg ], 5kg [
the angular momentum of M about B is L B . The correct
? 0.5 ] }
statement for this system is :
, ] ________N.
M l + ,
[ g = 10 ms–2]
; ? ] M
LL
(1) 30 (2) 45 (3) 15 (4) 60
; ; ,
T
; ] A ;
• •
°
=0

LA / z B ; • R
T
LB ; ,
•
A

z T

l 17. A steel block of 10 kg rests on a horizontal floor as shown.

When three iron cylinders are placed on it as shown, the block
and cylinders go down with an acceleration 0.2 m/s2 . The
A M normal reaction R' by the floor if mass of the iron cylinders
r
are equal and of 20 kg each, is___N.
[Take g = 10 m/s2 and µs = 0.2]
(1) LA and LB are both constant in magnitude and direction , { 10 kg
LA LB ,
(2) LB is constant in direction with varying magnitude
] 0.2 m/s2 ;
20 kg }
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

LB ,]
R' [g = 10 m/s2 µs = 0.2 ,]
(3) LB is constant, both in magnitude and direction
3
LB ] ,
1 2
(4) LA is constant, both in magnitude and direction

LA ] ,
2
a = 0.2 m/s
(1) 716 (2) 686 (3) 714 (4) 684
158 Physics Gutka
18. In a spring gun having spring constant 100 N/m a small ball ˆi ˆj, B ˆj kˆ
P, Q R % A
'B' of mass 100 g is put in its barrel (as shown in figure) by
C ˆi ˆj ;
compressing the spring through 0.05 m. There should be a

box placed at a distance 'd' on the ground so that the ball P

falls in it. If the ball leaves the gun horizontally at a height of
A B Q
2 m above the ground. The value of d is : (g = 10 m/s2 )
(A C) P Q
100 N/m 100 g
1
'B' ( ,) 0.05 m cos–1 x ________.
x
/ d , ;
(1) 3 (2) 2
; / 2m { %
(3) 4 (4) 6
'd' _________ m 21. A particle of mass 'm' is moving in time 't' on a trajectory given
Gun by

ball 'm' ; 't'

2m r 10 t 2 ˆi 5 (t 5)ˆj

(1) 0.5
(3) 2
(2) 1
(4) 0.25
EN Where a and b are dimensional constants.

a b ;
The angular momentum of the particle becomes the same as
19. A body of mass 'm' is launched up on a rough inclined plane
it was for t = 0 at time t = ______seconds.
making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient
; t=0 ;
x
of friction between the body and plane is if the time of
LL
5 t = ______

ascent is half of the time of descent. The value of x is _____. (1) 5 s (2) 10 s

(3) 20 s (4) 30 s
'm' { 30° :{
22. Three objects A, B and C are kept in a straight line on a
([ ) ;
frictionless horizontal surface. The masses of A, B and C are
; ; ] ?
A

m, 2 m and 2 m respectively. A moves towards B with a speed

x of 9 m/s and makes an elastic collision with it. Thereafter B

x __________
5 makes a completely inelastic collision with C. All motions occur
along same straight line. The final speed of C is :
(1) 1 (2) 2
? { A, B C
(3) 3 (4) 5
20. Three particles P, Q and R are moving along the vectors
, A, B C % m, 2 m 2m ]A

ˆi ˆj, B ˆj kˆ and C ˆi ˆj respectively. They strike B 9 m/s ,

A
B C ,
on a point and start to move in different directions. Now particle
C
P is moving normal to the plane which contains vector A and
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

B . Similarly particle Q is moving normal to the plane which

contains vector A and C . The angle between the direction A B C

m 2m 2m
1
of motion of P and Q is cos –1 . Then the value of x
x (1) 6 m/s (2) 9 m/s

is________. (3) 4 m/s (4) 3 m/s

 Physics Gutka 159
23. Assertion A : If A, B, C, D are four points on a semi-circular 25. A ball of mass 4 kg, moving with a velocity of 10 ms –1, collides
arc with centre at 'O' such that with a spring of length 8 m and force constant 100 Nm–1. The
length of the compressed spring is x m. The value of x, to the
A: A, B, C, D ( 'O')
nearest integer, is_____.
10 ms–1 4 kg 8m

AB BC CD , then 100 Nm–1 xm x

_____

AB AC AD 4AO OB OC (1) 8 m (2) 6 m

(3) 4 m (4) 2 m
Reason R : Polygon law of vector addition yields
26. Two bodies, a ring and a solid cylinder of same material are
R:
rolling down without slipping an inclined plane. The radii of
AB BC CD AD 2AO the bodies are same. The ratio of velocity of the centre of mass
at the bottom of the inclined plane of the ring to that of the
x
O cylinder is . Then, the value of x is _____.
A D 2

B C ], ; ,
<+
In the light of the above statements, choose the most x
; x
appropriate answer from the options given below : 2
_________
] , , EN ,
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
(1) A is correct but R is not correct.
27. A particle is moving with uniform speed along the
A R
circumference of a circle of radius R under the action of a
(2) A is not correct but R is correct. central fictitious force F which is inversely proportional to R3.
Its time period of revolution will be given by :
A R
R ; F,
(3) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation R3 ]
LL

of A. :

A R R, A [; 3
(1) T R2 (2) T R2
(4) Both A and R are correct but R is not the correct
explanation of A. 5 4
(3) T R2 (4) T R3
A

A R R, A [;
28. A uniform me ta llic w ire is e longated by
24. In the given figure, two wheels P and Q are connected by a 0.04 m when subjected to a linear force F. The elongation,
belt B. The radius of P is three times as that of Q. In case of if its length and diameter is doubled and subjected to the same
same rotational kinetic energy, the ratio of rotational inertias force will be _____ cm.

I1 F / , 0.04 m
will be x : 1. The value of x will be _____. ; ,
I2
_____ cm
, , ,P Q ( )} P (1) 8 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 2
Q ? 29. The normal density of a material is and its bulk modulus of
elasticity is K. The magnitude of increase in density of material,
when a pressure P is applied uniformly on all sides, will be :
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

I1
I2 = x : 1 x _____ ;? K
, P ?
%

P Q K P
R (1) (2)
3R P K
B
K PK
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 9 (3) (4)
P
160 Physics Gutka
30. The pressure acting on a submarine is 3 × 105 Pa at a certain = ,
depth. If the depth is doubled, the percentage increase in the
pressure acting on the submarine would be : (Assume that
{ 0.4 m2 ]B
atmospheric pressure is 1 × 10 5 Pa density of water is { 1 cm2 , 24
103 kg m–3, g = 10 ms–2 ) ] 40 cm
3 × 105 Pa ; B v ms–1 v
, [g 10 ms–2 ]
( ; 1 × 10 5 Pa, ?
103 kg m–3 g = 10 ms–2 )
24kg
A
200 200
(1) % (2) %
3 5

5 3
(3) % (4) %
200 200
B
31. What will be the nature of flow of water from a circular tap,
when its flow rate increased from 0.18 L/min to 0.48 L/min?
(1) 8 (2) 5 (3) 3 (4) 1
The radius of the tap and viscosity of water are 0.5 cm and
34. Two wires of same length and radius are joined end to end
10–3 Pa s, respectively.(Density of water : 103 kg/m3 )
and loaded. The Young's modulii of the materials of the two
0.18 L/min 0.48 L/min wires are Y1 and Y2. The combination behaves as a single
EN wire then its Young's modulus is :

% 0.5 cm 10–3 Pa s % ,
( ? = 103 kg/m3)
; Y1 Y2 ;
] ; %
(1) Unsteady to steady flow )
(2) Remains steady flow ) 2Y1Y2 2Y1Y2
(1) Y (2) Y
(3) Remains turbulent flow ) 3(Y1 Y2 ) Y1 Y2
(4) Steady flow to unsteady flow
LL

) Y1Y2 Y1Y2
(3) Y (4) Y
2(Y1 Y2 ) Y1 Y2
32. An object is located at 2 km beneath the surface of the water.

V 35. A light cylindrical vessel is kept on a horizontal surface. Area

If the fractional compression is 1.36% , the ratio of
V of base is A. A hole of cross-sectional area 'a' is made just at
hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain will be its bottom side. The minimum coefficient of friction necessary
A

___________ . to prevent sliding the vessel due to the impact force of the
emerging liquid is (a < < A) :
[Given : density of water is 1000 kg m–3 and g = 9.8 ms–2.]
, {
V
2 km ; A , 'a' {
V ? ,
1.36% ]
} , (a < < A) :
% ____( ? = 1000 kg m–3 g = 9.8 ms–2)
A
(1) 1.96 × 107 Nm–2
(2) 1.44 × 10 7 Nm –2
(3) 2.26 × 10 9 Nm –2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(4) 1.44 × 10 9 Nm –2
33. Consider a water tank as shown in the figure. It's cross-sectional a
area is 0.4 m 2. The tank has an opening B near the bottom
whose cross-section area is 1 cm2. A load of 24 kg is applied
on the water at the top when the height of the water level is
A
40 cm above the bottom, the velocity of water coming out the (1) (2) None of these
2a
opening B is v ms–1. The value of v, is___.
[Take value of g to be 10 ms–2 ]
2a a
(3) (4)
A A
 Physics Gutka 161
36. A raindrop with radius R = 0.2 mm falls from a cloud at a C A : Isochoric change leading to change
height h = 2000 m above the ground. Assume that the drop of pressure from P2 to P1 .

is spherical throughout its fall and the force of buoyance may C A : P2

be neglected, then the terminal speed attained by the raindrop P1
is : [Density of water fw = 1000 kg m–3 and Density of air Total workdone in the complete cycle ABCA is :
fa = 1.2 kg m–3 , g = 10 m/s2
; ABCA :
Coefficient of viscosity of air = 1.8 × 10–5 Nsm–2 ] P
P1 A
R = 0.2 mm / h = 2000
m .; ;
P2 B
, ; ; ] } C

% V
V1 V 2=2V1
[ ? fw = 1000 kg m-3
1
(1) 0 (2) nRT ln 2
? fa = 1.2 kg m-3, g = 10 m/s2 2

= 1.8 × 10-5 Nsm-2] 1

(3) nRTln2 (4) nRT ln 2
2
(1) 250.6 ms –1 (2) 43.56 ms –1
40. Each side of a box made of metal sheet in cubic shape is 'a'
(3) 4.94 ms–1 (4) 14.4 ms–1 at room temperature 'T', the coefficient of linear expansion

37. The water is filled upto height of 12 m in a tank having vertical of the metal sheet is ' '. The metal sheet is heated uniformly,
sidewalls. A hole is made in one of the walls at a depth 'h' below by a small temperature T, so that its new temperature is
the water level. The value of 'h' for which the emerging stream
of water strikes the ground at the maximum range is ___ m:-

12 m
EN T + T. Calculate the increase in the volume of the metal box.

T
?
'a' ] /
,

'h' , 'h' , ' ' / , : T ,

/ ___ m :- T+ T /
(1) 8 (2) 6 %
LL

(3) 4 (4) 2 (1) 3a 3 T (2) 4a 3 T

38 The length of a metal wire is 1, when the tension in it is T1 4

(3) 4pa 3 T (4) pa 3 T
3
and is 2 when the tension is T2. The natural length of the
41. Match List-I with List-II :
wire is :
List-I List-II
A

, 1 T1 2 (a) Isothermal (i) Pressure constant

T2 (b) Isochoric (ii) Temperature constant
(c) Adiabatic (iii) Volume constant
T – 2 T1
1 2 (d) Isobaric (iv) Heat content is constant
(1) (2)
1 2 T2 – T1 Choose the correct answer from the options given below :
T
1 2 2 1 T 1 2
-I -II ,:
(3) (4)
T2 T1 2 -I -II
39. n mole a perfect gas undergoes a cyclic process ABCA (see
figure) consisting of the following processes. (a) ; (i)

n ; ABCA ( ,) (b) (ii)

, , (c) (iii)
A B : Isothermal expansion at temperature
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(d) (iv)
T so that the volume is doubled from
V1 to V2 = 2V1 and pressure changes , , ,:
from P1 to P2.
A B: T ; ] (1) (a) (i), (b) (iii), (c) (ii), (d) (iv)

V1 V2 = 2V1 P1 P2 (2) (a) (ii), (b) (iii), (c) (iv), (d) (i)
B C : Isobaric compression at pressure P2
to initial volume V1 . (3) (a) (ii), (b) (iv), (c) (iii), (d) (i)
B C : P2
(4) (a) (iii), (b) (ii), (c) (i), (d) (iv)
V1
162 Physics Gutka
46. The internal energy (U), pressure (P) and volume (V) of an
7 5
42. A diatomic gas, having C p R and Cv R , is heated ideal gas are related as U = 3PV + 4. The gas is :-
2 2
at constant pressure. The ratio dU : dQ : dW :
, (U), (P) (V)

U = 3PV + 4 : ; :-
7 5
] Cp R Cv R ]
2 2 (1) Diatomic only ( )
dU : dQ : dW % (2) Polyatomic only )
(1) 5 : 7 : 3 (2) 5 : 7 : 2
(3) Either monoatomic or diatomic
(3) 3 : 7 : 2 (4) 3 : 5 : 2
43. In a certain thermodynamical process, the pressure of a gas (; , )
depends on its volume as kV3 . The work done when the
temperature changes from 100°C to 300°C will be ___ nR, (4) Monoatomic only , )
where n denotes number of moles of a gas.
47. 1 mole of rigid diatomic gas performs a work of Q/5 when
; kV3 heat Q is supplied to it. The molar heat capacity of the gas
100°C 300°C ,
xR
___ nR, n, [; during this transformation is , The value of x is ...........
8
(1) 40 (2) 50 [K = universal gas constant]
(3) 30 (4) 20
<+ 1 Q ,
44. Thermodynamic process is shown below on a P-V diagram
Q/5 :
for one mole of an ideal gas. If V2 = 2V1 then the ratio of
temperature T2 /T1 is :

,
EN
P-V
xR
8
x ........... [K = ]

; V2 = 2V1 ] T2/T1 :
(1) 15 (2) 20
P
1(P1,V1,T1)
1/2 (3) 25 (4) 10
PV = constant
LL
48. Calculate the value of mean free path ( ) for oxygen molecules
2(P2,V2,T2)
at temperature 27°C and pressure 1.01 × 105 Pa. Assume
V the molecular diameter 0.3 nm and the gas is ideal.
V1 V2
27°C 1.01 × 105 Pa , ;
1
(1) (2) 2
2 ( ) ; ,
A

0.3 nm (k = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1)

1
(3) 2 (4)
2 (1) 58 nm (2) 32 nm

45. The temperature at the junction of two insulating sheets, (3) 86 nm (4) 102 nm

having thermal resistances R1 and R2 as well as top and bottom 49. A polyatomic ideal gas has 24 vibrational modes. What is the
temperatures 1 and 2 (as shown in figure) is given by : value of ?

, ] ; 24 %&
R1 R2 1 2 ] (1) 1.03 (2) 1.30

: (3) 1.37 (4) 10.3

2 50. A Carnot's engine working between 400 K and 800 K has

R2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

a work output of 1200 J per cycle. The amount of heat energy

R1 supplied to the engine from the source in each cycle is :
1
400 K 800 K /; ]
2 R2 1R 1 1R2 2 R1 1200 J ;
(1) (2)
R 2 R1 R 2 R1
:

(1) 3200 J (2) 1800 J

1R 2 2 R1 1 R1 2 R2
(3) (4) (3) 1600 J (4) 2400 J
R1 R 2 R1 R 2
 Physics Gutka 163
51. Two i de al polya tomi c ga se s at t em pe ra ture s 54. The P-V diagram of a diatomic ideal gas system going under
T1 and T2 are mixed so that there is no loss of energy. If F1 cyclic process as shown in figure. The work done during an
and F2, m1 and m 2, n1 and n2 be the degrees of freedom, adiabatic process CD is (use = 1.4) :
masses, number of molecules of the first and second gas
respectively, the temperature of mixture of these two gases
; P-V =
is : : CD ( = 1.4

] T1 T2 ] ,) :

] ; F1 F2,
m1 m2, n1 n2 % ; ,] ; ]
2 0 0 N /m 2 A D
[; ]
: 1 0 0 N /m 2 B C

n1T1 n 2 T2 n1 F1 T1 n 2 F2 T2 P
(1) (2)
n1 n 2 n1 F1 n 2 F2

n1 F1 T1 n 2 F2 T2 n1 F1 T1 n 2 F2 T2 1 3 4
(3) (4)
F1 F2 n1 n 2 3
V (m )
(1) –500 J (2) –400 J
52. If one mole of the polyatomic gas is having two vibrational
modes and is the ratio of molar specific heats for polyatomic (3) 400 J (4) 200 J
55. What will be the average value of energy along one degree
CP of freedom for an ideal gas in thermal equilibrium at a
gas then the value of is :
CV temperature T ? (kB is Boltzmann constant)

,
,
CP
EN ]
T ;
? (kB-
,,
)
; ]

CV 1 2
(1) k BT (2) k BT
: 2 3

(1) 1.02 (2) 1.2 (3) 1.25 (4) 1.35

3
53. Which one is the correct option for the t wo diffe rent (3) k BT (4) kB T
2
LL
thermodynamic processes ?
, , ? 56. Consider a sample of oxygen behaving like an ideal gas. At
300 K, the ratio of root mean square (rms) velocity to the
adiabatic (: ) average velocity of gas molecule would be : (Molecular weight
P of oxygen is 32 g/mol; R = 8.3 J K–1 mol–1 )
isothermal ;)
(a) ,
A

V 300 K , ;
isothermal ;) :

( 32 g/mol; R = 8.3 J K–1 mol–1 )

P
(b) 3 8
adiabatic (: ) (1) (2)
3 3
T

3 8
V isothermal ;) (3) (4)
8 3
adiabatic (: )
(c) 57. The amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of 4 moles
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

of a rigid diatomic gas from 0°C to 50°C when no work is

T
done is _______. (R is the universal gas constant)
isothermal ;)
<+ 4 0°C 50°C
P , ] ]
(d) adiabatic(: (R - )
)
(1) 250 R (2) 750 R
T
(3) 175 R (4) 500 R
(1) (c) and (a) (2) (c) and (d)
(3) (a) only (4) (b) and (c)
164 Physics Gutka
58. The correct relation between the degrees of freedom ƒ and 62. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1 is enclosed
the ratio of specific heat is : in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The gas is allowed
to expand adiabatically to a temperature T2 by releasing the
; ƒ %
piston suddenly. If l1 and l2 are the lengths of the gas column,
2 2 before and after the expansion respectively, then the value
(1) ƒ (2) ƒ
1 1
T1
of
T2 will be :
1 1
(3) ƒ (4) ƒ
2 1 , T1 ?
;
59. One mole of an ideal gas at 27°C is taken from A to B as
shown in the given PV indicator diagram. The work done by % T2 ;
the system will be
T1
[Given : R = 8.3 J / mole K, ln2 = 0.6931] % l1 l2 ] T2
(Round off to the nearest integer)
, , PV , 27°C 2 2

1 A B ;} l1 3
l2 3
(1) (2)
l2 l1

[ : R = 8.3 J / mole K, ln2 = 0.6931] )

l2 l1
(3) (4)
l1 l2
EN 63. Two different metal bodies A and B of equal mass are heated
at a uniform rate under similar conditions. The variation of
200 A(P1V1)
temperature of the bodies is graphically represented as shown
P(N/m ) 2 in the figure. The ratio of specific heat capacities is :

100 B(P2V2)
/ A B

,
} /
LL

2 4 :
V(m3)

150
(1) 17258 × 10 –1 J (2) 17258 × 10 –2 J A
120
Temp B
(3) 17258 × 10 –3 J (4) 17258 × 10 –4 J T(°C) 90
A

60. What will be the average value of energy for a monoatomic 60

gas in thermal equilibrium at temperature T ? 30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
T ; ; , Time t(s)

8 3
(1) (2)
3 8
2
(1) kBT (2) k B T
3 3 4
(3) (4)
4 3
3 1
(3) kBT (4) kBT 1
2 2 64. A heat engine has an efficiency of . When the temperature
6
61. For a gas CP – CV = R in a state P and CP – CV = 1.10 R
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

of sink is reduced by 62°C, its efficiency get doubled. The

in a state Q, TP and TQ are the temperatures in two different
temperature of the source is :
states P and Q respectively. Then
1
, P CP – CV = R Q ( 62°C
6
CP – CV = 1.10 R ]; TP TQ %
P Q % ]
(1) 124°C (2) 37°C
(1) TP = TQ (2) TP < TQ
(3) 62°C (4) 99°C
(3) TP = 0.9 TQ (4) TP > TQ
 Physics Gutka 165
65. The number of molecules in one litre of an ideal gas at 68. Two Carnot engines A and B operate in series such that engine
300 K and 2 atmospheric pressure with mean kinetic energy A absorbs heat at T1 and rejects heat to a sink at temperature
2 × 10–9 J per molecules is : T. Engine B absorbs half of the heat rejected by Engine A and
rejects heat to the sink at T3. When workdone in both the cases
300 K 2 ; is equal, than value of T is :
2 × 10–9 J , , [; A B A
T1 T
(1) 0.75 × 10 11 (2) 3 × 1011 B A

(3) 1.5 × 1011 (4) 6 × 1011 T3

66. In the reported figure, there is a cyclic process ABCDA on

] T

a sample of 1 mol of a diatomic gas. The temperature of the 2 3 1 2

gas during the process A B and C D are T 1 and (1) T1 T3 (2) T1 T3
3 2 3 3
T2 (T1 > T2) respectively.

1 mol ; ABCDA = 3 1 2 1
(3) T1 T3 (4) T1 T3
2 3 3 3
A B C D % T1
69. Two cars are approaching each other at an equal speed of
T2 (T1 > T2)
7.2 km/hr. When they see each other, both blow horns having
frequency of 676 Hz. The beat frequency heard by each driver
P will be [Velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s.]
A
5P0 7.2 km/hr ,
B , ] 676 Hz
EN } _____ Hz

[ / 340 m/s ]
(1) 6 Hz (2) 8 Hz

P0 C (3) 2 Hz (4) 12 Hz
D
70. A student is performing the experiment of resonance column.
V The diameter of the column tube is 6 cm. The frequency of
O V0 1.5V0 3.5V0 5.5V0
the tuning fork is 504 Hz. Speed of the sound at the given
temperature is 336 m/s. The zero of the meter scale coincides
LL
Choose the correct option out of the following for work done
with the top end of the resonance column tube. The reading
if processes BC and DA are adiabatic.
of the water level in the column when the first resonance occurs
, , , ; is:
BC DA = 6 cm
(1) WAB = WDC (2) WAD = WBC = 504 Hz , , /
A

(3) WBC + WDA > 0 (4) WAB < WCD 336 m/s ;
67. One mole of an ideal gas is taken through an adiabatic process ; ;
where the temperature rises from 27°C to 37°C. If the ideal %
gas is composed of polyatomic molecule that has 4 vibrational
(1) 13 cm (2) 16.6 cm
modes, which of the following is true?
(3) 18.4 cm (4) 14.8 cm
, : 27°C 71. Y = A sin( t + 0) is the time-displacement equation of a SHM.
37°C ; ; , A
At t = 0 the displacement of the particle is Y = and it is
4 2
moving along negative x-direction. Then the initial phase angle
[R = 8.314 J mol–1 k–1 ]
0 will be :
(1) work done by the gas is close to 332 J ;&
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

} 332 J )
A
(2) work done on the gas is close to 582 J Y = A sin( t + 0) ;t=0 Y=
2
582 J )
; x- 0 :
(3) work done by the gas is close to 582 J

} 582 J ) (1) (2)

6 3
(4) work done on the gas is close to 332 J
5 2
(3) (4)
332 J ) 6 3
166 Physics Gutka
72. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe 75. An object of mass 0.5 kg is executing simple harmonic motion.
contain gases of densities and respectively. The It amplitude is 5 cm and time period (T) is 0.2 s. What will
1 2

compressibility of gases are equal in both the pipes. Both the T

be the potential energy of the object at an instant t s
pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with same frequency. 4
The length of the open pipe is (Round off to the Nearest Integer) starting from mean position. Assume that the initial phase of
the oscillation is zero.
L [ %
0.5 kg
1 2
T
5 cm (T) 0.2 s { t s
4
[ ________ ( ; ,)
)
(1) 0.62 J (2) 6.2 × 10–3 J
(3) 1.2 × 103 J (4) 6.2 × 103 J
L L
(1)
1
(2)
1 76. An infinite number of point charges, each carrying 1 µC
3 4
2 2
charge, are placed along the y-axis at y = 1 m, 2 m, 4 m,
8 m.................. The total force on a 1 C point charge placed
at the origin is
2L 1 4L 1
(3) (4) ] 1 µC ] y-
3 2 3 2

y = 1 m, 2 m, 4 m, 8 m..................
73. The amplitude of wave disturbance propagating in the positive 1C _____

1 1
x- direction i s given by y a t time t = 0 a nd [Take = 9 × 109 Nm2 /C2 ]
(1 x)2

y
1
at t = 1s, where x and y are in meres. The
EN (1) 12 × 10 3 N
(3) 8 ×
4

103
0

N
(2) 6 × 103 N
(4) 5 × 103 N
1 (x 2)2 77. Given below are two statements :
shape of wave does not change during the propagation. The , , :
velocity of the wave will be Statement I : An electric dipole is placed at the centre of a
hollow sphere. The flux of electric field through the sphere is
LL
x- ;t=0
zero but the electric field is not zero anywhere in the sphere.
1 1 I: }/ [
y } t = 1s y } ]
(1 x)2 1 (x 2)2 {= ;
{= ;
x y ; Statement II : If R is the radius of a solid metallic sphere and
Q be the total charge on it. The electric field at any point on
A

_________m/s
the spherical surface of radius r (< R) is zero but the electric
(1) 3 m/s (2) 2 m/s (3) 4 m/s (4) 6 m/s
flux passing through this closed spherical surface of radius r
74. In the reported figure, two bodies A and B of masses 200 g is not zero.
and 800 g are attached with the system of springs. Springs II : / R
are kept in a stretched position with some extension when Q ] r (< R) ;
the system is released. The horizontal surface is assumed to = ; ] r ;
be frictionless. The angular frequency will be ___ rad/s when ;
k = 20 N/m. In the light of the above statements, choose the correct answer
, , 200 g 800 g A B from the options given below :
, , ,
; ; ;
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

{ ? k = 20
( I II )
N/m ; ________ rad/s
(2) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
( I II )
k 4k
(3) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
A B
S1 S2 ( I II )
(4) Statement I is false but Statement II is true.
(1) 10 (2) 8 ( I II )

(3) 12 (4) 16
 Physics Gutka 167
78. A current of 5 A is passing through a non-linear magnesium 81. A parallel plate capacitor with plate area 'A' and distance of
wire of cross-section 0.04 m2. At every point the direction of separation 'd' is filled with a dielectric. What is the capacity
current density is at an angle of 60° with the unit vector of of the capacitor when permittivity of the dielectric varies as:
area of cross-section. The magnitude of electric field at every =] { 'A'

point of the conductor is :

'd' = /
(Resistivity of magnesium = 44 × 10–8 m)
, %
0.04 m2 { 5A
d
(x) 0 kx, for 0 x
/ / ? 2

, 60° d
(x) 0 k(d x), for x d
2
{
2/kA
= 44 × 10–8 m) kd kA
(1) 0 (2)
2 2 0 kd
(1) 11 × 10 –2 V/m (2) 11 × 10 –7 V/m 2 ln
2 0
(3) 11 × 10 –5 V/m (4) 11 × 10 –3 V/m
79. A Copper (Cu) rod of length 25 cm and cross-sectional area kA 2 0
(3) 0 (4) ln
3 mm2 is joined with a similar Aluminium (Al) rod as shown 2 2 0 kd

in figure. Find the resistance of the combination between the 82. In the given figure, there is a circuit of potentiometer of length
ends A and B. AB = 10 m. The resistance per unit length is 0.1 per cm.
(Take Resistivity of Copper = 1.7 × 10–8 Wm Resistivity of Across AB, a battery of emf E and internal resistance 'r' is
Aluminium = 2.6 × 10–8

,
(Cu) +
25 cm
m)

,
{
EN
(Al)
3 mm2

+
connected. The maximum value of emf measured by this
potentiometer is :

AB

A B 10 m , 0.1 /cm AB

emf E 'r'

emf
LL
= 1.7 × 10–8 m ,
E r
= 2.6 × 10–8 m ,) + –
G
Cu
A B A B
550 cm J
Al 450cm
A

(1) 2.170 m (2) 1.420 m

+ –
(3) 0.0858 m (4) 0.858 m
6V 20 K
80. An electric dipole is placed on x-axis in proximity to a line
(1) 5 V (2) 2.25 V
charge of linear charge density 3.0 × 10–6 C/m. Line charge
(3) 6 V (4) 2.75 V
is placed on z-axis and positive and negative charge of dipole
83. If qf is the free charge on the capacitor plates and qb is the
is at a distance of 10 mm and 12 mm from the origin
bound charge on the dielectric slab of dielectric constant k
respectively. If total force of 4 N is exerted on the dipole, find
placed between the capacitor plates, then bound charge qb
out the amount of positive or negative charge of the dipole.
can be expressed as :
}/ ?
= qf
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

3.0 × 10–6 C/m { x-

k qb ]
z- }/ /
qb %
% 10 mm 12 mm ; }/
1 1
4N ] }/ / ,& (1) qb = qf 1 (2) qb = qf 1
k k
(1) 815.1 nC (2) 8.8 µC 1 1
(3) qb = qf 1 (4) qb = qf 1
(3) 0.485 mC (4) 4.44 µC k k
168 Physics Gutka
84. The given potentiometer has its wire of resistance 10 . When 87. A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 500 MHz is
travelling in vacuum along y-direction. At a particular point
the sliding contact is in the middle of the potentiometer wire,
the potential drop across 2 resistor is : in space and time, B 8.0 10 8 zT
ˆ . The value of electric field

, , 10 at this point is : (speed of light = 3 × 108 ms–1 )

/; ] 2 ˆ y,
x, ˆ zˆ are unit vectors along x, y and z direction.

500 MHz ; ] y-
20V
]B

A B 8.0 10 8 zT
ˆ {=
2
( = 3 × 108 ms–1)
(1) 10 V (2) 5 V
ˆ y,
x, ˆ zˆ % x, y, z ,
40 40
(3) V (4) V (1) 24 xˆ V / m (2) 2.6 xˆ V / m
9 11

R=100 (3) 24 xˆ V / m (4) 2.6 yˆ V / m

88. A conducting bar of length L is free to slide on two parallel

85. 100 V C=1 F conducting rails as shown in the figure

L ]+
A capacitor of capacitance C=1 F is suddenly connected to
EN , =
a battery of 100 volt through a resistance R = 100 . The
time taken for the capacitor to be charged to get 50 V is :
[Take in ln2 = 0.69]
v
C=1 F = , R = 100 R1 R2
B
100 volt ; = 50 V
[ln2 = 0.69 ,]
LL

(1) 1.44 × 10–4 s (2) 3.33 × 10–4 s

(3) 0.69 × 10–4 s (4) 0.30 × 10–4 s Two resistors R1 and R2 are connected across the ends of the
rails. There is a uniform magnetic field B pointing into the
3 ˆ 4 ˆ N page. An external agent pulls the bar to the left at a constant
86. The electric field in a region is given E E0 i E0 j .
5 5 C speed v.
A

The ratio of flux of reported field through the rectangular The correct statement about the directions of induced currents
I1 and I2 flowing through R1 and R2 respectively is :
surface of area 0.2 m2 (parallel to y – z plane) to that of the
surface of area 0.3 m2 (parallel to x – z plane) is R1 R2 ; ,

[Here ˆi, ˆj and k̂ are unit vectors along x, y and z-axes ;{= B
respectively] + , v [
R1 R2 % I1 I2
3 ˆ 4 ˆ N
{= {= &E E0 i E0 j
5 5 C
(1) Both I1 and I2 are in anticlockwise direction
0.2 m2 (y–z ) 0.3 m2
(I1 I2 )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(x–z ) , {=
(2) Both I1 and I 2 are in clockwise direction
_____
(I1 I2
[ ˆi, ˆj k̂ % x, y z- , ]
(3) I 1 is in clockwise direction and I 2 is in anticlockwise
direction (I1 I2 )
1 2
(1) (2)
2 3 (4) I 1 is in anticlockwise direction and I 2 is in clockwise
direction (I1 I2 )
3 2
(3) (4)
4 5
 Physics Gutka 169
89. Match List-I with List-II ( -I -II ) (D) Magnetic field lines inside a bar magnet are not parallel.
List-I -I) List-II -II) ( + ;{= )
(E) = – 1 is the condition for a perfect diamagnetic material,
(a ) Phase difference (i) ; current leads
2 where is its magnetic susceptibility.
between current and voltage
voltage in a purely
( ; ,] =–1 ] ;
resistive AC circuit )
Choose the correct answer from the options given below :
;
2 , , , %)
AC /
(1) (C) and (E) only [ (C) (E)]
(2) (B) and (D) only [ (B) (D)]
(b) Phase difference (ii) zero ( ;) (3) (A) and (B) only [ (A) (B)]
between current and
voltage in a pure (4) (B) and (C) only [ (B) (C)]
inductive AC circuit 91. Figure shows a circuit that contains four identical resistors with
resistance R = 2.0 , two identical inductors with inductance
AC / L = 2.0 mH and an ideal battery with emf E = 9 V. The current
'i' just after the switch 'S' is closed will be :
, ] ] R = 2.0 ]
(c) Phase difference (iii) ; current lags voltage
L = 2.0 mH emf , E = 9 V ,
2 'S' / i :
between current and
voltage in a pure
capacitive AC circuit S
A L R
/ ; +
R
2
AC /
EN E=9V –
i

R L

XC – X L R
(d) Phase difference (iv) tan–1 (1) 2.25 A (2) 3.0 A
R
between current and (3) 3.37 A (4) 9 A
voltage in an LCR 92. Magnetic fields at two points on the axis of a circular coil at
series circuit a distance of 0.05m and 0.2 m from the centre are in the
LL
LCR ratio 8 : 1. The radius of coil is ____.
/ 0.05m 0.2 m
;{ 8:1
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given %
below : , , ) (1) 0.2 m (2) 0.1 m
(1) (a)–(i),(b)–(iii),(c)–(iv),(d)–(ii) (3) 0.15 m (4) 1.0 m
A

93. An aeroplane, with its wings spread 10 m, is flying at a speed

(2) (a)–(ii),(b)–(iv),(c)–(iii),(d)–(i) of 180 km/h in a horizontal direction. The total intensity of
earth's field at that part is 2.5 × 10–4 Wb/m2 and the angle
(3) (a)–(ii),(b)–(iii),(c)–(iv),(d)–(i)
of dip is 60°. The emf induced between the tips of the plane
(4) (a)–(ii),(b)–(iii),(c)–(i),(d)–(iv) wings will be :-
90. Which of the following statements are correct? 10 m { 180 km/h +
;{= 2.5 × 10–4 Wb/
m2 60°
(A) Electric monopoles do not exist whereas magnetic
monopoles exist. (emf) :-
(1) 108.25 mV (2) 54.125 mV
( ;, ;, (3) 88.37 mV (4) 62.50 mV
) 94. Find the peak current and resonant frequency of the following
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

(B) Magnetic field lines due to a solenoid at its ends and circuit (as shown in figure).
outside cannot be completely straight and confined. , , / %
( ] ] ;{=
100 mH 100 µF
)
~ V = 30 sin 100t
(C) Magnetic field lines are completely confined within a
toroid.
120
( (toroid) ;{= (1) 0.2 A and 50 Hz (2) 0.2 A and 100 Hz
) (3) 2 A and 100 Hz (4) 2A and 50 Hz
170 Physics Gutka
95. In a ferromagnetic material, below the curie temperature, a (1) A-Flux, B-Power dissipated, C-EMF
domain is defined as : (A- , B- ;] C-EMF)
(2) A-Power dissipated, B-Flux, C-EMF
; :
(A- ;, B- , C-EMF)
:
(3) A-Flux, B-EMF, C-Power dissipated
(1) a macroscopic region with zero magnetization. (A- , B-EMF, C- ;)
( ; {=) (4) A-EMF, B-Power dissipated, C-Flux

(2) a macroscopic region with consecutive magnetic dipoles

(A-EMF, B- ;, C- )
98. In an LCR series circuit, an inductor 30 mH and a resistor
oriented in opposite direction.
1 are connected to an AC source of angular frequency
( ; 300 rad/s. The value of capacitance for which, the current
}/ {=) leads the voltage by 45° is
LCR 30 mH 1
(3) a macroscopic region with randomly oriented magnetic
dipoles. 300 rad/s ; AC /
,/ 45° ___________
( ; }/ { =)
(1) 1 × 10–3 F (2) 0.5 × 10–3 F
(4) a macroscopic region with saturation magnetization. (3) 0.33 × 10 –3 F (4) 0.25 × 10 –3 F
99. For a series LCR circuit with R = 100 , L = 0.5 mH and
( { =)
C = 0.1 pF connected across 220 V–50 Hz AC supply, the
96. AC voltage V(t) = 20 sin t of frequency 50 Hz is applied to phase angle between current and supplied voltage and the
a parallel plate capacitor. The separation between the plates nature of the circuit is :
is 2 mm and the area is 1 m2. The amplitude of the oscillating R = 100 , L = 0.5 mH C = 0.1 pF LCR ]
displacement current for the applied AC voltage is _______. EN 220 V-50 Hz AC ]
[Take 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 F/m]

= 50 Hz AC (1) 0°, resistive circuit (0°, )

V(t) = 20 sin t 2 mm (2) 90°, predominantly inductive circuit
{ 1 m2 AC , / ( 90°, [; % )

_______. [ = 8.85 × 10–12 F/m ] (3) 0°, resonance circuit (0°, )

0
(4) 90°, predominantly capacitive circuit
(1) 21.14 µA (2) 83.37 µA
( 90°, [; % / )
LL
(3) 27.79 µA (4) 55.58 µA 100. The time taken for the magnetic energy to reach 25% of its
97. The arm PQ of a rectangular conductor is moving from x = maximum value, when a solenoid of resistance R, inductance
0 to x = 2b outwards and then inwards from x = 2b to x = L is connected to a battery, is :
0 as shown in the figure. A uniform magnetic field perpendicular ] R L
to the plane is acting from x = 0 to x = b. Identify the graph ,] ; 25% ;
showing the variation of different quantities with distance : :
A

PQ x = 0 x = 2b L
(1) n5 (2) infinite ( )
x = 2b x=0 , R

x=0 x=b , ;{= L L

(3) n2 (4) n10
, R R
101. What happens to the inductive reactance and the current in
a purely inductive circuit if the frequency is halved ?
P
,
/ ?
Q (1) Both, inductive reactance and current will be halved.
( / )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

x=0 x=b x=2b (2) Inductive reactance will be halved and current will be
doubled.
A
( / )

B (3) Inductive reactance will be doubled and current will be

halved.
( / )
(4) Both, inducting reactance and current will be doubled.
x=0 C
( / )
b 2b b
 Physics Gutka 171
102. In a scries LCR resonance circuit, if we change the resistance 107. A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along y-direction
only, from a lower to higher value :
LCR ; can have the following pair of electric field E and magnetic
: ]
(1) The bandwidth of resonance circuit will increase. field B components.
( <+ )
; y- ]
(2) The resonance frequency will increase.
( <+ ) {= E ;{= B ;
(3) The quality factor will increase.
%
( <+ )
(1) Ey, By or Ez, Bz (2) Ey, Bx or Ex, By
(4) The quality factor and the resonance frequency will
remain constant. (3) Ex, Bz or Ez, Bx (4) Ex, By or Ey, Bx
( ] ) 108. An electromagnetic wave of frequency 5 GHz, is travelling
103. In a series LCR circuit, the inductive reactance (XL) is 10 in a medium whose relative electric permittivity and relative
and the capacitive reactance (XC) is 4 . The resistance (R) magnetic permeability both are 2. Its velocity in this medium
in the circuit is 6 . The power factor of the circuit is : is
LCR ] ; (XL) 10 5 GHz ; /;
=; (XC) 4 (R)
6 % ; 2

1 1 /;
(1) (2) (1) 3 × 107 m/s (2) 18 × 107 m/s
2 2 2
(3) 15 × 107 m/s (4) 16 × 107 m/s
1 3 109. In a Young's double slit experiment, the width of the one of
(3) (4)
2 2 the slit is three times the other slit. The amplitude of the light
104. A resonance circuit having inductance and resistance EN coming from a slit is proportional to the slit-width. Find the
2 × 10 –4 H and 6.28 respectively oscillates at 10 MHz ratio of the maximum to the minimum intensity in the
frequency. The value of quality factor of this resonator is interference pattern.
_______. [ = 3.14] , ,
2 × 10–4 H 6.28 W
] 10 MHz
_______ [ = 3.14]
(1) 3000 (2) 2000 %
(3) 2500 (4) 3500
LL
(1) 1 : 4 (2) 3 : 1 (3) 4 : 1 (4) 2 : 1
105. The electric field intensity produced by the radiation coming 110. An unpolarized light beam is incident on the polarizer of a
from a 100 W bulb at a distance of 3m is E. The electric field polarization experiment and the intensity of light beam
intensity produced by the radiation coming from 60 W at the emerging from the analyzer is measured as 100 Lumens. Now,
same distance is if the analyzer is rotated around the horizontal axis (direction
100 W } 3m of light) by 30° in clockwise direction, the intensity of emerging
light will be
A

{= E 60 W
,
{= _________
100
6 8 3 2
(1) E (2) E (3) E (4) E ; { ( ) % 30°
5 5 5 5
106. A plane electromagne tic wa ve of freque ncy ? , _______
100 MHz is travelling in vacuum along the x-direction. At a (1) 75 Lumens (2) 50 Lumens
(3) 150 Lumens (4) 100 Lumens
particular point in space and time, B ˆ . (where,
2.0 10 –8 kT 111. Two coherent light sources having intensity in the ratio 2x
k̂ is unit vector along z-direction) Wha t is E a t this
point ? I max I min
produce an interference pattern. The ratio will
; 100 MHz x- I max I m in
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

; be:
] 2x ]
]B ˆ
2.0 10 –8 kT ( k̂ , z- ,
I max I min
) E % I max I min %
]c=3 × 108 m/s)
2 2x 2x
(1) 0.6 ĵ V/m (2) 6.0 k̂ V/m (1) (2)
x 1 2x 1

(3) 6.0 ĵ V/m (4) 0.6 k̂ V/m 2x 2 2x

(3) (4)
x 1 2x 1
172 Physics Gutka
112. Consider the diffraction pattern obtained from the sunlight
incident on a pinhole of diameter 0.1 m. If the diameter of S
the pinhole is slightly increased, it will affect the diffraction 50 cm
60 cm
pattern such thtat :
0.1 m =} ,
; = 1 .2 m
(1) 150 cm (2) 180 cm
;
(3) 120 cm (4) 75 cm
: 115. The angle of deviation through a prism is minimum when
(1) its size decreases, and intensity decreases
( ? ? )
(2) its size increases, and intensity increases
( )
(3) its size increases, but intensity decreases
( ? ) (A) Incident ray and emergent ray are symmetric to the prism
(4) its size decreases, but intensity increases
( )
( ? )
(B) The refracted ray inside the prism becomes parallel to
113. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as Assertion its base
A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
( )
, , % A R
(C) Angle of incidence is equal to that of the angle of
Assertion A : For a simple microscope, the angular size of
emergence
the object equals the angular size of the image. EN
A: , ; ( )

; (D) When angle of emergence is double the angle of incidence

Reason R : Magnification is achieved as the small object can ( ] )

be kept much closer to the eye than 25 cm and hence it Choose the correct answer from the options given below :
subtends a large angle.
, ,%
R: ; =
(1) Statements (A), (B) and (C) are true
25 cm ]
LL
[ (A), (B) (C) ]
(2) Only statement (D) is true
In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below : [ (D) ]
, , (3) Only statements (A) and (B) are true
,: [ (A) (B) ]
A

(1) A is true but R is false (A R ) (4) Statements (B) and (C) are true
(2) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct [ (B) (C) ]
explanation of A.
116. A deviation of 2° is produced in the yellow ray when prism
(A R R A [; )
of crown and flint glass are achromatically combined. Taking
(3) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
dispersive powers of crown and flint glass are 0.02 and 0.03
of A
respectively and refractive index for yellow light for these glasses
(A R R A [; )
are 1.5 and 1.6 respectively. The refracting angles for crown
(4) A is false but R is true (A R ) glass prism will be (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
114. A point source of light S, placed at a distance 60 cm infront
of the centre of a plane mirror of width 50 cm, hangs vertically %
on a wall. A man walks infront of the mirror along a line parallel
2° { %
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

to the mirror at a distance 1.2 m from it (see in the figure).

The distance between the extreme points where he can see 0.02 0.03 , %
the image of the light source in the mirror is 1.5 1.6 ______
S, 50 cm )
60 cm
(1) 15° (2) 12°
, 1.2 m [
, (3) 18° (4) 16°

] ; ] ..........
 Physics Gutka 173
117. A2 F capacitor C1 is first charged to a potential difference
of 10 V using a battery.Then the battery is removed and the
capacitor is connected to an uncharged capacitor C2 of 8 F.
The charge in C 2 on equilibrium condition is

2 F = C1 } 10 V '

= 8 F
; = C2 ;
"
C2 _______ C ( )

S S
• 1 •2
1 7 1 5
2 F 8 F (1) sin (2) sin
10V 3 4
C1 C2

1 7 1 5
(3) sin (4) sin
(1) 20 C (2) 18 C 4 3
(3) 16 C (4) 24 C 121. A prism of refractive index n1 and another prism of refractive
118. An object viewed from a near point distance of 25 cm, using index n2 are stuck together (as shown in the figure). n1 and
a microscopic lens with magnification '6', gives an unresolved n2 depend on , the wavelength of light, according to the
image. A resolved image is observed at infinite distance with relation
a total magnification double the earlier using an eyepiece along
n1 ] n2
with the given lens and a tube of length 0.6 m, if the focal EN
length of the eyepiece is equal to ( ) n1 n2 ]
/; ,
6 25 cm
0.6 m 10.8 10 –14 1.8 10 –14
n1=1.2 + 2 and ( ) n2 = 1.45 + 2

, The wavelength for which rays incident at any angle on the

______ cm interface BC pass through without bending at that interface
LL

(1) 20 cm (2) 25 cm will be

(3) 28 cm (4) 30 cm /; , BC
BC > _________
119. A ray of light passing through a prism (µ = 3 ) suffers minimum
D
deviation. It is found that the angle of incidence is double the
angle of refraction within the prism. Then, the angle of prism 90°
A

C 70°
is
N n2
(µ = 3) ; i
] n1 20°
60° 40
________ ( ) A B
(1) 30° (2) 60°
(1) 600 nm (2) 400 nm
(3) 45° (4) 53° (3) 800 nm (4) 200 nm
122. The wavelength of an X-ray beam is 10Å. The mass of a
120. A ray of light entering from air into a denser medium of
fictitious particle having the same energy as that of the X-ray
4
refractive index
3
, as shown in figure. The light ray suffers x
photons is h kg. The value of x is_________.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

3
total internal reflection at the adjacent surface as shown. The
maximum value of angle should be equal to: (h = Planck's constant)
X- /; 10Å ]
4
,
3 x
X- ] h kg ; x
, ; 3
, _________ (h = )
(1) 10 (2) 20 (3) 30 (4) 40
174 Physics Gutka
123. A radioactive sample is undergoing a decay. At any time t1 , 128. If an electron is moving in the nth orbit of the hydrogen atom,
then its velocity (vn) for the nth orbit is given as :
A
its activity is A and another time t2, the activity is . What ] nth ] nth
5
is the average life time for the sample ? (vn) %
; ; t1
1
(1) vn n (2) vn
A n
A ; ; t2
5
1
? (3) vn n2 (4) vn
n2
n5 t1 t2
(1) (2) 129. Which level of the single ionized carbon has the same energy
t2 t1 n5 as the ground state energy of hydrogen atom?

]
t2 t1 n t2 t1
(3) (4)
n5 2
124. Two stream of photons, possessing energies equal to twice (1) 1 (2) 6
and ten times the work function of metal are incident on the (3) 4 (4) 8
metal surface successively. The value of ratio of maximum
130. If 2.5 × 10–6 N average force is exerted by a light wave on
velocities of the photoelectrons emitted in the two respective
a non-reflecting surface of 30 cm2 area during 40 minutes
cases is x : y. The value of x is ...............
of time span, the energy flux of light just before it falls on the
/ /
surface is nearly W/cm2. (Assume complete absorption and
% / EN normal incidence conditions are there)
x : y x
...............
, ] { 30 cm2 ] 40
2.5 × 10–6 N ] } ]
2 1
(1) (2) ] ______ W/cm2 (
3 3
)(
1 1
(3) (4) )
2 4
125. The stopping potential in the context of photoelectric effect
LL
(1) 15 (2) 25
depends on the following property of incident electromagnetic
(3) 32 (4) 40
radiation :
] ; 131. A particle is travelling 4 times as fast as an electron. Assuming
the ratio of de-Broglie wavelength of a particle to that of
electron is 2 : 1, the mass of the particle is :-
(1) Phase ( ) (2) Intensity ( )
(3) Amplitude ( ) (4) Frequency ( ) ;
A

126. The first three spectral lines of H-atom in the Balmer series /; 2:1 ] %
are given 1, 2 , 3 considering the Bohr atomic model, the
1 1
1 (1) times the mass of e– (e– )
wave lengths of first and third spectral lines are related 16 16
3

by a factor of approximately 'x' × 10–1. The value of x, to the (2) 8 times the mass of e– (e– 8 )
nearest integer, is ________.
(3) 16 times the mass of e– (e– 16 )
/; 1,

2 3 ] ;
1 1
(4) times the mass of e– (e– )
8 8
1
/;] x × 10–1 }
3 132. If the Kinetic energy of a moving body becomes four times
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

x ________ its initial Kinetic energy, then the percentage change in its
(1) 10 (2) 5 momentum will be :
(3) 15 (4) 20
127. The half-life of Au198 is 2.7 days. The activity of 1.50 mg of
Au198 if its atomic weight is 198 g mol–1 is, ] %
Au198 2.7 ; Au 198 (1) 100% (2) 200%
198 g mol–1 ] Au198 150 mg % (3) 300% (4) 400%
(NA = 6 × 1023/mol)
(1) 240 Ci (2) 357 Ci (3) 535 Ci (4) 252 Ci
 Physics Gutka 175
133. For a certain radioactive process the graph between In R and 137. If 'f' denotes the ratio of the number of nuclei decayed (Nd )
t(sec) is obtained as shown in the figure. Then the value of to the number of nuclei at t = 0 (N0) then for a collection of
half life for the unknown radioactive material is approximately: radioactive nuclei, the rate of change of 'f' with respect to time
, ln R ;] t ) is given as : [ is the radioactive decay constant]

, 'f ' ; , [; (Nd) t =0 [; (N0)

% ,] ;
'f ' [ - ; ]
(1) – (1 – e– t ) (2) (1 – e– t )
(3) e– t (4) – e– t

8 R = decay rate 138. The de Broglie w avelength of a proton and

6 -particle are equal. The ratio of their velocities is :
In R
4 - (de Broglie) /;
2
:

10 20 30 40 50 60 (1) 4 : 3 (2) 4 : 1 (3) 4 : 2 (4) 1 : 4

time, t(sec) 139. Given below are two statements :
, , :
Statement I : PN junction diodes can be used to function
(1) 9.15 sec (2) 6.93 sec as transistor, simply by connecting two diodes, back to back,
(3) 2.62 sec (4) 4.62 sec which acts as the base terminal.
134. A nucleus of mass M emits -ray photon of frequency ' '. The I: : ]
loss of internal energy by the nucleus is : EN PN
[Take 'c' as the speed of electromagnetic wave]
,]
M
Statement II : In the study of transistor, the amplification factor
indicates ratio of the collector current to the base current.
(; 'c' ; )
II : /;; &/
(1) h (2) 0
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct answer
LL

h h from the options given below :

(3) h 1 (4) h 1
2Mc 2 2Mc2
, , ,
135. Some nuclei of a radioactive m aterial a re undergoing (1) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
radioactive decay. The time gap between the instances when
( I II )
a quarter of the nuclei have decayed and when half of the
nuclei have decayed is given as : (where is the decay constant) (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
A

{; ( I II )

; ] 1/4 ) {; (3) Both Statement I and Statement II are false

1/2 ) {; ] (; { ) ( I II )
(4) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
( I II )
3
1 ln2 ln2 2l n2 ln 140. A 5V battery is connected across the points X and Y. Assume
(1) (2) (3) (4) 2
2 D1 and D2 to be normal silicon diodes. Find the current supplied
by the battery if the +ve terminal of the battery is connected
136. The Ka X-ray of molybdenum has wavelength 0.071 nm. If to point X.
the energy of a molybdenum atoms with a K electron knocked
X Y 5V , ; ,
out is 27.5 keV, the energy of this atom when an L electron
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

is knocked out will be ____ . (Round off to the nearest integer) D1 D2 ; /

K X- /; 0.071 nm ; X ] } / %
D1
K- 27.5 keV
L- ______ keV
D2 5
( )
[h = 4.14 × 10–15 eVs, c = 3 × 108 ms–1 ] XY
(1) 5 keV (2) 15 keV
(1) ~ 0.5 A (2) ~ 1.5 A
(3) 10 keV (4) 2.5 keV
(3) ~ 0.86 A (4) ~ 0.43 A
176 Physics Gutka
141. The truth table for the followng logic circuit is :
, , , : A
Y
A B

Y
B

(1)
A B Y 0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
0 0 0
0 1 1
(1)
1 0 1
1 1 0

(2)
A B Y 0 t(s)
1 2 3 4 5
0 0 1
0 1 0
(2)
1 0 0
1 1 1

(3)
A B Y 0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
0 0 1
0 1 0
(3)
1 0 1 EN
1 1 0

(4)
A B Y 0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
0 0 0
0 1 1
(4) 144. The value of power dissipated across the zene r diode
1 0 0
(Vz = 15 V) connected in the circuit as shown in the figure
1 1 1
is x × 10–1 watt.
LL

142. LED is constructed from Ga-As-P semiconducting material. , (Vz = 15 V)

The energy gap of this LED is 1.9 eV. Calculate the wavelength ; x × 10–1 watt
of light emitted and its colour.
RS = 35
LED Ga-As-P ±
LED & 1.9 eV /; VZ = 15V RL = 90
22V
A

%
[h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js and c = 3 × 108 ms–1 ]
(1) 1046 nm and red colour (1046 nm ) The value of x, to the nearest integer, is ______.

(2) 654 nm and orange colour (654 nm ) x ______

(1) 5 × 10–1 W (2) 3 × 10–1 W
(3) 1046 nm and blue colour (1046 nm )
(3) 2 × 10–1 W (4) 4 × 10–1 W
(4) 654 nm and red colour (654 nm )
145. In the logic circuit shown in the figure, if input A and B are
143. Draw the output signal Y in the given combination of gates: 0 to 1 respectively, the output at Y would be 'x'. The value
, ,} , Y ,:- of x is _______.
= , ] ; A B %
0 1 ] Y 'x'
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

A x _______
0 1 2 3 4 5 t(s)
A
Y
B
0 t(s) B
1 2 3 4 5
(1) 1 (2) 3 (3) 5 (4) 0
 Physics Gutka 177
146. Which one of the following will be the output of the given , , 50 V /
circuit? 5V ; / 90 mA
, , ? _____
I I2
A
R
Y I1
B Vi=50V RL Vz
(1) NOR Gate ( ) (2) NAND Gate ( ) z
(3) AND Gate ( ) (4) XOR Gate ( )
147. An AC source rated 220 V, 50 Hz is connected to a resistor.
The time taken by the current to change from its maximum
to the rms value is : (1) 500 (2) 100
(3) 200 (4) 250
220 V, 50 Hz /
151. A transistor is connected in common emitter circuit
/ ] /;
configuration, the collector supply voltage is 10 V and the
; : voltage drop across a resistor of 1000 in the collector circuit
(1) 2.5 ms (2) 25 ms is 0.6 V. If the current gain factor ( ) is 24, then the base
(3) 2.5 s (4) 0.25 ms current is
148. The typical output characteristics curve for a transistor working
in the common-emitter configuration is shown in the figure.
] 10 V 1000 {;
= 0.6 V ; / ( ) 24, ]
IC(mA) EN / _______ A ( )
8 IB = 40µA (1) 10 A (2) 20 A
(3) 25 A (4) 35 A
6 IB = 30µA 152. Find the truth table for the function Y of A and B represented
4 in the following figure.
IB = 20µA
, , B Y ,
2 IB = 10µA
%
0
A
LL
VCE(V)
The estimated current gain from the figure is
Y
= ______ B
(1) 100 (2) 50
(3) 200 (4) 150 A B Y A B Y
149. For the forward biased diode characteristics shown in the figure, 0 0 0
(1) (2) 0 0 1
the dynamic resistance at ID = 3 mA will be_______ .
0 1 1
A

0 1 0
, ,] ID 1 0 0 1 0 1
= 3 mA _______ 1 1 0 1 1 1
ID(mA)
(3) A B Y (4) A B Y
8 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 1 0 0 1 1
6
1 0 0 1 0 1
5
1 1 1 1 1 1
4
3 153. For the circuit shown below, calculate the value of I z :
2
1
, , , Iz
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\11 NOTE.P65

RS=1000
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
VD(V)
(1) 15 (2) 20
Iz
(3) 5 (4) 25 Vi 100V R
150. In a given circuit diagram, a 5 V zener diode along with a B
Vz=50V 2000
series resistance is connected across a 50 V power supply.
The minimum value of the resistance required, if the maximum
zener current is 90 mA will be _____ . (1) 25 mA (2) 0.15 A
(3) 0.1 A (4) 0.05 A
178 Physics Gutka
HINTS & SOLUTIONS
AIEEE 2002 2. question Fsystem 0 , v = constant
ANSWER KEY 3. Weight of the block is balanced by frictional force
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Weight = N = 0.2 × 10 = 2N
2 2 2 2 3 1 3 2 3 1 5. Escape velocity does not depends on angle of projection of
body.
1. Let equation of another wave be y'=a sin ( t + kx + )
1 1 2h
y + y' = a sin ( t – kx) + a sin ( t + kx+ ) 6. hf1 0 mv12 , hf2 0 mv22 v12 v 22 f1 f2
2 2 m
At x=0, y+y'=0 a sin t + a sin ( t + ) = 0
A 0
= y' = – a sin ( t + kx) 8. Use C
d1 d2
.....
K1 K2

q q 9. Acos t + Bcos t maximum value mini-

2. (1)
q q
(2) 0 A2 B2
6 0 6 0
mum value A2 B2
10. Given P T 3
PV = RT
T2 T2 P (PV)3 P3 V 3 P P2 V3 = constant
5. 1 1 0 T2 0 or T1 =
T1 T1
CP 3
Which is not possible PV3/2 = constant CV 2

6. As F1 F2 F3 0 and F2 F3 F1 F22 F32 12. Initial thrust = m(a+g)=3.5 × 10 4 [10 + 10] = 7 × 10 5 N

EN AIEEE 2004
F2 F3 F1
If F1 is removed then acceleration =
m m ANSWER KEY
Tmax 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7. mg Tmax ma max
amax 1 4 1 2 3 3 2 3 3
600 360 240 2
a max 4ms mg
60 60 1. Here F x, by using work energy theorem

8. L r p mvr sin mv KE = z F dx
p
KE z x dx KE x2
LL
0 i1 0 i1i2 d cos 2. Use F = 144 = [40 × 10 –3 × 1200]N N = 3
9. F i2 d B i2 2cos d t
4 r 2 r
3. Horizontal direction speed same ,
10. Covalent bonding electron cloud overlapping v0 1
v0 cos = cos = = 60°
region electron probability density 2 2
wave nature of electron > m 1
4. T = 2 T2
k k
AIEEE 2003
A

1 1 1 1
ANSWER KEY t 12 k1 & t 2
2
k2 t 12 + t 22 k1 + k2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 1
3 4 4 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 But k + k = T2 t 12 + t 22 = T2
1 2 k
11 12 13
2
3 2 2 5. 1
= 0 2b2 , 2
= 0 2
> 1

6. Assume T1 > T2
1. Initial position Heat given = Heat taken
1 2
1C v1 (T 1–T)= 2C v2 (T–T2 )

P1 V1 P2 V2
Here C v = C v 2 & 1
= T , 2
= T
1 1 2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

Just before collision d sin 2 sin

7. dsin = n n= = =2sin

nmax = 2
System centre of mass situation
Maximum number of possible
Fsystem 0 interference maxima = (2nmax + 1) = 5
8. Use 5 × 10 6 × 1.6 × 10 –19
M 0 5M 12R M d 5M d 3R 9 109 2 10 19
1.6 92 1.6 10 19

d 7.5 R =
M 5M M 5M rmin .
rmin. = 5.3 × 10–12 cm
9. Read this booklet carefully.
 Physics Gutka 179

AIEEE : 2005 1 2ms T

15. CV2 = ms T V =
ANSWER KEY 2 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16. Let q1 be the charge flows through silver voltameter
2 2 1 4 1 2 2 2 2 4 then charge flows through copper voltameter = q – q1
Now according to question m = z1 (q–q1 ) = z 2 (q1 )
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
q
4 1 4 1 1 3 1 4 q1 =
z2
1. t = ax2 + bx Differentiating it w.r.t. time 1 = (2ax+b) 1
z1
dx dx 1 17. Resistance of galvanomenter
v= = 2ax b
dt dt current sensitivity 10
Rg = =5
dv –2a dx 2a voltage sensitivity 2
Acceleration = = 2ax b 2 = 2ax b 3 = –2av3 As galvanometer is to be converted into a voltmeter of range
dt dt
1 × 150 = 150V. So resistance to be connected in series =
2. By work energy theorem KE = W
V 150
s
0 = (mg sin )s –µmg cos µ = 2 tan I g – Rg = 150 –5 = 10000 – 5 = 9995
2 10 –3
10
F1 mR1 2 R1 V2 (200)2
3. 18. Resistance of hot tungsten filaments = = =400
F2 = mR 2 2 = R 2 P 100
400
4. Let maximum momentum be p then Resistance of filament when not in use = = 40
10
p2 1
= KL 2 p = L MK AIEEE 2006
2M 2
F 15 0.20 ANSWER KEY
5. Initial acceleration = = 10 ms–2
m 0.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6. The object will have translational motion without rotation, when 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 2
force F is applied at the centre of mass of the system. Let
distance of P from midpoint of AB be x.
If P is the centre of mass then m (x) = 2m ( –x)
EN 11
3
12
4

v 300
2 2 4 1. n' = n 10000 =
x = CP = 2 – v vs 300 v s (9500)
3 3 3

hc
12400 300 9500
7. Eg = = 0.5 eV 285
LL
24800 300–vs = vs = 15 ms–1
10000
8. Heat supplied Q during process BC
Q1 = Area FBCEF 4. n1Cv1 T1 n2 Cv 2 T2 n1Cv1 n2 Cv 2 Tf
1
Q1= 2
(2T0 T0 )(2S0 S0 )
5 3 7
1 RT0 1 R T0
3 n1C v1 T1 n2C v2 T2 2 2 3
Q1 = T0S 0 6RT0 3
2 Tf= = 5 3 = T0
n1C v1 n 2 C v2 1 R 1 R 4R 2
A

Heat rejected to sinkQ2 = Area ACEFA 2 2

Q1=T0 × (2S 0 – S 0 ) = T0S 0
Efficiency 5. For minimum potential energy
Q2 B dV 1 1 1
1 T2= 2T0 0 x3 x 0 x 0 or x2 1 J
Q1 PE min =
Q=0 Q1 dx 4 2 4
T0 S0 Total mechanical energy = PE min + KE max = 2
1 Q2
3 T 1= T 0 C
T0 S0 A 1 1 1 9
2 mv 2max = 2 – = 2
F E 2 4 4 4
1
S1= S0 S2= 2S0
3 9 3
v 2max v max ms 1

2 2
T T1 – T2
9. Rate to flow of heat = KA = K (4 r1r2) ˆ
x r2 – r1 6. r F (–ˆi ˆj) (–Fk) F(iˆ kˆ – ˆj k)
ˆ F(–ˆj – ˆi) F ˆi ˆj
10. Let dots can be resolved by eye at maximum distance R then
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

2( )r 2 g
–3 –3 10. Terminal speed v = v ( – )
1.22 d Dd 3 10 1 10
D R
R =
1.22 1.22 500 10 –9 =4.92 m ~ 5m
'– ' 10.5 1.5
11. The shape of interference fringes on the screen is hyperbola. v' = – v = (0.2) = 0.1 m/s
19.5 1.5
1 cos 2 t 1 1
12. y = sin2 t = = cos2 t motion is SHM with R T1 – T2
2 2 2 12. Work done in adiabatic process W =
–1
2
time period =
2 R T2 – T1 103 8.3 7
= 1 + = 1+ = 1+0.40 = 1.40
W 146 103
The gas must be diatomic
180 Physics Gutka
AIEEE 2007 mv 2 k nh 1 k
11. & mvrn Tn mv 2 & rn n
ANSWER KEY rn rn 2 2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2
2 3 1 1 1 1 2 12. x1 at , x = vt x 1 – x 2 = 1 at2 vt
2 2
2
1. x = 2 × 10 –2 cos t
v = (2 × 10 –2 ) ( ) (–sin t) = –2 × 10 –2 sin t 13. For a diamagnetic material 0 < µ r < 1 and for any material
> 1
1 r
Speed will be maximum if t = t = = 0.5s 14. According to question Q = 0 = W so U = 0 U = constant
2 2
f(n1 n 2 )RT fn1RT1 fn 2RT2
2 2 so U U1 U2
2. Distance of point A from origin = 2 2 = 2 units 2 2 2

P1 V1 P2 V2 T P1 V1 P2 V2 P1 V1 P2 V2 T1 T2
Distance of point B from origin = 22 02 = 2 units T
T1 T2 2 2 2 P1 V1 T2 P2 V2 T2
As point A & B are situated at equal distance so v A–vB= 0
dx AIEEE 2009
3. x = x 0cos t v = = –x 0 sin t
4 dt 4
ANSW ER K EY
dv
a = = –x 0 2
cos t = x0 2
cos t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
dt 4 4
3 4 4 3 4 1 4 2 4 2
3
x 0 cos 2 t =Acos( t + ) A= x 0 , 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4 4 4
2 2 3,4 1 1 3 3 1 4 4
4. Potential remains same as it depends on algebraic sum of
charges but electric field E changes. 21 22 23
5. Intensity change in in decibel 1 2 2

I2 I2 I2 EN 1. Least count of vernier callipers L.C. = 1MSD – 1VSD

= 10 log I =20 log I = 2 But here 29 MSD = 30 VSD
I1 = 10 =100
2
1 1
29 1
6. Net work done by the system in the process is zero, as in L.C. = 1MSD – MSD = MSD
removing the dielectric, work done is equal and opposite to 30 30
the work done is reinserting the dielectric. o o
7. The value of electric charge is constanst everywhere. 1 1
= × 0.5° = = 1 minute. B
360 60
AIEEE 2008 a A
2. B0 = B1 – B2
ANSWER KEY I1 30° I
I I
LL
0 0 O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 =
2a 6 2 2b 6 2 D
2 2 4 1 1 4 4 2 4 1 b
C
I
11 12 13 14 = (b a)0
24ab
2 2 2 1
3. Magnetic field due to I1 is circular. So forces on AD and BC
1. For constructive interference are zero.
5. Energy of the diatomic gas
A

2dcosi = n = V 50 volt
2meV 5 5 5
= nRT = PV = 8 104 = 5 × 104 J
3. Diffraction pattern should be wider than slit-width 2 2 2 4
V 2g 3 1D
6. Third bright of known light X3 = ..... (i)
2 ( )Vg kv2 d
4. aV 1 g kv V 2g v 1 2
k 4 2D
4th bright of unknown light X4 = ..... (ii)
n
d
L X Given X3 = X4 3 = 4
Xdm k Xdx 1 2
0 L n 1
x cm L 3 3
5. dm L X
n
n 2 mg = V 1g = = × 590 = 442.5 nm
k dx 2 4 1 4
0 L
v v0 94
1 9. n' = n = n
For n = 0, Xcm = ; for n Xcm = L v 100
2
from (iii) eqn. of motion v2 = u2 + 2as
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

s 100 1
6. Average velocity v 10ms v02 = 0 + 2as v0 = 2as
t 10
1 1 94 v 2as
Kinetic energy = mv 2 (m)(10)2 50m n n s = 98 m.
2 2 100 v
For athelete 40 < m < 100 2000 J < KE < 5000 J F/A
9. As liquid 2 is below liquid 1 so 2 > 1 . Solid ball sinks in YA2
10. Y= F = F A2
liquid 1 and does not sink in liquid 2 so 3 > 1 and 3 < A
2
. Therefore 1 < 3 < 2 2 2
10. No conduction is found between P & Q so both P & Q will F2 A2 3A
= 9 F2 = 9F
be n-type or p-type. Therefore R will be base. F1 A1 A
 Physics Gutka 181

11. AIEEE 2010

C
90° C
2
3
ANSW ER K EY
C

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) sin = sin (90– C
) 1 2 3 3 4 1 2 2 3 4
2 1 1 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
sin = cos = = sin–1 3 2 2 3 1 3 1 4 3 1
C 3 2 3 3
12. By using conservation of mechanical energy : 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 4 4 4 1 4 1
1 2 m 2
I mgh where I = 1. Parallel cylindrical beam gives planar wavefront
2 3

2 2
1m 2 2 1m 2 2
mgh mgh h=
2 3 2 3 6g

13. a = – x , v =
2
A2 x 2
a2 T2 + 4 2v2 = 4x 2 T2 + 4 2
(A 2 – x 2 )
2

4 2
= x T2 + 4
2 2 2 2
(A 2 – x 2 ) = 4 2 2
A 2 = constant c c
T2 2. µ= v= Since I is decreasing so µ also decreases and
v
aT 2
xT hence v increases. So v is minimum on the axis of the beam.
= – = – T = constant
2
3. As light enters the medium then
x x
along the axis velocity is
r1
Q 4Q r14 decreasing so as we move away
14. Q' = dV = r.(4 r 2 )dr =
0
R 4
R4 4 from the centre (that is x in figure)
the wave covers less distance and

16.
E=

Y = A + B = A.B
KQ '
r12 4
1
0 1
2
r
Qr14
4R 4 = 4
Qr12
0 R4
EN 4.
hence shape is convex.
Total kinetic energy of products = Total energy released
p2 p2
= (mass defect) c2(where m = M/2 given)
|v| 2m 2m
p2 M M
2 (M m) c2
2m 2 2
17. 2ƒ
2
M
LL
ƒ
p2 v 2 2 m
2 =( m)c2 2 =( m)c2 v c
|u| 2 M/2 M
ƒ 2ƒ M
5. Because energy is releasing Binding energy per nucleon
18. WAB = Work done in isobaric process of product > that of parent E 2 > E1 .
= R T = 2R × (500 – 300) = 400R 8. Considering A,B,C,D,E points
Work done on the gas = – 400R in plane where C is the mid
P1 point.At mid point magenetic
A

19. WDA = Work done in isothermal process = 2.303 RT log P field is zero and right and left
2
side of mid point magnetic field
1 105 is in opposite direction and for
= 2.303 × 2R × 300 log
2 105 both conductors magnetic field
= 2.303 × 2R × 300 × (– 0.3010) = – 414R in right & left side are opposite
Work done on the gas = – (– 414 R) = 414 R in direction.
20. WABCDA = WAB + WBC + WCD + WDA 9. In equilibrium ball will remain at the interface of water and
oil.
2
= R(500–300)+2.303 R (500)log + 2k 2 q q
1 ˆj ˆj
10. E 2
ĵ
r 4 r r 2 r2
1 0 0

R(300–500) + 2.303 R(300) log = 276R 11. TB = T1, TC = T2, = 1.4; VB = V, VC = 32 V

2
–1 –1
Work done on the gas = – 276 R TB VB TC VC
22. Equivalent resistance across L(by short circuiting battery)
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

–1 –1
= Req = 2 then current through L : TC T2 VB 1 1
TB T1 VC 32 4
4
i = i0(1 – e –Rt/L) where R = 2 L = H,
10 T2 1 3
= 1 – T = 1 = 0.75
1 4 4
E 12
i0 = = = 6A 12. In 23.023 Number of significant figures will be 5 because all
R 2
the zero's between non zero digits are siginificant. In 0.0003
i = 6(1 – e–5t) .... (i) p.d. across L is VL number of significant figures will be one because all the zero's
before and after decimal point are insignificant if the number
di 4 d
= L = [6(1 – e–5t)] = 12 e–5t is less then one. In 2.1 × 10–3 number of significant figure are
dt 10 dt two because power of 10 is not considered as significant figure.
182 Physics Gutka
21. relative vertical acceleration of A with respect to B
A
A
3 1
= g (sin260° – sin2 30°) = 9.8 = 4.9 m/s2
13. 4 4
B
B 22.

x A .B A B A B OR gate

r r
5 r
14. Total charge Q dv 4 r 2 dr V2 V2
cos ˆi sin ˆj
0
0 0
4 R a –
R R
r
5r2 r3 5r 3 r4
4 0 dr 4 0
0
4 R 12 4R

KQ 1 5 3 r4 r 5 r
E 4 r 0
23. Angular momentum L
r2 4 0
r 2 0
12 4R 4 0
3 R r p

XL XC XC R 1 2 ˆ
15. tan = ; tan 30° = XC = ; where r u cos t ˆi u sin t gt j
R R 3 2
XL R p m[u cos ˆi (u sin gt)ˆj]
tan 30° = XL =
R 3
XL = XC Condition for resonance So = 0° 1
L r p= mgv 0 t2 cos kˆ
2 2
V2 220
P = VI cos0°; P = 242W
R 200 1.6
24. K= = 2
16. At t = 0 inductor behaves as broken wire then i = V/R2 1.6 0.8
V EN density of sphere, density of liquid
ds dv
25. As s = t3 + 5 so v =3t2 and at = = 6t
dt dt

R2 2
at t = Inductor behaves as conducting wire v2
At t = 2sec a a 2c a 2t a2t
R
V
V R1 2
i (3t 2 ) 2 dv 9t 4
R1R 2 / R1 R2 a 36t 2 144 (7.2)2 = 14m/s2 .
R2
LL
R dt R

dx dy dy dy / dt x a b
17. Ky; Kx ydy xdx 26. U=
dt dt dx dx / dt y x12 x6

by integrating y2 = x2 + c. dU a 6b 2a
/6

F 12 – 0 x
1 U0 1 2t1 / RC 1 2t1 / RC dx x13 x 7 b
18. U = CV 2 CV02 e e
2 2 2 2
A

a b b2
2t1 RC n2 U(x = ) = 0; U equilibrium 2
n2 ; t = 2a 2a 4a
...(1)
RC 1 2 b b

q0 t2 / RC t2
and 4 q 0e 2 n2 ; t = 2RC n2 ...(2) b2 b2
RC 2 U(x = ) – Uequilibrium = 0 – = .
4a 4a
t1 1
from equation (1) and (2) t 1 R 01 2 R 02 1 2
4 27. =
2
i
S R 01 R 02 = 2
; R01 = R02 = R0 (given)
i1 R R
19. Circuit can be reduced as
i2 1 1 1
e 2v B For parallel combination R
i R R1 R2
3R / 2 3R
i v B e=v B 1 1 1
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

i1 = i2 =
2 3R Req R 0 (1 t) R 0 (1 t)
1 2

t x
20. y = 0.2 sin 2 – 1 1 1
0.04 0.50
R0 R 0 (1 1 t) R 0 (1 t)
1 1 p t 2
2
T 0.04
T 2 (1 + pt)–1 = (1 + t) –1 + (1 + t)–1
v= 0.04 1 1 2
m k using binomial expansion
0.50
2 1 2
0.50 2 – 2 pt = 1 – t+ 1– t =
T = 0.04 = (12.5)2 × 0.04 = 6.25 N 1 2 p 2
0.04
 Physics Gutka 183
= 10 × 106 × 16 × 4 × 4
AIEEE 2011
= 2 × 10–3 kJ = 0.002 kJ
ANSWER KEY
T2 Q2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 = =
4 4 2 2 4 1 3 1 4 3 T1 T2 W
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 0.02 4 0.002
3 1 4 4 3 2 3 2 = =
3W 20 W 300 4 W
1
1. m 2 t W = 0.028 kJ W = 0.0148 kJ
2
1
d A
t t 2
Y
dt 7. B
1 1
F = ma t 2 NAND
t
2. Min force required to push up a body. A B Y
F1 = mg sin + mg cos 0 0 1
Min. force required to prevent from sliding 0 1 0
F2 = mg sin – mg cos 1 0 0
1 1 1 0
Given tan =
2 Which is table for NOR gate.
F mg sin mg cos 8. K = W = Q(VA – VB) q a 2aA q
The ratio 1 = =3 : 1
F2 mg sin – mg cos
2kq 2kq
3. R = R1 + R2 + R3 + R4 = Q 0 2a B
a a 5
5
R 100 5 –q –q
100 VB = 0
R = R1 + R2 + R3 + R4 = 20
For combination 2KqQ 1
EN = 1
R 20 a 5
100 100 5%
R 400 9. Time constant for parallel combination = 2RC
4. F = q E v B RC
Time constant for series combination =
2
=q 3iˆ ˆj 2kˆ 3iˆ 4ˆj kˆ ˆi ˆj 3kˆ
t1
V0
V V0 e 2RC
...(i)
Fy = q ˆj 9ˆj ˆj 2
LL
In second case :
Fy = 11q
t2
5. AM of Projectile ( RC / 2) V0
V V0 e ...(ii)
L = m cos H 2
v
2 From (i) and (ii),
sin2
= m cos
2g t1 t2
2RC (RC / 2)
A

3
m 3
cos 30 sin 30 3m 2
= =
2g 16g
tp 10
6. Specific heat at low temperature is ts = = = 2.5 sec
4 4
3
T
Cp 32
400 2
h2
Kerosene
1
Q m.c.dT 10. 1
h1 Raise = hac 1
Water

3
4100 T Total apparent shift
32 dT
20 1000 400 1 1
= h1 1 h2 1
4 1 2
32 1 T
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

3
10 (400) 4
2 1
11. Strain
32 1 1
204 44
10 (400)3 4 Since 2 = 1 [1 + t]
So strain = t
32 1
160000 256
10 (400)3 4 Stress
y
2000 Strain
= 32 × 160000
4 108 Stress = Y. Strain
= 2000 × 10 –6 =Y t
184 Physics Gutka
12. y1 = A sin ( t – kx)
AIEEE 2012
y2 = A sin ( t + kx)
By superposition principle ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
y = y1 + y2
2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 2
= A sin ( t – kx) + A sin ( t + kx)
11 12 13
= 2A sin t cos kx
1 3 1
Amplitude = 2A kx
At nodes displacement is minimum 1. By putting A = B = 0 we get Y = 0
2A cos kx = 0
and by putting A = B = 1 we get Y = 0
cos kx = 0
So correct answer is (2)
kx (2n 1) 2. W = Area bounded by curve = P0V0
2 3 3
2 QAB = nCV T = n × R × T= P V
x (2n 1) 2 2 0 0
2 2 5
QBC = nCP T = n × R × T = 5 P0V0
x (2n 1) 1 2
n
4 2 2 3 13
n = 0, 1, 2.... Total heat supplied = P V + 5P0V0 = P V
2 0 0 2 0 0
13. Magnetic moment of elements ring
dM = di × A W 2 P0V0
= Q × 100 =
13P0 V0 × 100 = 15.4%
dq
= r2 r dr
T (4)(3)
3. Number of lines = nC2 = 4C2 = = 6
dA (2)
= r2
T 4. Due to conducting nature of Al eddy currents are produced
2 rdr 2 5.
EN Least count = MSD – VSD
= r where MSD = 0.5° & 30VSD = 29MSD
T
Total magnetic moment o
29 0.5
R
2 rdr r 2 4 so least count = 0.5° – 0.5
r3dr R 30 30
M = =
0
2 4
o
14. 5m M+ m m 0.5
N
Reading = 58.5° + (09) × = 58.65°
' 30
P' P
LL

According to Conservation of linear momentum Im

2
P' = P 6. Imax = I 4I = 9I = Im Þ I =
9
Therefore '=
16. Focal length of a lens is given by IP = I + 4I + 2 (I)(4I) cos
1 1 1 = 5I + 4I cos
( 1)
f R1 R2 = I + 4I (1 + cos )
A

1 1
f f = I + 8I cos2
2
R B fR fB
Focal length will increase
Im
= 1 8cos2
17. In polarisation intensity changes as the crystal is rotated. 9 2
In scattering for Rayleigh's law
1
I 4 7.
is minimum for Blue
so I is larget
Both statements are correct and reason is also correct
18. y1(x, t) = 2a sin ( t – kx) 1 1 1 1 1 240
= Þf=
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

y2(x, t) = a sin (2 t – 2kx) f v u 12 ( 240) 21

But Intensity
I = 2 2n2 a2 v 1 1 1
Shift = h 1 = 1 1 = cm
µ 1.5 3
2
I1 2a n 1 To get image at film, lens should form image at distance
I2 a 2n 1
1 35
Intensity depends on frequency and amplitude equal to 12 – = cm
3 3
So statement-1 is true statement-2 is false
Hence (2) is correct 1 1 1 21 3 1
= = – u = –560 cm
f v u 240 35 u
 Physics Gutka 185
8. Value of potential drops by 63% its initial maximum value v
mM
2. M v'
= 0.37% of V0
= 0.37 × 25 = 9.25 volt
Which lies between 100 and 150 sec. Energy loss will be maximum when collision will be perfectly
inelastic
V R V I
9. R= mv
I R V I By momentum conservation, v' =
= ±(3 + 3)% = ±6% M m
10. Magnetic field at the centre due to element ring Maximum energy loss = Ki – Kf
1 1
= mv2 – (m + M)v'
2 2
r 1 1 m 2v 2
dq = mv2 – (m + M)
2 2 (m M)2

1 m
µ 0 di µ 0 dq µ 0 ds = mv 2 1
dB = = 2 m M
2r 2r T 2rT
M 1
µ0 Q (2 rdr) µ 0Qdr = mv2
= m M 2
2r R2 2 / 2 R2
statement 1 is false.
R
µ0Q µ Q µ 0Q 1 3. u= 5 and tan = 2
B= dr = 0 2 R B
R2 0 R 2 R R
gx2
so by y = x tan – (1 + tan2 )
B
2u 2
10x 2
y = 2x – (1+4)

11. Equation of damped simple pendulum

R
EN 4. Common voltage =
y = 2x – 5x2
2 5

C1 V1 C 2 V2
2 2 C1 C 2
d x d x g
= –bv + g sin = –bv + x = 0 (+ive plate of one capacitor is connected with –ive plate of
dt 2 dt 2 second capacitor)
By solving above equation 120 C1 = 200 C2 3C1 = 5C2.
b
t R1=0.2
x = A0 e 2
sin ( t + ) 5.
R2=3×10–3
LL

A0 2
At t = t, A = so t =
e b
12. The direction of polarization is represented by direction of E 0.15
and wave propagates to the E and B such that k ||E B
R12 R 22
Mutual inductance = 0

L2 (n )2
2
2(R X 2 )3 / 2
1
A

13. Energy = so flux through trigger coil

2I 2( r 2 )
m1m 2 2 2 R12 R 22
where µ = reduced mass = =
0
. i
m1 m 2 4 (R12 X 2 )3 / 2
2 2
n (m 1 m 2 ) 7
so energy =
2m 1 m 2 r 2 10 (3.14)2 (2 10 –1 )2 (3 10 –3 )2 2 2
=
((0.2)2 (0.15)2 )3/ 2
JEE(MAIN)-2013 = 9.1 × 10–11 weber.
ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 R 3cm
4 4 2 2 1 3 2 3 4 2
R-3mm
6.
3mm

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
3 4 4 2 4 4 4 4
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

From trigonometry,
1. R2 = (3)2 + (R–0.3)2 R 15 cm
2
3 10 8
mlens = = 1.5
1 2 2 2 108
E.M.F. induced = B [(3 ) (2 ) ]
2 from Lens–Maker formula,
1 2 1 1 1
= B [5 ] L
1 1 1
2 = 0.5 f = 30cm
f s R1 R2 15 30
5 2
= B
2
186 Physics Gutka
1
7. For low pass filter, frequency greater than can't pass through filter
C
1 1
f< f < = 4 × 104 Hz = 40 KHz 13.
C RC
in given options maximum frequency below 40 KHz is
10.62 KHz For bright fringe S1P – S2P = nl
8. Since the incident light is unpolarized, intensity after light So fringes are concentric circles (centre of origin)

I0 E0
passes through polaroid A is 14. B0 = E0 = 20 × 10–9 × 3 × 108 = 6 V/m
2 c
After this light passes through B, 15. For constant intensity as wavelength decreases energy of
Iemergent = Iin cos2 photons increases and number of photons decreases. So it may
I0 I0 seem that current should decrease. But the probability that a
= cos245°= photon will be successful in emitting an electron will also
2 4 increase. So as wavelength decreases current increases.
16. If a layer of thickness dr is evaporates then change in surface
energy
9. 6
240 = (change in surface area) T
= (d(4pr2))T = 8prdrT
energy required to evaporate layer of thickness dr = (4pr2dr)r.L
The process of evaporation only starts only if change in surface
energy is just sufficient to evaporate the water layer
2
6 (4pr 2dr)Lr = (8prdr) T r
240 L

60
EN 17. Energy of E = h = E 0 Z

h E0 Z2
2n
2 1
(n 1)2

v
1
1
n2
E 0 Z2
2n 1
n 2 (n 1)2

(120)2 120 n4 n3
R bulb 240 , V1 240 117.07
60 246 Q
dx
dq = dx =
(120)2 120 L
18. O
R heater 60 , V2 48 106.6
240 54 x dx
LL
So change in voltage = V1 – V2 10.4 Volt
Q
2T 0 2L K dx
10. 4T0 Potential at O L Q
ln(2)
2P0 x 4 L
L 0

P0 2T0 JEE(MAIN)-2014
T0
ANSWER K EY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A

V0 2V 0 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 4 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
heat supplied = nC v (2T0 T0 ) nC p (4T0 2T0 )
4 1 4 1 4 3 2 1

n3RT0 n5R 13 13
(2T0 ) nRT0 P0 V0 1. Thermal strain = T
2 2 2 2 0

Thermal stress in Rod (Pressure due to

v0 = 0 v Thermal strain) = Y T
11. A = 2 × 1011 × 1.1 × 10–5 × 100
= 2.2 × 108 Pa
By angular momentum conservation about point A 2.
Li = Lƒ

v 0R
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

mR2 0 = mvR + mR 2 v
R 2
12. To increase the range of ammeter resistance should be
decreased (So additional shunt is connected in parallel)

v
Angular momentum L r p (mv )nˆ
Here magnitude of L remains constant but direction changes.
 Physics Gutka 187
1 3/2 1 1 1 1 1
11. 1
f 1 R1 R2 2 R1 R2
8cm x 54cm
P0
3. 1 3/2 1 1 1 1 1
1
f1 4/3 R1 R2 8 R1 R2

1 3/2 1 1 1 1 1
P0 A(8) = P' A(54 – x)
1
f2 5/3 R1 R2 10 R1 R2
P0 8 = P' (54 – x) .....(1)
12. Fundamental frequency of closed organ pipe
P' = P0 – gx ......(2)
Comparing (P0)8 = (P0 – gx) (54 – x) v 340
(76)8 = (76 – x) (54 – x)
f0 = = 100 Hz
4 4 0.85
Solving we get x = 38 cm So possible frequencies below 1250 Hz are
Air columb = 54 – 38 = 16 cm 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 500 Hz, 700 Hz, 900 Hz,
hence 3 option is correct. 1100 Hz
5. All devices are in parallel so total current drawn is given as No. of frequencies = 6
13. Frequency of light ( ) > G
Total Power
inet = µ is also greater than µ G and critical angle of light is less than
220 green light therefore light will got total internal reflaction and
15 40 5 100 5 80 1000 not come out to the air.
inet = For frequency of light ( ) < G ; light will not suffer T.I.R.
220
Therefore light come out to the air
2500 14. In Bohr model
inet = 11.36 A
220
1 1 1 1
minimum capacity of main fuse should be more than 11.36 A Rz 2
6. As particle starts its motion from rest so equation of SHM, n12 n 22 z2
X = A cos t EN 1 1 1 1
For first seconds, a = A – Acos 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 :: : : :
For first seconds, 3a = A – Acos 2 1 1 4 9
As cos 2 = 2cos2 – 1 1 = 2 =4 3 =9 4
2
3a a 2m(K.E.)
So 1 2 1 1 15. In magnetic field, Radius R =
A A qB

A = 2a and T = 6 q 2 B2 R 2
3 K.E. =
2m
LL

B K.E. = 0.80 ev
7. Coercivity = = 3 × 103 = nI Energy of photon for transition from 3 2 in hydrogen atom
µ0
3 × 103 = 1000 I I = 3A 1 1
E = 13.6 = 1.88 ev
22 32
VR
8. VR + VL = 0 From Einstein photoelectric equation
VL = –1
E = K.Emax +
A

2 a 1.88 = 0.8 + = 1.08 ev

9. mg – T = ma & T × R = mR 1.1 ev
R
y
16.
g
a =
2
os
gc

t = t0
m

10. For motion A B

µ

B
by using v = u + at
we have 0 = u gt0
u sin y
u mg
t0 = t=0
x
g x
A For equilibrium under limiting friction
For motion A C mg sin = µ mg cos tan = µ
H
1 x3
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

by using s = ut + at2 From the equation of surface y =

2 t = nt0 6
1 C dy 3x 2
H u(nt 0 ) ( g)(nt 0 ) 2 slope = tan
2 dx 6
x2 1
u 1 2 u
2 µ 0.5 x 1 So y =
H nu gn 2 6
g 2 g 17. When polaroid is at Angle 30º with beam A, it makes 60º
with beam B
2nu 2 u 2 n 2 by malus law
H
2g
IA 1
2gH = nu2 (n – 2) IA cos2 30º = IB cos2 60º IB 3
188 Physics Gutka
18. Given unit in options is wrong.
d0 1.22
By using dv = E . dx 5.
d1 d
9
V = – E.dx 1.22 500 10 2
d0 25 10
0.5 10 2
x 2
x 2 d0 = 1.22 × 25 × 10–6
VA – V0 = – 30x 2 dx 10x 3
x 0
x 0 d0 30 µm
6. Decay of current
VA – V0 = – 10 [8 – 0] = – 80 V
3
10 150
tR 15 1 1
JEE(MAIN)-2015 I I 0e L = e 0.03
= e 5
=
150 10 1500
ANSWER K EY = 6.66 × 10–4 = 0.666 × 10–3 = 0.67 mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7. As damping is happening its amplitude would vary as
4 3 4 4 4 2 3 4 2 1 Q0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 3 1 1 1 4 1 3 3 1
1 P
1. Iav = 0E
2C =
2 4 r2
The oscillations decay exponentially and will be proportional
2P to e– t where depends inversely on L.
E=
4 r 2 0c So as inductance increases decay becomes slower
for
On putting value we get = 2.45 V/m.
L L1 L2
2. T= 2 ...(1)
g

TM = 2

F
A
L
g
L
...(2)
EN
8.
Y= L
L
FL
L= ...(3)
AY
Putting (3) in (2)
LL

2
1 TM A
solving the equation we get = –1 3C
Y T mg Ceq = Q = Ceq. E
3 C
v v f" v vS 2CE 3CE
3. f' = f and f" = f = Q2 = =
v vS v vS f' v vS C 3 C 3
A

f" f' v vS v v S
100 = 10 3
f' v vS = 2E 1
C 3
2v S 2
=
v vS = v
× 100 ~ 12% 1 E
1 Q2/when C = 1µF = 2E =
vS 4 2
4.
1
Q2/when C = 3µF = 2E = E
2
dQ 6E
= 0 Q
dC C 3
2

d 2Q 6E 2
12E
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

=
C 3
3 = 0 Slope
dC 2 C 3
2

µ0I µ 0I
B= = 2 2 sin
2 r 9. Normal
f µ2 µ increases
tan = B where fB is force per unit length(Bi)
g µ1
µ 0I
g tan = I
2 2 sin 2 > 1
light bends towards normal
g light beam bends upwards (as µ with height)
on solving I = 2 sin
µ 0 cos
 Physics Gutka 189

1 U 1
10. P = 3 V
-1
= sin µ sin(A-sin
-1

µ
P T4 for all light transmitted through AC, e < 90°
using PV = nRT
1
> sin -1 µ sin(A-sin -1
1 1 µ
T3 T
V R 13. For stable equilibrium B M
11. For particle 1
For unstable equilibrium
10m/s B = magnetic field
A M = magnetic moment
14. Before collison
y
240m m 2v
v
x
B

–240 = + 10t – gt2 2m

2
5t2 – 10t – 240 = 0 1 1
Kinetic energy = m(2v) 2 2m(v)2 = 3 mv2
t1 = 8 sec 2 2
For particle 2 After collison
40m/s Applying momentum conservation for inelastic collision
A 2mvjˆ m2viˆ 3m v f
EN 8
vf v
9
1 4mv 2
Kf 3m v 2f
2 3
B K i – Kf 5mv 2 / 3 5
% K = 56%
Ki 3mv 2 9
–240 = 40t – gt2 Volume
2 15.
5t2 – 40t – 240 = 0 v avg
LL
t2 = 12 sec 1
2
V1 T
for 0 < t < 8 sec arel = 0
For adiabatic process
straight line x-t graph
T V1–
for 8 < t < 12 sec arel = – g 1
downward parabola V1 T –1/ 2 V 2

for t > 12 sec Both particles comes to rest comparing

A

1
12. q
2
16. By principle of superosition

GM R2 3G M
V – 2
3 3R –
2R 4 2 R
8
2
–11 GM GM GM
–
8R 8R R
f1 f2
For all light to come out from face AC angle of emergence
e 90 17.
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

Apply Snell's Law at face AC F A

µ sin r2 = 1 sin e
B 100
1
r2 = sin–1 µ
(if e = 90)
20 f1 100
1 for equllibrrium of A
r1 = A – sin–1 ( r1 + r2 = A) f1 = 20
µ
for equllibrrium of B
Apply Snell's law at face AB f2 = f1 + 100
1 sin = µsin(r1 ) f2 = 120 N
190 Physics Gutka
18. It behaves as a dipole.
R
4. For PV n = constant, C CV but R = C P – CV
1 n

+
+ R CP CV C CP
+ + 1 n n
–– –– C CV C CV C CV
– ––
1mA 100
G
5. 10A
z2 10A
19. K = 13.6 2 as n decreases K increases
n
z2 R
U= 27.2
n2 as n decrease (100 ) (1mA) = R(10) R = 0.01
U & T decrease 6. Charge in the region between a and r
z2
T= 13.6
n2
20. (A) Franck-Hertz experiment explains disrete energy levels
of atom r
(B) Photo-electric experiment explain particle nature of light
(C) Davison Germer experiment explain wave nature of Q a
electron.
JEE(MAIN)-2016 b
ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 2 1 3 2 2 4 1 1 r
A r2 a2
3µF
EN Q1 (4 r 2 dr) 4 A 2 A(r 2 a2 )
r 2
1. a
4µF +6µc –6µc
+18µc –18µc K Q 2 A(r 2 a 2 ) K(Q 2 Aa 2 )
+24µc –24µc Now E 2 AK
2
r r2
2µF 9µF
Q
+16µc –16µc It is constant if Q = 2 Aa 2 A=
+ –
2 a2

8V P
LL
Q4 F = 24 µC and Q 9 F = 18 µC
h
KQ 9 109 (42 10 6 ) =2h
sin30°
So E = = N/C = 420 N/C h
r2 30 30
7.
2. Equation of process AB, 30°
from y = mx + c, Q x R
P0 P0
A

here m and c 3P0 P V 3P0 Energy lost by the ball, over the parts PQ and QR are euqal
V0 V0
mgcos30°(2h) = mgx x 2 3m 3.5m
Now by using PV = nRT By using work energy theorem, W = KE
P0 V0 3V V2 1
We have T mgh mgcos30 (2h) mgx 0 0.29
nR V0 V02 2 3
dT
For maximum temperature, 0 2A 2A
2
5
dV 8. At x ,v A2 A
3 3 3
dT P0 V0 3 2V 3
0 V V0
dV nR V0 V02 2 Now v new 3v 5A

P0 V0 9 9 9P0 V0 So new amplitude is given by, v new

2
A new x2
Therefore, Tmax
nR 2 4 4nR
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

2
3. Given 2 R = = 4a 2A 7A
5A A 2new A new
3 3
0I 0I
BA
2R 80V
9. Resistance of arc lamp, R 8
10A
0I 8 2 0I Vrms
BB 4 [sin 45 sin 45 ] 220
4 (a / 2) With AC supply, irms 10
R2 X2L
82 X 2L

BA 2 420
Therefore XL 2 fL 420 L 0.065H ( 2
10)
BB 8 2 100
 Physics Gutka 191
JEE(MAIN)-2017 2 m 2 R2 2 R2
2 2
or
ANSW ER K EY 3 3 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 2
3
3
4 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 4 3 2 or
R 2 R 2
11
1 5.

1. (1) 2
mgsin
On interchanging Cell & Galvanometer.
mg
R1 R2
Taking torque about pivot = I
G 2
m 3g
(2) mgsin = = sin
R4
2 3 2
R3
hC
6. Using E =

hC
On balancing condition for 1
–E – (–2E) =
1
R1 R2
....(1)
R3 R4 hC
=
EN 1
E
R1 R2
4E hC
for –E – – =
G
2
3 2

3hC 1 1
R3 R4 = =r=
2
E 2 3
On balancing condition
R1 R3 7. Current
LL
....(2) 10A
R2 R
As we see both equation (1) & (2) are same. So 4 statement is th

false.
2. Refer NCERT Page No. 526
Three frequencies are contained m + c, c – m & c
3. As parallel beam incident on diverging lens if forms virtual 0.5 sec time
image at v1 = –25 cm from the diverging lense which works as
A

a object for the converging lense (f = 20 cm)

q=
R
= change in flux

q= I dt = Area of current-time graph

f = –25 cm f = 20 cm
1
15 cm = 10 0.5 = 2.5 coloumb
2
So for converging lens u = –40 cm, f = 20 cm
1 1 1 q=
Final image R
V 40 20
= 2.5 × 100 = 250 wb
V = 40 cm from converging lenses.
I
m 2 mR 2 m 2 8. T=2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

4. I or I R2 ....(1)] MB
12 4 4 3
I = 7.5 × 10–6 kg – m2
Also m = R2 2 m Put in equation (1)
R M = 6.7 × 10–2 Am2

By substituting value in the formula

m 2 m
I T = .665 sec
4 3
for 10 oscillation, time taken will be
dI m 2 m
For maxima & minima 2
0 Time = 10 T = 6.65 sec
d 4 3
Answer option 3
 192 Physics Gutka
After collision 2. C
V M M –
9. m m V1 V2
B
2 2
rest a A
By conservation of linear momentum
b
m
mv = mv1 + v2
2 c
2v = 2v1 + v2 ....(1) K qA K qB K qC
by law of collision VB
rb rb rc
v2 v1
e 1 4 a2 4 b2 4 c2
u1 u 2 VB
4 0 b b c
u = v2 – v1 ....(2)
By equation (1) and (2) a2 b2
VB c
v 4v 0 b
v1 ; v2
3 3
U k
h h 3. F=
1 ; 2 r r3
p1 p2
Since it is performing circular motion
1 2
mv 2 k 1 k
2 1 F= K.E., k = mv 2 =
r r3 2 2r 2
Option (4)
k k
10 . Due to thermal expansion Total energy = U + k = = Zeroo
2r 2 2r 2
v
3 T 5
v 4. Q = (kC) V = 90pF (20V) = 3000 pC = 3nC
3
Due to External pressure

v
v

Equating both w 1 get

P
K
EN induced charges on dielectric

Qind = Q 1
1
3nC 1
3
1.2nC
K 5
P
3 T 1 k
K 5. Frequency = 1012
2 m
P
T 108
3 K where m = mass of one atom = 10 3 kg
LL

11 . Doppler effect in light (speed of observer is not very small 6.02 1023
compare to speed of light) 1 k
3
6.02 1023 = 10 12 K = 7.1 N/m
1 1 v/c 1 1/ 2 108 10
f fsource 10 GHz 6. Let initial speed of neutron is v 0 and kinetic energy is K.
1 v/c 1 1/ 2
Case I : Collision with deutrorium:
= 17.3 GHz
v0 v1 v2
JEE(MAIN)-2018 n d n d
A

m 2m m 2m
ANSW ER K EY by momentum conservation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 mv0 = mv1 + 2mv 2 v1 + 2v2 = v 0
4 1 2 4 1 4 1 2 2 2 by e = 1 v2 – v 1 = v 0

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2v0 v0
v2 = ; v1 = –
4 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 3
2
21 22 23 1 1 v
mv20 m 0
4 4 3 2 2 3 8 .
Fractional loss, Pd = 89
1. In diffraction 1 9
mv02
d sin 30º = 2
Case II : Collision with carbon nucleus
d d 60º v0 v1 v2
n c n c
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

2 m 12m m 12m
Young's fringe width by momentum conservation
[d' – separation between two slits] mv 0 mv1 12mv 2 v1 12v 2 v0
D 2 d 50 10 2 by e = 1 v2 – v1 = v0
10
d' 2 d' 2v 0 11v 0
v2 ; v1
13 13
10 6
50 10 2 Now fractional loss of energy
10 –2 = d' = 25 m 2
2 d' 1 1 11v 0
mv 20 m
2 2 13 48
Pe = 0.28
1 2 169
mv 0
2
 Physics Gutka 193
7. Without shunting condition : 12 . Initial Final
p

m m m m
52cm v0 v1 v2
1 1 3 1 2
G mv12 + mv 22 = mv0
2 2 2 2
Es,r
= 52 × x ...(1) 3 2
s
v12 v 22 v0
when balanced 2
where, x = potential gradient of wire. from momentum conservation
mv 0 = m(v 1 + v 2 ) ...(2)
with shunting condition p
(v 1 + v 2 ) 2 = v 0 2
On balancing
40cm v 20
v12 v 22 2v1 v2 v02 2v 1 v 2 =
Es 2
Es r 40 x
r R G 3 2 v 20
Es,r (v 1 – v 2 ) 2 = v12 v22 – 2v 1 v 2 = v0 2v 20
On solving :
2 2
v1 – v2 = 2v0
R
(1) 1 52 c
r = 1.5 13 . Speed of light in medium, v
(2) r 40 2
1
r R 1 1 c
But v
8. Sin ce the carrier frequen cy is distributed as band width r 0 r 0 r

frequency, so ( r = 1 as medium is non-magnetic)

10% of 10 GHz = n × 5 kHz r1 1
where n = no of channels So
r2 4
10 14 . In this question option (2) and (4) are the corresponding
10 109 n 5 103
100 EN position - time graph and velocity –position graph of option
n = 2 × 10 5 telephonic channels (3) and its distance – time graph is given as
distance

9.
I I I cos2 I cos4
2 2 2 time 12V 1
Hence incorrect graph is option (1)
LL

I I 1 1 12 13
cos4 cos 4 = cos = = 45° 37 13V 2
2 8 4 2 15 . 1 2 volt
1 1 3
10 . Say resistances are R and 1000 – R
1 2

R 1000–R 2 1 2
req = 10
2 1 3
A

G 37 V
Now its equivalent circuit is : 2/3
3
100– 37 / 3 37
i= A
2 32
R 10
Case I : ...(i) 3 10
1000 R 100
R 10 37 370
Case II : ...(ii) V 10 = i × 10 = 10 11.56 volt
1000 R (100 ) 10 32 32
by multiplying (i) and (ii)
1 2 1 1
( 10) 16 . Force = m 2
R= n 1
1 Rn Rn 1
(100 )(110 ) R 2

n 1
2 2
= 55 cm 2
11000 210 10 Time period T = R 2

R 55
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

by putting in (i) R = 550 1 1

1000 R 45 17 . hv = E0
n12 n 22
11 . MOI of removed part about axis passing through COM & for Lyman series for series limit n 2 = , n1 = 1
to plane of disc = I cm + Md 2 hv L = E0 [1] ...(1)
(M) (R / 3)2 4R 2 MR 2 for p-fund series
= M for series limit n 2 = , n 1 = 5
2 9 2
so MOI of remaining portion 1
hv p = E0 ...(2)
= [MOI of whole disc – MOI of removed part] 25
By dividing equation (1) and (2)
R2 MR 2 MR 2
= (9M) [8] Iremaining = 4MR 2 25
2 2 2 L
v p = v L/25
p 1
 194 Physics Gutka
100 20 1000 JEE(MAIN)-2019
18 . Pavg = Vrms I rms cos = cos 45º = watt
2 2 2 ANSWER KEY
I 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
wattless current = I rms sin = 0 sin = sin45º = 10 A
2 2 2 4 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 4

19 . In an adiabatic process : PV = constant

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
and, PV = nRT, gives 2 3 1 1 3 4 4 2 2 2
1
1
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 V1 T2 V1
V 1
T2 = T1 4 4 2 4 2 3 3 2 1 2
T V2 T1 V2 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
5
1 4 3 4 3 3 4 2 4 2 2
5 V 3
monoatomic gas : = T2 = (300 K) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
3 2V
2 1 3 2 4 2 3 3 4 1
= 189 K (final temperature) 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Change in internal energy
1 4 1 4 4 1 4 2 3 2
f 3 25 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
U = n R T= 2 ( 111) = –2.7 kJ
2 2 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 2 2 3
P 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
20 . Bulk Modulus, K
dV 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 4
V 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
mg 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 2 4 4 3 1
here P , dV = –4 r 2 dr & V r
a 3 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
mg / a dr mg
EN 1 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 2 4
So K 101 102
4 r 3Ka
4 r 2 dr / r 3 3 3
3
1. 20V i1 xV i2 10V
Y
21 . Velocity of wave = A C B

2
9.27 1010 3 927
= = 10
2.7 103 27 i
LL

30 0
103 6 103 m / s
5 Let voltage at C is equal to xV
Since rod is clamped at middle fundamental wave shape is as KCL : i1 + i2 = i

follow 20 x 10 x x 0
x = 10
2 4 2
Therefore i = 5 A.
A N A
A

2. Color code :
/2 Red violet orange silver
L = 2L 1.2 m R = 27 × 103 ± 10%
2 = 27 k ± 10%
v 6 103
v=f f= 4.9 kHz B N 100
1.2 3. Coercivity = H = ni i 5.2 = 2600 A/m
0
0.2
p
22 . F= 2n mvcos45º 4. Maximum speed is at mean position (equilibrium). F = kx
t
F
x
F 2n mv cos 45º 45º k
Pressure = WF + Wsp = KE
A Area 45º
1 2 1 2
Fx – kx mvmax 0
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

23 27 3 1 2 2
2 10 3.3 10 10
2 2
= = 2.35 × 10 3 N/m 2 F 1 F 1 2 F
2 10 4
F k mvmax v max
k 2 k 2 mk
23 . IP = I 0 = + 7M(3R) 2 v
5. j= E = nevd ne d ne
E
MR 2 181
7 6 M(2R)2 63MR 2 MR 2 1 1 1
2 2 Now = 0.4 m
nee e 1019 1.6 10 19
1.6
 Physics Gutka 195
1/ 2
Mg M g2 a 2 n2
12. Half life of A = n2 = t1/2 = = 1
6. Here 60 & 60.5 A

Bt
RB N0e 3t
60.5 g2 a 2 0.5
4
g2 a2 at t = t At
e
1 RA N0e
60 g2 60 g2
Bt 4t
e e B 4
2
a 1 g g
1 2 1 a n2 n2
g 30 30 5 So t1/2 =
B 4
dx dy
7. ky, kx
dt dt initial position
dy
dy dt x
Now, ydy = xdx 13.
dx dx y 30°
dt final position
Integrating both side y2 = x2 + c Work done by gravity from initial to final position is,
mg
W mg sin 30
2 4
S According to work energy theorem W
1 2
8. I
2
Screen
10cm 10cm 1m 2 mg 3g 3 10
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 30 rad / sec
f 5cm 2 3 4 2 2 0.5
v u f 10 10 f
14. B = B0sin ( × 107ct) + B0sin (2 × 107ct)
1 EN since there are two EM waves with different frequency, to get
Shift due to slab = t 1 in the direction of incident ray
maximum kinetic energy we take the photon with higher
frequency
2 1 1 1 95
1.5 1 0.5 again, v 10.55cm 2 = 10 c
7
3 v 9.5 5 9
(6.6 10 34 )(107 3 108 )
1 2 E ph h = 12.375 eV
9. Ki mv0 1.6 10 19
2 KE max = E ph – = 12.375 – 4.7 = 7.675 eV 7.7 eV
From linear momentum conservation 15. vx = –a sin t ; vy = a cos t ; vz = a
LL

mv 0 v v 2x v 2y v 2z 2a
mv0 = (2m + M) vf vf
2m M 16. For A & B let time taken by A is t0
1 x
mv 20
Ki 2
6 2
6
Kf 1 mv 0
2m M u =0 vA = a 1t0
2 2m M
A

vB = a 2(t0 + t)
2m M M from ques.
6 4 vA – vB = v = (a1 – a2)t0 – a2t ....(i)
m m
1 2 1 2
xB = xA = a 1t 0 a 2 t0 t
I 2 2
10. I = neAvd vd
neA a1 t 0 a2 t0 t
1.5 a2 a2 t0 a2t
vd = 0.02 m/s ....(ii)
9 1028 1.6 10 19
5 10 6
putting t0 in equation
a2t
v = (a1 – a2) a 2t
a1 a2

= a1 a2 a2 t a2t = a1a 2 t
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

11. d Central maxima

Pout VS I S 23 I S
17. 0.9 IS 45A
Pin VP I P 230 5
18. In flow volume = outflow volume
Path difference : dsin = n
where d = seperation of slits & = wave length 0.74 4 74 100 740
4 10 2gh 2gh
n = no. of maximas 60 240 24
0.32 × 10–3 sin 30° = n × 500 × 10–9 n = 320
740 740 2 74 74
Hence total no. of maximas observed in angular range 2gh 10 h
–30° 30° is = 320 + 1 + 320 = 641 24 24 10 2 24 24
h 4.8m
196 Physics Gutka
GM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19. At height r from center of earth. orbital velocity = 28. 1 1
r 2f2 f1
1
R f2
2
R
By energy conservation
GMm 1 1 2 1
KE of 'm' + 0 0 2 2
– 2
=1
r R 2R
(At infinity, PE = KE = 0) T2 T3 T4
2
29. Here 1 = 1 1
GMm GM T1 T2 T3
KE of 'm' = m mv 2
r r T2 T3 T
= 4 T22 T1 T3 & T32 T2 T4
1 T1 T2 T3
20. Path difference = d sin d = 0.1 × mm = 2500nm
40 T24 T12 T32 T12 T2 T4 T2 (T12 T4 )1/ 3
or bright fringe, path difference must be integral multiple of . and similiarly T3 (T1 T42 )1/ 3
2500 = n 1 = m 2
1 = 625, 2 = 500 (from m=5) V R RV
(for n = 4) 30. Measured value 0.95 R =
V V R RV
R RV
Qin
0.95 × 30 = 0.05 R V RV = 19 × 30 = 570

I mR 2 1 / 2mR 2
21. h 31. T= 2 Th = 2 & TC = 2
B 2 B B
Qout 32. Ne20 2He4 + C12
Since height of water column is constant therefore, water inflow 8.03 × 20 2 × 7.07 × 4 + 7.86 × 12
rate (Qin ) = water outflow rate EN EB = (BE)react – (BE)product = 9.72 MeV
Qin = 10–4 m3s–1
Q out Au 10 4
2gh 33. 5d 2d d
2 2( 5 2)
1
10 –4 = 10 –4 20 h h m = 5cm
20 R = 7 .8 m m
128kg 128 50g 20 128
22. m3 3 3 20 = 40 units 1.34 1 1.34 1
25cm 4 64 34. v = 30.7 mm
v 7.8
LL
mg 3mg = 1 = 1 .3 4
23. N mg N
2 2
Now, work done 35. For closed organ pipe, resonate frequency is odd multiple of
2 2
fundamental frequency.
3mg 1 2 3mg t (2n + 1) f0 20,000
W NS gt W
2 2 4 (f o is fundamental frequency = 1.5 KHz)
u 2 sin 2 n = 6
A

24. R and A = R2 A R2 A u4 Total number of overtone that can be heared is 7. (0 to 6).

g
36. Thermal energy of N molecule
4
A1 u14 1 1 N 3
Therefore 3 3 3
A2 u 42 2 16 = N kT RT nRT PV
2 NA 2 2 2
25. Velocity of wave on string V T 8
1000 40m / s 3 m 3 2
5 P 4 10 4 = 1.5 × 104
2 8 2 8
v 40
Now, wavelength of wave m order will 104
n 100
Separation between successive nodes, 37. R1 = 32 × 10 = 320
for wheat stone bridge
20
m = 20 cm R1 R2 320 80
100 R3 = 160
R3 R4 R3 40
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

34
6.6 10
2 2 12
R3 = 160
P (h / ) 7.5 10
26. KE 31
J = 25 KeV
2m 2m 2 9.1 10
Brown Blue Brown
12500
27. F 38. Energy of photon = 12.75eV
980
Electron will excite to n= 4
3 2 2F Since 'R' n2
=I FR = MR = Radius of atom will be 16a0
2 3MR
 Physics Gutka 197
39. Momentum per second carried by liquid per second is Av2 6
I 20 10
1 48. Where I 20 N / m 2
net force due to reflected liquid = 2 Av2 H 10 6
4
20 1
1 10 3 = 0.33 × 10–3 = 3.3 × 10–4
net force due to stopped liquid = Av 2 60 10 3
3
4 49. Potential difference across AB will be equal to battery
3 equivalent across CD
Total force = Av 2
4 E1 E 2 E3 1 2 3
3 2 r1 r2 r3 6
net pressure = v VAB VCD 1 1 1 2V
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
1 r1 r2 r3 1 1 1
40. c
0 0 50. Rg = 20
NL = NR = N = 30
1
v= [For transparent medium µ r µ 0 ] I
k 0 0 FOM = = 0.005 A/Div.
c
k n 1
v Current sentivity = CS =
0.005 I
1 1 Igmax = 0.005 × 30 = 15 × 10–2 = 0.15
0 E 20c = intensity = 2
0 kE v
2 2 Now 15 = 0.15 [20 + R] 100 = 20 + R = 80
E 20 kv n 2 E0 PV
E 20 v kE 2 v n 51. VT = K V K PV2 = constant
E2 c n E nR
B20 c B2 v B0 1 R
similarly C CV (For polytropic process)
2 0 2 0 B n 1 x
41. y = 0.03 sin(450 t – 9x) R 3R R
EN C
450 T T 1 2 2 2
v 50m / s v 2500
k 9 R
T = 2500 × 5 × 10 –3 = 12.5 N Q = nC T T
2
42. v0 = g R h gR 52. Only electric field do work
ve = 2g R h 2gR (1,1)

So W qE.dS q (2iˆ 3j).(dxi

ˆ ˆ dyj)
ˆ
v ve v0 2 1 gR (0,0)
LL
1 1
1 q 2dx 3dy 5q
43. K= m 2 A 2 cos 2 t
2 0 0

1 2 2 2 1 Q2
U = m A sin t 53. Ui CE 2
2 2 2C
K 1
cot 2 t = cot 2 210 = CE
2
1 CE 2 Q2
U 90 3 Uf
2 4c 2 4 8C
A

44. Let amount of ice be m

According to principal of calorimeter Q2 Q2 3Q 2
Energy dissipated
heat taken by ice = heat given by water 2C 8C 8C
20 × 2.1 × m + (m – 20) × 334 = 50 × 4.2 × 40 dU
376 m = 8400 + 6680 m = 40.1g 54. F kr
dr
45. Since voltage across zener diode must be less than 10V
mv 2
therefore it will not work in breakdown region, & its resistance So kr v r
r
will be infinite & current through it = 0
nh
correct answer is (4) But mvr so r n1/ 2 and E n
2
46. Since D m = (µ – 1)A & on increasing the wavelength,
µ decreases & hence Dm decreases. Therefore correct answer E
55. Case I ig C 0 ..(i)
is (2) 220 R g
47. From lens equation
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

1 1 1 1 1 1 60
v m E 5 C 0
v u f v ( 20) 0.3 197 ig
Case II 5R g Rg 5 5
60 220
v 5 Rg
m 197
u 20 5E C 0
velocity of image wrt. to lens is given by vI/L = m2vO/L ..(ii)
225R g 1100 5
direction of velocity of image is same as that of object
vO/L = 5 m/s
225R g 1100
60 1
2 5 Rg = 22
vI/L = (5) = 1.16 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens 1100 5R g
197 20
198 Physics Gutka
iC
1 1 1
56. From = ( – 1) –
f rel R1 R 2 iB C 1000
Focal length of lens will change hence image disappears from B E
the screen. 65.
VB 10V
57. y 5 sin(3 t) 3 cos(3 t) = 10sin 3 t
3 At saturation state, VCE becomes zero
10V
2 2 2 iC = 10mA
Amplitude = 10 cm & T = s 1000
3 3
iC
58. At saturation, VCE = 0 now current gain factor =
iB
VCC
VCE = VCC – ICRC IC = 10mA
R C = 5 × 10 A
–3
iB = 40 A
250
IC i
5 10 –3
Given = So IB = = 25 A
dc IB 200 3V; 1
66. 1
At input side
VBB = IB RB + VBE = (25mA) (100k ) + 1V
VBB = 3.5 V Resistance of wire AB = 400 × 0.01 = 4
59. Ig = 4 × 10–4 × 25 = 10–2 A
3
i= 0.5A
G ig 6
Now voltmeter reading = i (Resistance of 50 cm length)
50 R = (0.5A) (0.01 × 50) = 0.25 volt

2.5 = (50 + R) 10
2.5V
–2
R = 200
EN 67. Limit of resolution of telescope =

9
1.22
D
60. I= 2 1.22 500 10
0c E rms
= E0c(cBrms)2 = =305 × 10–9 radian
200 10 2
I
Brms = 10 4 T m
0c3
LL
vd M
61. Reynolds Number = 68.

Volume flow rate = v × r 2

minimum energy required (E) = – (Potential energy of object
3
100 10 1 2 at surface of earth)
v 4
m/s
60 25 10 3
GMm GMm
=
A

10 3
2 10 10 2 R R
Reynolds Number = 2 10 4
10 3 3 Now Mearth = 64 Mmoon
order 10 4 4 3 4 3
62. When red is replaced with green 1st digit changes to 5 so new . Re 64. Rm Re = 4Rm
3 3
resistance will be 500

Cd E moon Mmoon R earth 1 4 E

k 15 10 12 500 10 6
15 5 Now . Emoon =
63. k 8.465 E earth Mearth R moon 64 1 16
0A 8.86 10 12 104 8.86
69. A = A0e – t

A0
A = after 10 oscillations
2
/6
After 2 seconds
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

64. A0 n2
A/2 = A 0e – (2) 2 = e2 n2 = 2 =
2 2
A = A 0e – t

A0 n2
n t n1000 t
V(t) = 220 sin(100 t) volt A 2

3 n10 6 n10
1 2 t t
time taken, t 3 sec = 3.3 ms n2 n2
100 300
t 19.931 sec t 20 sec
 Physics Gutka 199
75. Input current = 15 × 10–6
70. E 20x 10 ˆi
output current = 3 × 10–3
1
1
V1 – V2 = 20x 10 dx = 10x 2
10x resistance output = 1000
5
5
Vinput = 10 × 10–3
= 10(25 – 5 – 1 – 1) = 180 V
f = 2 0 cm Now Vinput = rinput × iinput
10 × 10–3 = rinput × 15 × 10–6
20cm
I 2000
71. O rinput = = 0.67 K .
3 0 cm 6 0 cm 3
Voutput 1000 3 10 –3
8 0 cm voltage gain = V = =300
Image formed by lens input 10 10–3
76. Momentum p = mv .....(1)
1 1 1
2 2
v u f u –v
and for MUG h = ...(2)
1 1 1 2g
v 30 20 p
v = +60 cm
If image position does not change even when mirror is removed u 2 – p2 / m2
h=
it means image formed by lens is formed at centre of curvature 2g h
of spherical mirror.
Radius of curvature of mirror = 80 – 60 = 20 cm
1
focal length of mirror f = 10 cm 77. Kinetic energy KE = I 2 = k 2
2
for virtual image, object is to be kept between focus and pole.
maximum distance of object from spherical mirror for
which virtual image is formed, is 10cm.
EN 2 =
2k
I
2

=
2k
I
C B d 2k d 2k
2m v0
72. v d I d I
A v /2 m m
78. Maximum Electric field E = (B) (c)
let mass of B and C is m each.
ˆ
By momentum conservation E 0 = (3 × 10–5)c – j
LL
mv
2mv0 = mv – v = 4v0 ˆ
2 E1 = (2 × 10–6)c –i
pA = 2mv0 pB = 4mv0 pc = 2mv0
Maximum force
h –5 ˆ –6 ˆ
De-Broglie wavelength =
p Fnet qE = qc –3 10 j – 2 10 i

h h h F0max = 10–4 × 3 × 108 (3 10 –5 ) 2 (2 10 –6 )2

= ; = ; =
A

A B C
2mv 0 4mv 0 2mv 0 = 0.9N
L F0
73. For a simple pendulum T = 2 Frms = = 0.6 N (approx)
g eff 2
situation 1 : when pendulum is in air geff =g
79. M B C = i N A B
situation 2 : when pendulum is in liquid

liquid 1 15g 10 6
geff = g 1 – g 1– = 10–3 × 10–4 × 175 × B B = 10–3
body 16 16 180
80. Force on the surface (25% reflecting and rest absorbing)
L
2
T' 15g /16 4T 25 2I 75 I 125 I
So, T' F=
T L 15 100 C 100 C 100 C
2
g
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

74. Speed of wave from wave equation 125 50

= = 20.83 × 10–8 N.
100 3 108
(coeffecient of t) 1000 1000
v= – =–
(coeffecient of x) (–3) 3 81. Total Area = A1 + A2 + ...... A7

since speed of wave = A + A + ......... 7 times

T
= 37.03 m2.
1000 273 Addition of 7 terms all having 2 terms beyond decimal, so final
so = T = 277.41 K
3 T answer must have 2 terms beyond decimal (as per rules of
336
significant digits.)
T = 4.41°C
200 Physics Gutka
89. P0 + gd1 = P1

vc P0 + gd2 = P2

m
v M = 4m vc
82. m h g(d2 – d1) = P2 – P1
rest
103 × 10 (d2 – d1) = 3.03 × 106
Applying Linear momentum conservation
mv = (m + M)vc d2 – d1 = 303 m 300 m
v
vc = 2
5 qE
90. geff = g2
applying work energy theorem m
1 1
–mgh = (m + M)vc2 – mv2
2 2
T= 2 g eff =
2
2v2 qE
2
solve, h = g2
5g m
m 91. Numerical aperature of the microscope is given as
83. = = 1.67 × 10–8 m
ne2
0.61
84. As q = CV NA
d
Hence slope of graph will give capacitance. Slope will be more
Where d = minimum sparation between two points to be seen
in parallel combination. Hence capacitance in parallel should
be 50 F & in series combination must be 8 F. as distinct

Only in option 40 F & 10 F 0.61 (0.61) (5000 10m 10

)
d
Cparallel = 40 + 10 = 50 F NA 1.25

Cseries =
40 10
40 10
= 8 F
EN = 2.4 × 10–7 m = 0.24

y t=0
m

Vd x
85. = E = J
E 92.

3
1.1 10
=
8 5
LL
1.7 10 6
y = A sin (kx - wt + )
25 10
at x = 0, t = 0, y = 0 and slope is negative =
3 6
1.1 10 25 10 93. E E 0 nˆ sin( t (6y 8z)) E 0 nˆ sin ( t k.r)
= 1.01m 2 / Vs
1.7 10 8 5
where r xiˆ yjˆ zkˆ and k.r 6y 8z k 6jˆ 8kˆ
A0
86. A = A0e–0.1t = ln2 = 0.1t
2 3jˆ 4kˆ
kˆ
A

Direction of propagation ŝ
t = 10 ln2 = 6.93 7 sec 5
87. Av × = Pgain
IC R out 5 10 3 1
P 94. Vgain × 103 106 = 5 ×104
60 = 10 log10 IB R in 100 10 6 20
P0

IC 5 10 3
R out 10 4 Pgain (Vgain ) (5 104 ) = 2.5 × 106
P = 106 = 2
=
2 2 = 104 = 100 Ib 100 10 6
R in 100
95. 20 × 50 × 10–6 = 10–3 A
1 1 1 v v v v 2
88. 1 1–m = m=1– 100 R1
v u f u f f f V1 = R1 = 1900
10 3
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

a
At v = a, m1 = 1 – 10
f V2 = (2000 R 2 ) R2 = 8000
10 3
a b
At v = a + b, m2 = 1 – 20
f V3 = = 10 × 103 + R3 R3 =10000
10 3
a b a b b
m2 – m1 = c = 1 1 = f=
f f f c
 Physics Gutka 201
V 101. Loudness of sound is given by
96.
E r I I is intensity of sound
dB = 10 log I 0 is reference intensity of sound
internal I0
Resistance Ammeter
I
120 = 10 log 120 = 10logI + 120
R I0
V = E – Ir
when V = V0 = 0 0 = E – Ir I = 1 W/m2
E = r
when I = 0, V = E = 1.5V P 2
r = 1.5 . Also I=
4 r2 4 r2
97. 45º 30º
2 1
B1 B2 r= m = 0.399 m 40 cm
4 2
102. Magnetic field when electromagnetic wave propagates in +z
direction
1 B1 cos 45º 1 B2 cos30º
f1 f2 B = B0 sin (kz – t)
2 I 2 I
where
f1 B1 cos 45º B1
0.7
f2 B2 cos 30º B2 60
B0 = = 2 × 10–7
98. When galvanometer is used as an ammeter shunt is used in 3 108
parallel with galvanometer.

I0
Ig

I0–Ig
G
EN k =
2
0.5 103

= 2 f = 1.5 × 1011

RA JEE(MAIN)-2020
IgG = (I0 – Ig)RA ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LL
Ig 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 4
RA = G
I0 Ig 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
When galvanometer is used as a voltmeter, resistance is used 3 1 1 4 4 3 3 3 2 1
in series with galvanometer.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
G 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 2 2 1
Ig RV 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A

Ig(G + RV) = V = GI0 (given V = GI0 )

1 3 4 4 4 4 3 1 2 1
(I 0 I g )G 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
RV =
Ig 4 3 2 1 2 4 4 1 1 4
2 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
RA Ig
RARV = G2 &
3 4 2 1 4 3 1 2 3 2
RV I0 Ig 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 1
99. q I dt
71 72 73
L/R
E
Rt
EL 1 EL 1 3 1
q 1 e L dt 1. Time period of revolution of electron in nth orbit
0
R R2 e 2.7 R 2
100. We have n2
2 a0
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

2 r Z
2 r2 T n3
VT = ( )g vT r2 V Z T
9
0
V0 Z2
n
since mass of the sphere will be same
3
T2 2
4 4 R 3
8 T2 = 8 × 1.6 × 10–16
R3 = 27. r3 r = T1 1
3 3 3

v1 R2 1 1016
9 Now frequency f2= 7.8 × 1014 Hz.
v2 r2 T2 8 1.6
202 Physics Gutka
2. T
9. B (T)

1.5
lift
1 Saturation
Retentivity magnetization

–50 H
A/m
fr Co-ercivity
2000 g
Let elevator is moving upward with constant speed V.
Tension in cable
T = 2000 g + f r = 20000 + 4000
T = 24000 N Retentivity = 1.0 T
Power P = TV 60 × 746 = (24000) V Co-ercivity = 50 A/m
Saturation = 1.5 T
60 746 1.9 m/s. 10. A1v1 = A2v2
V 1.865
24000
v min A min
v max Amax
1 1 1 2 v2 3 2
3. mgh mv 2 mr mv
2 2 2 r2 4 vmin 2
4.8
vmax = 6.4
4
v gh
3
vmin 9
v
EN vmax = 16
r
l2 l2
5. m m mk 2
12 16
QH
7l 2 11.
k2 W
48
QL
LL
y
6.
QH T1
(0,4) 2.5 kg
QL T and W = QH – QL ....(1)

4 cm QL T
Q 'L T2 and W = QL – Q'L ....(2)
A

x
(0,0) 1.0 kg 3 cm 1.5 kg +Q Q/2 Q/2
(3,0) 12. C C C Q = CV

Let 1 kg as origin and x-y axis as shown Q2 (Q / 2) 2 Q2 1

QL = 2 = CV2
10 1.5 3 2.5 0 2C 2C 4C 4
x cm = 0.9 cm
5 1
10 1.5 0 2.5 4 = × 60 × 10–12 × 4 × 102 = 6nJ
y cm 4
= 2 cm
5 13. M × 540+M × (1) × 60 =200 × 80+200 × 1× (40–0) M=40
7. A non-isotropic solid metal cube has coefficients of linear
GM
x y z 14. Gravitational field on the surface of a solid sphere I g
R2
= 5 × + 5 ×10–5 + 5 × 10–6 10–6
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

GM1 GM2
= (50 + 5 + 5) × 10–6 By the graph 2
2 and 3
(1) (2)2
= 60 × 10–6
M1 1
C = 60. On solving
M2 6
8. T elevater moving with constant speed hence
1 1
T = 6800 + 9200 + 6000 15. sin C
T = 22000 N 3 4/3
power = T·v = 22000 × 3 = 30°
C
6000 = 66000 W
9200
6800
 Physics Gutka 203
rg
16. A B Y
24. W F.dr
0 0 1 ri
0 1
1 0 0
W xdx ydy
0 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 x2
0
y2
1
02 12 12 02
W
2 2 2 2 2 2
B 1 0
W = 1J
17. 1000
25. E1 E 0 ˆjcos( t kx)
Its corresponding magnetic field will be
500 E0 ˆ
B1 k cos( t kx)
c
E2 E 0 kˆ cos( t ky)
5 t
E0 ˆ
dB B2 i cos( t ky)
100 c
dt Net force on charge particle
A = 16 ×4 – 4 × 2 = 56 cm2 qE1 qE 2 qv B1 qv B2
dB 4 4 E0 ˆ E0 ˆ
A 100 10 56 10 qE 0 ˆj qE0 kˆ q(0.8cj)
ˆ k ˆ
q(0.8cj) i
dt c c

P qE 0 ˆj qE 0 kˆ 0.8qE 0 ˆi 0.8qE 0 kˆ
18. vs
F qE 0 [0.8iˆ 1jˆ 0.2k]
ˆ

vgas
vair
air

gas
v gas
300
1
2
v gas
300
2
EN 26. Degree of freedom of a diatomic molecule if vibration is absent=5
Degree of freedom of a diatomic molecule if vibration is
present = 7

v gas 150 2 fA 5 fB 7
CAv R R & C vB R R
2 2 2 2
vgas 150 2
Now n 2 n1 75 2 C Av 5
2 2(1)
CBv 7
LL

n = 106.06 Hz
h
27. Given, de-Broglie wavelength =
19. E B V = (5 × 10 –8 ˆj) × (3 × 10 8 k)
ˆ = 15 ˆi V / m 2mE

20. ig = 1 mA , Rg = 100 h
ig R Rg Also,
V 2m (E E) 2
V = ig(R + Rg )
10 = 1 × 10–3 (R + 100) E E
A

4 E = 3E.
R = 9.9 k E
28. Given on six rotation, reading of main scale changes by 3mm.
1
21. T= 2 1 rotation corresponds to mm
g 2
Also no. of division on circular scale = 50.
4 2
g= 0.5
T2 Least count of the screw gauge will be mm = 0.001cm.
50
g 2 T 0.1 2 1
=
g T 25 50 29.
h
g = 2
4.4%
g
22. Refrigerator cycle is : h =2 2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

1 1 1
1 10 1 For near normal incidence,
Q2 h actual
happ =
Than 9, so
W in

Q2 ref .
9 h
10 h
Q2 = 90 J 2 2
Heat absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is 90J
2 3h 3
h apparent h 2
23. Y = AB.A = AB A = 0 + 0 = 0 2 2 2 4
1
204 Physics Gutka
30. Let amplitude of each wave is A.
(C) V A2 – x2
Resultant wave equation
Vmax at x = 0
t t Vmax = A
= A sin t + A sin + A sin
4 4
T
at t = , x = 0, So Vmax.
4
= A sin t+ 2 A sin t = 2 1 Asin t
(D) KE = PE

Resultant wave amplitude = 2 1 A A

at x .
2
I 2
T
as I A2 so 2 1 at t x A (So not possible)
I0 2
I = 5.8 I0 Work done
di V 100 37.
V L L 10mH Heat supplied
31. 0.25
dt di
3 1 1915 40 125 Q
dt 0.025 10
2 1915 125
D1 D2
A 4V 1 2000 Q
32. 12.7V
2 2040
2040 = 4000 – 2Q
2Q = 1960
Q = 980 J
0V
Diode D1 is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased. 38. Let the length of segment is " "

33. f
VA = 12.7 – 0.7 = 12V.

2
8
4cm , u = –10 cm, v = ?
EN Let N is the no. of fringes in "
and w is fringe width.
We can write
"

D N1 1D N2 2 D
1 1 1 1 1 1 Nw = N
as so d d d
v u f v 10 4
N1 1 = N2 2 16 × 700 = N2 × 400 N2 = 28
1 1 1 1 4 10 40 20 39. In hydrogen atom,
LL
v v
v 10 4 v 40 6 3
E0
En =
20 n2
v 3 2 Where E0 is Ionisation Energy of H.
m = m For transition from (n + 1) to n, the energy of emitted
u 10 3
radiation is equal to the difference in energies of levels.
or image will be real, inverted and unmagnified.
A

E En En
34. As for permanent magnet large retentivity and large coercivity 1

required
1 1
E E0
TA TB n2 (n 1)2
35.
50 cm 50 cm
B (n 1)2 n 2
A E hv E0
25cm n 2 (n 1)2
mg 2mg
2n 1
B = 0 (torque about point B is zero) hv E0 2
1
(TA) × 100 – (mg) × 50 – (2mg) × 25 = 0 n4 1
100 TA = 100 mg n

TA = 1 mg
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

1
36. (A) F = ma n 2
hv E0 n
2
4 1
a = – 2x n 1
n
3T
at displacement zero (x = 0), so a = 0 1
4 Since n >>> 1 Hence, 0
n
F= 0
(B) at t = T displacement (x) = A 2 1
x maximum, So acceleration is maximum. hv E0 v
n3 n3
 Physics Gutka 205
40. Ê kˆ V2 T2
2iˆ – 2 ˆj
2 1 1
B 1 ˆ ˆ V1 T1
B 2iˆ – 2ˆj ˆ
B B̂ (i – j)
| B| 2 2 2
ˆ B
ˆ 8g
Direction of wave propagation = Ĉ = E 1 2 6 12 cm
2g
ˆ 1 ˆ ˆ 1 ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ 1 ˆ ˆ
C kˆ (i – j) (k i – k j) (i j)
2 2 2 180
0

46. 0 = 0.57°
pitch 0.1 cm d
41. LC 0.002 cm
CSD 50 47. DOF = 3 + 3 = 6
So any measurement will be integral f
Multiple of LC. U nRT 3RT
2
So ans. will be 2.124 cm
48. A perfect diamagnetic substance will completely expel the
magnetic field. Therefore, there will be no magnetic field inside
I
the cavity of sphere. Hence the paramagnetic substance kept
inside the cavity will experience no force.
42.

E Q
r 1

R2 L2 49. R
I M .....(1) 4R
4 12
as mass is constant m = V = constant
V = constant
R2L = constant

2RL R 2
dL
dR
0
R2L = constant

.....(2)
EN E
KQ1
r2
4R 3KQ1
V E dr
From equation (1)
R 4R
50. At equilibrium position
dI 2R 2L dL
M 0
dR 4 12 dR K
V0 0 A A .....(i)
LL
R L dL m
0
2 6 dR
K 1
dL V A1 A
Substituting value of from eqution (2) m .....(ii)
dR 2
R L –2L
0 A
2 6 R A1 1
A

A1 = fA f
2 2
R L2 L 3
2 3R R 2 E(j)
43. Bursting of helium balloon is irreversible & adiabatic.
44. P1 = 0.01 = 4T/R1 .....(1)
c(i)
P2 = 0.02 = 4T/R2 .....(2) 51.
Equation (1) (2)
B (k)
1 R2
R1 = 2R2
2 R1 B B0 cos(wt kx)kˆ
Now put t = 0.
V1 R13 8R 32
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

so 8 P ML2 T 3
V2 R 23 R 32 52. S MT 3

A L2
45. V
T2
T2 = 8g Cal H2O Sterm
53.
T1 = 2g (12m, 6kg) 20gm 180gm m
V1 1
25o C 25o C 100 o C
V2 2 = 6cm T1 200 × 1 × (31 – 25) = m × 540 + m × 1 × (100 – 31)
2 kg
206 Physics Gutka
54. m B 59. R = R0 e– t

NI A B ln R = ln R0 – t

6 10
1 = TA = ln 2
105 = 500 × 3×10 –4 × B A
10 6
2

B = 20 6 5 ln2
B = TB =
55. Given T to C 1.5 m
5 6
C to C 5m 2 5 ln2
C = TC =
5 2
T to C = (2n1 + 1)
2
10 5 15
: : ::2:1:3
C to C = n2 6 6 6
60. vi = 103
1.5 (2n1 1)
3n 2 10n1 5 1000
5 2n 2 i=
220
n1 = 1, n2 = 5 = 1
2
n1 = 4, n2 = 15 = 1/3 50
loss = i2R = 2
n1 = 7, n2 = 25 = 1/5 11
56. When bar magnet is entering with constant speed, flux will
change and an e.m.f. is induced, so galvanometer will deflect 1000
efficiency = 100 96%
in positive direction. 1000 i2 R

reading of galvanometer will be zero.

EN
When magnet is completely inside, flux will not change, so

When bar magnet is making on exit, again flux will change

and on e.m.f. is induced in opposite direction to not of (a),
61. Potential of centre = V =
kq
R

so galvanometer will deflect in negative direction. K( q)

VC =
R
Looking at options, option (3) is correct.
+q
O –q –q
LL
A
+q 2E
Q 2E +q
57. B 2E 2E
–q –q
P 2E
C
+q +q
A

–q
A B C
K(0)
0 0 0 0 VC = 0
1 0 0 0 R
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 Electric field at centre E B E
1 1 0 0 Let E be electric field produced by each charge at the centre,
1 0 1 0 then resultant electric field will be zero by symmetry.
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 T1 B
58. For paramagnetic material 62. A
According to curies law T2 C
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

1 1 1 1
T Teff T1 T2
1
1 T1 2 T2 T1T2 1000 100
T Teff = 9.09
T1 T2 110 11
6 I
4 24 Teff 9
0.4 0.3

0.3
I= 0.75 A / m
0.4
 Physics Gutka 207
i 68.
63. Figure of Merit = C =
P Q

3
6 10
=C= 3 10 3 Am 2
2 Ldi
5
dt
v min
VP – 5 – 30 + 2 × 1 = VQ
rmin rmax
VP – VQ = 33 volt
64. planet
vmax
Ans. 33.00

By angular momentum conservation R

rminvmax = rmaxvmin ... (i)

v max
Given v min 69.
6 µ
from equation (i)

rmin v min 1
rmax v max 6 R1 = R2 = R
Ans. (1) Power (P)
Refractive index is assume (µ )

1 2
P ( 1) ....(i)
EN f R

Vin 10µF V 0(t) R'

65.
µ

t
V0 t Vin 1 e RC 1 1
P' ( 1) ....(ii)
LL
f' R'
at t = 5µs
3
P' P
5 10 6 2
103 10 10 9
V0 t 5 1 e = 5 (1 – e–0.5) = 2V 1 3 2
( 1) ( 1)
R' 2 R
Now Vin = 0 means discharging
A

R
t R'
V0 t 2e RC
2e 0.5 = 1.21 V 3
70. Conceptual
Now for next 5 µs Option (1) is correct
t Ammeter :- In series connection, the same current flows
V0 t 5 3.79 e RC
through all the components. It aims at measuring the curent
flowing through the circuit and hence, it is connected in series.
after 5 µs again
Voltmeter :- A voltmeter measures voltage change between
V0(t) = 2.79 Volt 3V
two points in a circuit, So we have to place the voltmeter in
Most approperiate Ans. (1) parallal with the circuit component.
66. Least count of screw gauge 71. Only in case-I, MLHS > MRHS i.e.
Pitch total mass on reactant side is greater then that on the product
0.5
mm 1 10 5 m side. Hence it will only be allowed.
no. of division on circular scale 50
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

72. Use significant figures. Answer must be upto three significant

= 10 µm
figures.
Zero error in positive
Ans. (2) 73. I B = (30 – 20) = 10µA
IC = (4.5 – 3) mA = 1.5mA
1 L 1 80 10 3 1 200
67. Q 40 103 = 2 IC 1.5mA
R C 100 2 10 6 100 100 150
ac
IB 10 A

ac = 150
208 Physics Gutka
JEE(MAIN)-2021
ANSWER KEY 2. Before Collision After Collision
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 v1
2 1 2 4 3 2 1 2 2 3 m A 30°
A B
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 m 9 m/s m m 30°
B v2
1 2 2 4 3 1 2 2 3 1 y
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
2 4 4 4 2 3 1 4 2 1 x
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
4 4 3 2 3 3 2 2 4 1 From conservation of momentum along y-axis.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Piy Pfy
2 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 1 4
0 + 0 = mv1 sin 30° ˆj + mv2 sin 30° ( ˆj)
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
mv2 sin 30° = mv1 sin 30°
2 2 2 1 1 3 4 1 1 3
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 v1
v2 = v1 or = 1
4 2 2 4 3 2 2 4 2 4 v2
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
2GM
3 4 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 4 3. Ve
R
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
2 1 2 3 3 1 1 3 4 1 M1 M2
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 R1 R2
1 2 1 1 4 3 3 3 4 3
EN M1R2 = M2R1
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Hence reason R is not correct.
2 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 Gmx
4. Gravitational field of ring
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 2 3/2
R x2
4 4 2 1 3 2 3 3 1 4
121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130
GmM 8R
4 1 3 1 4 3 2 2 2 2 Force between sphere & ring 3/ 2
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 R2 8R 2
LL
4 1 4 4 4 3 3 2 1 4
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 GmM 8
2 4 4 1 4 4 3 3 4 1 2 27
R
151 152 153 5. For e = 1 & second body at rest
3 2 1 2m 1 u1 2u(M)
V2 2u
m1 m 2 M m
A

d Since M >> m
c.o.m. Fsin60°
1. m 2m
2d/3 d/3
– Fcos60°
3g
G(2m)m
F= = (2m)w2 (d/3) 6.
d2 µN
N
Gm d
= w2
d2 3 F 1
F cos 60° = µN or N ... (1)
2 3 3
3Gm
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

w2 =
d3 & N F sin 60 3g ... (2)
From equation (1) & (2)
3Gm
w = F 1 F 3
d3 3g
2 3 3 2
2 d3 F = g = 10 Newton = 3x
T = = 2
3Gm 10
So x = 3.33
3
 Physics Gutka 209
7. y= x – x2
comparing with trajectory equation vdv x
a= = 10
dx 5 5
1 gx 2
y = x tan –
2 u 2 cos2 x
a = 2 Straight line till x = 200
tan q = a = tan–1 25
1 g for x > 200
= v = constant a = 0
2 u 2 cos2
g a (ms–2)
u2 =
2 cos2
Maximum height : H
18
u 2 sin 2 g sin 2
H= 2
2
2g 2 cos 2g
0 200 400 x(m)
tan 2 2

H= Hence most approriate option will be (1), otherwise it would

4 4 be BONUS.
12. Before Collision
1 2 1
8. mgh = I mv 2
2 2 A 10 3 m/s B
v = wr r Rest
10 kg 20 kg
1 1
mgh = I 2
m 2 2
r After Collision
2 2
10 m/s
2mgh 2
v A
I mr 2 EN 10 kg
9. Draw vt curve
Rest

10 kg
vmax 20 m/s
From conservation of momentum along x axis;
Pi Pf
10 × 10 3 = 200 cos
2
LL
1

3
v max cos =
tan a1 2
t1 ....(1)
1

= 30°
v max 13. Positive zero error = 0.2 mm
& tan a2
t 2 ...(2)
2
Main scale reading = 8.5 cm
t1 a2 Vernier scale reading = 6 × 0.01 = 0.06 cm
A

t2 a1 (1)/(2) Final reading = 8.5 + 0.06 – 0.02 = 8.54 cm

10. Moment of inertia of point mass
14. We know, L m (r v)
= mass × (Perpendicular distance from axis) 2

m Now with respect to A, we always get direction of L along

m
+ve z-axis and also constant magnitude as mvr. But with respect
l/ 2 to B, we get constant magnitude but continuously changing
direction.

45° 3
15. amax = g= × 9.8
m m 7
45°
F = (M + m) amax = 5 amax
l/ 2
= 21 Newton
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

N
T
Moment of Inertia 16. N T
2 2
l l
= m(0)2 + m (l 2) 2 + m +m = 3 ml2 9g
2 2
N + T = 90
11. For 0 x 200
T = m N = 0.5 (90–T)
v = mx + C
1.5 T = 45
1 T = 30
v= x + 10
5
210 Physics Gutka
A B ˆi ˆj kˆ
3 20. Direction of P v̂1
A B 3
1 2
A C 2kˆ
Direction of Q v̂ 2 kˆ
17. A C 2

a = 0.2 m/s
2
Angle between vˆ 1 and vˆ 2

vˆ 1.vˆ 2 1/ 3 1
Writing force equation in vertical direction ˆv1 vˆ 2 1 1 x = 3
3
Mg – N = Ma
70g – N = 70 × 0.2 21. r 10 t 2 ˆi 5 (t 5)ˆj
N = 70 [g - 0.2] = 70 × 9.8
v 20 tiˆ 5 ˆj
N = 686 Newton
Note : Since there is no compressive normal from the sides, L m(r v) m[10 t 2 ˆi 5 (t 5)j]
ˆ [20 tiˆ 5 ˆj]
hence friction will not act.
Hence option 2. L m[50 t 2 kˆ 100 ˆ
(t 2 5t)k]

NLP At t = 0, L 0

50 t 2 – 100 (t 2 5t) 0
v t – 2 (t-5) = 0
18. t = 10 sec
0.05m 22. Collision between A and B
2m EN A B
m 9m/s 2m m v1 2m v2
m × 9 = mv1 + 2m v2
d (from momentum conservation)
v 2 – v1
1 2 1 e=1=
kx mv 2 9
2 2 v2 = 6 m/sec., v1 = –3 m/sec.
Kx2 = mv2 collision between B and C
LL

k 100 B C
v x 0.05 0.05 10 10 2m 2m 4m
m 0.1 6m/s v

v 0.5 10 2m × 6 = 4mv
(from momentum conservation)
1 2 v = 3 m/s
From h gt
2 23. Polygon law is applicable in both but the equation given in
A

the reason is not useful in explaining the assertion.

2h 2 2 2
t
g 10 10 v
v
2
d vt 0.5 10 1m 1 2
10 P Q
24. R
1 3R v
19. ta td
2

2s 1 2s 1 1
aa 2 a d ….(i) I1 ( 1 )2 I2 ( 2 )2
2 2
2 2
aa gsin gcos v v I1 9
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

I1 I2
3R R I2 1
& ad gsin gcos
25. Let's say the compression in the spring by : y.
So, by work energy theorem we have
g 3 g 3
ad g g 1 1 2 m
2 2 2 2 mv 2 ky y v
using the above values of a a and a d and putting in eqution
2 2 k

3 x 4
(i) we will get x 3 y 10 y = 2m
5 5 100
final length of spring = 8 – 2 = 6m
 Physics Gutka 211
26. I in both cases is about point of contact 31. The nature of flow is determined by Reynolds Number.
Ring
vD
1 1 v2 Re =
2
mgh I (2mR 2 ) R2 vR gh
2 2 R
Solid cylinder density of fluid ; coefficient of
v velocity of flow viscosity
1 1 3 v2 4gh vR 3 D Diameter of pipe
mgh I 2
mR 2 C2 vC
2 2 2 R 3 vC 2 From NCERT
If Re < 1000 flow is steady
1 1000 < Re < 2000 flow becomes unsteady
27. F
R3 Re > 2000 flow is turbulent

K 0.18 10 3 1 10 2
m 2
R R e initial 103 = 382.16
R3 (0.5 10 2 )2 60 10 3

2 K 1 0.48 10 3 1 10 2

m R4 R e final 10 3 = 1019.09
(0.5 10 2 )2 60 10 3
2
2
K 1 32. (4) P = hrg
T m R4 p 2 10 3 10 3 9.8
= = 1.44 × 109 N/m 2
T2 R4 V 1.36 10 –2
T R2 V

28. F P0

m
F = Y.A. EN A
v1
F 33. H
. P0
Y.A.
a v
F.
Y. r 2 m = 24 kg
A = 0.4 m2
a = 1 cm2
r2 H = 40cm
LL

2 Using Bernoulli's equation

r1 1
2 2
= (2) 0
r2 2 mg 1 2
gH + — v1
1 1
P0
A 2
2 1
2 1 2
1
P0 0 v ... (1)
2
A

1 0.04 Neglecting v1
2 = = 0.02 m
2 2
2mg
2cm v 2gH v 8 1.2
2 A
M v = 3.033 m/s v 3m / s
29. 34. In series combination Dl = l1 + l2
V
d dV F/A F
Y =
V / AY Y
Equivalent length of rod after joing is = 2l
P dV P As, lengths are same and force is also same in series
k Dl = Dl1 + l2
dV V k
V eq 2
Yeq Y1 Y2 Y Y1 Y2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

d P P
d 2Y1Y2
k k Y
30. P1 = rgd + P0 = 3 × 105 Pa
Y1 Y2
gd = 2 × 10 5 Pa 35. For no sliding
P2 = 2 gd + P0 = 4 × 105 + 105 = 5 × 105 Pa f³ av2
mg³ av2
P2 P1 Ahg³ a2gh
%increase = 100
P1
2a
5 10 3 10 5 5
200 A
= 100 = % Option (3)
3 10 5 3
212 Physics Gutka
36. At terminal speed 41. (a) Isothermal Temperature constant
a = 0 (a) (ii)
Fnet = 0 (b) Isochoric Volume constant
mg = Fv = 6 Rv (b) (iii)
(c) Adiabatic DQ = 0
mg
v= Heat content is constant
6 Rv (c) (iv)
(d) Isobaric Pressure constant
4 (d) (i)
w R 3g 2 w R 2 g 400
v= 3 = = = 4.94 m/s 42. dU = nCvdT
6 R 9 81 dQ = nC pdT
dW = PdV = nRdT (isobaric process)
dU : dQ : dW : Cv : Cp : R
5R 7R
= : :R = 5 : 7 : 2
h 2 2
12m 43. P = kV3
v=
37. Ti = 100°C & Tf = 300°C
(12–h) T = 300 – 100
T = 200°C
P = kV3
now PV = nRT
(12 h) 2 kV4 = nRT
R 2gh now 4kV3 dV = nRdT
g PdV = nRdT/4

4h 12 h R nRdT nR
Work = PdV = T
For maximum R 4 4

dR EN 200
=0 h = 6m = nR 50nR
dh 4
1 (P 1 ,V 1 ,T 1 )
38 T1 k( 1 0 )
P V ½ = c o nstan t
T2 k( 2 0)

44. 2 (P 2 ,V 2 ,T 2 )
T1 1 0
T2 2 0 V
V1 V2
PV½= c
LL
T1 2 T2 1
T1 T2
0 nRT
V½= c
V
v2 T = c1 V½
39. WIsothermal = nRTln
v1 T2 V2
1/ 2
2V1
1/ 2

WIsobaric = P V = nR T T1 = V1
=
V1
WIsochoric = 0
A

T2
= 2
P T1
P1=P A(T)
2

1 R2
3
45.
P2=P/2 B(T) R1
C(T/2) 2
1

V Heat flow rate will be same through both

V 2V
1 2
R1 R2
2V
W1 = nRT ln = nRT ln2 R2q1 – R2q = R1q – R1q2
V
R 2 1 R1 2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

T T R1 R 2
W2 = nR T = –nR
2 2 Ans. (3)
46. U = 3PV + 4
W3 = 0
nf
Þ Wnet = W1 + W2 + W3 RT = 3PV + 4
2
1 f
Wnet = nRT ln 2 PV = 3PV + 4
2 2
40. V = V T 8
f=6 +
V = 3a 3 T PV
Since degree of freedom is more than 6 therefore gas is
polyatomic
 Physics Gutka 213
47. Q= U+ W
3RT
Q 56. v rms
Q= U+ M
5
4Q 8 RT
U v avg
5 M

4 v rms 3
nCv T = nC T
5 v avg 8
5 57. Q= U+ W
CV C
4
Here W = 0
5 f 5 5
C R R Q = U = nC V T
4 2 4 2
5R
25 Q 4 50 500R
C R 2
8
x = 25 Hence option (4).

RT 2
48. 58. 1
2 d2 NA P f
=102 nm
2
49. Since each vibrational mode has 2 degrees of freedom hence f
total vibrational degrees of freedom = 48 1
f = 3 + 3 + 48 = 54 59. Process of isothermal
2 28
= 1+ = = 1.03 V2
f 27

50. =
W
Q1
1
T2
T1
EN W nRT n

= 1 × 8.3 × 300 × ln2

V1

1200 400 = 1 × 8.3 × 300 × 0.6931

1
Q1 800 = 17258 ×10 –1 J
Q1 = 2400 J 60. As per Equi-partition law :
51. Let the final temperature of the mixture be T. Since, there Each degree of freedom contributes
LL
is no loss in energy.
DU = 0 1
k B T Average Energy
F1 F 2
n R T + 2 n2R T = 0
2 1 2 In monoatomic gas D.O.F. = 3
F1 F
n R (T1 – T) + 2 n2R (T2 – T) = 0 1 3
2 1 2 Average energy = 3 kB T kBT
2 2
F1 n1 RT1 F2 n 2 RT2 F1 n1 T1 F2 n 2 T2
A

T = Þ 61. CP – CV = R for ideal gas and gas behaves as ideal gas at high
F1 n1 R F2 n 2 R F1 n1 F2 n 2 temperature
52. (2) f = 4 + 3 + 3 = 10 so TP > TQ
assuming non linear 62. PVr = const.
Cp 2 12 TVr–1 = const.
1 = 1.2
Cv f 10 1
5
T( ) 3 = const.
53. (2) Option (a) is wrong ; since in adiabatic process V constant.
Option (b) is wrong, since in isothermal process T = constant 2/3
Option (c) & (d) matches isothermes & adiabatic formula : T1 2
T2
T 1

TV –1= constant & = constant

p –1
Q Q
54. Adiabatic process is from C to D 63.
t t
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

A B
P2 V2 P1 V1
WD
1 T T
mSA mSB
PD VD PC VC t A t B
200(3) (100)(4)
= = = –500 J
1 1 1.4
T
Ans. (1)
55. Energy associated with each degree of freedom per molecule
SA t B 90 / 6 15 3
SB T 120 / 3 40 8
1
= k BT . t A
2
214 Physics Gutka
TL 2T1 T3
64. 1 3
TH …(i) T T
2T1 T3
TL 62 TL 62 T
2 1 1 3 3
TH TH TH
2m/s 2m/s
62 1 62 f0
69. (1) (2)
TH 6 TH
TH = 6 × 62 = 372K Frequency of sound heard by car-1, which comes by reflection
TH in °C 372 – 273 = 99°C from car-2
3 340 2 340 2 342
2
65. KE = kT
2 f1 = f0 = f0
340 2 340 2 338
N Frequency of sound coming directly from car-2
PV =
N A RT 340 2
f2 = f0
PV 340 2
N= = N = 1.5 × 1011
kT
342 342
f1 – f2 = f0 1 8.09 8
–nR 338 338
66. Work done in adiabatic process = T – Ti
–1 f 70. d = 6cm, f = 504, v = 336 m/s
e = 0.3d
–nR
WAD = T – T1 V
–1 2 l+e= =
4 4f
–nR l = 16.66 – 0.3 × 6
and WBC = T –T EN
–1 2 1 l = 14.866 cm
WAD = WBC l = 14.8 cm
67. Since, each vibrational mode, corresponds to two degrees of
freedom, hence, f = 3 (trans.) + 3(rot.) + 8 (vib.) = 14
2
& 1 A /2
f 71. –A 60° A
2 8
1 A
LL
14 7
nR(T1 T2 )
W= = –582
1 5
initial phase
As W < 0. work is done on the gas. 2 3 6
72. fc = f0 fc f0
WA WB
3VC 2V0
L L'
A

Q 4L 2L '
68. T1 A T B T3
Q Q 3VC V0 1 2

4L L'

4L V0 4L B. 1 4L
L' =
1
(B is bulk modulus)
Q T 3 VC 3 2 .B 3
WA = 1 – 2 = 1– 2
Q1 T1 x = 4

Q2 T 1
73. At t = 0, y
Q1 = T1 …(i) 1 x2

Q3 1
T3 At time t = t, y 2
WB = 1 –
(Q 2 / 2) = 1 – T 1 x vt
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

2Q 3 T3 1
At t = 1, y …(i)
Q 2 = T …(ii) 1 x v
2

Now, WA = WB
Q2 1
Q1 – Q2 = – Q3 At t = 1, y 2 …(ii)
2 1 x 2
2Q1 2Q 3 Comparing (i) & (ii)
v = 2m/s
Q2 Q2 = 3
 Physics Gutka 215

k eq 78. I J A JA cos
74.
4
= reduced mass 5 J cos 60
springs are in series connection
100
J = 5 × 50 = 250 A/m2
k 1k 2
k eq Now, E J = 44 × 10–8 × 250 = 11 × 10–5 V/m
k1 k 2
k 4k 4k R1R 2
k eq 79. R . 1 2

5k 5 R1 R 2 A 1 2

4 20 25 10 1.7 2.6 10 2 16
k eq N / m 16 N / m R
5 3 10 6 4.3 10 8
m1m 2 0.2 0.8 R = 0.858 m
µ 0.16 kg
m1 m 2 0.2 0.8
16 +
100 10 + F+q F–q
0.16 +
m + q -q
75. T= 2 80. +
k
+ r x
0.5 +
0.2 = 2p +
k
k = 50p2
500
x = A sin (wt + f) EN r = 10 mm, x = 2,,
T 2k
= 5 cm sin 0 = 5 cm sin = 5 cm Fq .q
4 2 r
2 2k
1 2 1 5 F q .q
PE = kx (500) = 0.6255 r x
2 2 100
2k q 2k q
Fnet
1C 1 µ C 1 µC 1µC 1µ C r r x
76. 1 2 4 8 y 2k q.x
LL
Fnet
r r x
1 1 1
F = k(1C)(1µC) 1 ...
2 9 109 3 10 6 q 2mm
22 42 82 4
10mm.12mm
q = 4.44 C
1
= 9 × 103 1 = 12 × 103 N
1
A

4 81.
x
Gaussian dx
r Surface
77. –q +q

q in
E.ds 0 Taking an element of width dx at a distance
0 x (x < d/2) from left plate
Flux of E through sphere is zero. ( 0 kx)A
dc =
But E.ds 0 {E.ds 0} for small section ds only dx
Capacitance of half of the capacitor
Statement-2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

d/ 2 d /2
Q 1 1 1 dx
Solid C dc A kx
0 0 0
r mettalic
sphere 1 1 kd / 2
R ln 0
C kA 0

Gaussian Capacitance of second half will be same

Surface
As change encloses within gaussian surface is equal to zero. C kA
Ceq
E.ds 0 2 2 0 kd
2 ln
2 0
Option(2) statement-1 correct statement-2 false.
216 Physics Gutka
82. Max. voltage that can be measured by this potentiometer will
3E 0 ˆ 4E 0 ˆ
be equal to potential drop across AB
& b i j · 0.3 ˆj = 4 0.3 E 0
RAB = 10 × 0.1 × 100 = 100 ohm. 5 5 5
6 100
VAB 100 6 = 5V a 0.6 1 a
20 100 120 Now = =
b 1.2 2 b
qf a : b = 1 : 2 a = 1
qf qb E0 qb 87. f = 5 × 108 Hz

E=E0/k E0/k EM wave is travelling towards ĵ

= +
83. 8
ˆ
B 8.0 10 zT

E B C = (8 × 10–8 ẑ ) × (3 × 108 ŷ ) = 24 xˆ V / m

When a dielectric is inserted in a capacitor I1 I2

Due to free charge E E 0 only
88. R1 R2
E0
After dielectric E '
k
1 89. (4) (a) V = VR
qB qf 1
k I
VL
20V 20V 0V
84. I
5 V0 (b) (c)
20V 0V VC
5
20V

20 V0
2

0 V0
V0

20 V0
EN (d) tan f =
VL – VC
VR
I

X L – XC
R
0
5 5 2 90. Statement (C) is correct because, the magnetic field outside
the toroid is zero and they form closed loops inside the toroid
2V0 V0 itself.
4 10
5 2 Statement (E) is corre ct beca use we know that super
LL
conductors are materials inside which the net magnetic field
4V0 5V0 is always zero and they are perfect diamagnetic.
14
10 µr = 1 +
140 = –1
V0 Volt
9 µr = 0
Potential difference across 2 resistor is 20 – V0 For superconductors.
91. Just after the switch is closed, inductor will behave like infinite
A

140
That is 20 Volt resistance (open circuit) so the circuit will look like
9
i
40 R 9 9
Hence answer is Volt i 2.25
9 1V R R 4
t
–
V = V0 1– e
RC
85.
R
Option (1) is correct.
t
– 92. We know, the magnetic field on the axis of a current carrying
50 = 100 1– e RC
circular ring is given by

t = 0.69 × 10–4 sec. 0 2NIA

B 3/2
4 R 2
x2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

3E0 ˆ 4E 0 ˆ N
86. E i j
5 5 C 3/2
A1 = 0.2 m2 [parallel to y – z plane] B1 8 R 2 (0.2)2
B2 1 R 2 (0.05)2
= A1 = 0.2 m2 î
A2 = 0.3 m2 [parallel to x – z plane] 4[R2 + (0.05)2] = [R2 + (0.2)2 ]
A2 0.3m ˆj 2 4R2 – R2 = (0.2)2 – 4 × (0.05)2
4R2 – R2 = (0.2)2 – (0.1)2
3E 0 ˆ 4E 0 ˆ
Now a i j · 0.2 ˆi = 3 0.2 E 0 3R2 = 0.3 × 0.1
5 5 5 R2 = (0.1)2 R = 0.1
 Physics Gutka 217
93. e Bv sin xC xL
98. tan
5 R
= (2.5 × 10 –4 T) 180 m /s (10m)sin60°
18 xC xL
tan 45
= 108.25 × 10 –3 V R
xC x L R
100 mH 100 µF 1
L R
~ V = 30 sin 100t C
94.
1
300 0.03 1
120 C
1
as given z (x L x C )2 R2 10
C
xL = L = 100 × 100 × 10–3 = 10
1 1
1 1 C
xC 6
10 10 10 300
C 100 100 10
1
C 10 3
z (10 100)2 R2 90 2 120 2 = 30 × 5= 150W 3
99. R = 100
v 30 1 3
i peak amp 0.2amp XL L 50 10
z 150 5
& For resonant frequency 1 1011
XC
C
1 2 1 1
L XC XL & | XC X L | R
C LC LC
EN 1 2
1 1 100. Magnetic energy = Li 25%
& f 2
2 LC 2 100 10 3
100 10 6
i0
ME 25% i
100 10 100 2
= 50Hz Rt / L
2 2 i i 0 (1 R ) for charging
as 10 L
t n2
95. (4) conceptual R
101. (2) XL = wL
LL

v0
96. C ~ V=20sin t i=
L
102. Bandwidth = R/L
Bandwidth µ R
From the given information, So bandwidth will increase
L C R=6
A 1
C 0 0
F
2 10 3
A

d XL=10 XC=4
1 2 10 3
2 10 3
103.
XC
C 2 50 0 25 4 0

We know that power factor is cosf,

3
2 10 9 18 R
XC 9 10 106 cos ... (1)
25 25 Z
2
V0 20 25 Z R2 XL XC ... (2)
i0 10 6 A = 27.78 µA.
XC 18 ( L–1/ C)
The value of amplitude of displacement current will be same
as value of amplitude of conventional current.
Z
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

Hence option 3.
97. As rod moves in field area increases upto x = b then field is
absent and again flux is generated on return journey from
x = b to x = 0. Thus plot A for flux.
R
d 2
e curve B for emf Z 62 10 4
dt
Power dissipated = vi 6
Z 6 2 | cos
curve C for power dissipated 6 2
1
cos
2
218 Physics Gutka
104. Given : L = 2 × 10–4 H
I0 Polarizer Analyzer
R = 6.28 I0/2 I0/2 = 100 lumens
f = 10 MHz = 107 Hz 110.
Since quality factor,
Assuming initially axis of Polarizer and Analyzer are parallel
L L
Q = w0
R
= 2pf
R I0 Polarizer Analyzer
2
I0/2 I0/2 cos 30°
2 10 4 30°
Q = 2p × 107 ×
6.28
Q = 2 × 103 = 2000 I0
Now emerging intensity = cos2 30°
Ans. is 2000 2
2
100 3 3
105. c 0 E2 = 100 = 100 × = 75
4 32 2 4
2 Ans. 75
x 60 x 3
c 0 E = x = 3 I1
5 4 32 5 5 2x
111. Given that,
I2
106. E = BC = 6
We know,
(Dir. of wave) || E B 2 2
Imax = I1 I2 & Imin = I1 I2
ˆi ˆj kˆ
I max I min 2 I1 I 2 2 I1 / I 2 2 2x
= = =
E 6 ˆj V / m EN I max I m in I1 I 2 I1 2x 1
1
z z I2
E B
K m
112. sin =
y y a
107. B when a increases, decreases,
K E width decreases
x x width decreases so intensity will increases
108. Given : Frequency of wave f = 5 GHz = 5 × 109 Hz Q
h
LL
Relative permittivity, r = 2
113.
and Relative permeability, µ r = 2 D
Since speed of light in a medium is given by, = h/D
u0
1 1
v= =
µ µ rµ0 · r 0 F h F
'
A

1 1 C f
v= =
µr r µ0 0 µr r
D
Where C is speed of light is vacuum. h
'
u 0 ; ' is same for both object and image
3 108 30 10 7
v = = = 15 × 107 m/s ' D
4 2 m
0
Ans. is 15 u0 < D Hence m > 1
109. Amplitude µ Width of slit
A2 = 3A1
x
2
I max I1 I2
I min =
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

50 cm
| I1 I2 | 114. S
60 cm
Intensity I µ A2

2 2
I max A1 A 2 A1 3A1 6 0 cm 1 .2 m
I min = | A1 A 2 |
=
| A1 3A1 |

2 25 x
4A1 tan q =
= =4 :1 60 180
2A1 x = 75 cm
so distance between extreme point = 2x = 2 × 75 = 150 cm
 Physics Gutka 219
115. Deviation is minimum in a prism when :
i = e, r1 = r2 and ray (2) is parallel to base of prism.
µ=1

A
i e 120.
r1 r2
Base '

116. 1 0.02 ; 1 1.5 ; 2 0.03 ; 2 1.6

Achromatic combination
net = 0
"
B
1 – 2 = 0
1 = 2

1 1 2 2

& net 1 2 2
At maximum angle ray at point B goes in gazing emergence,
1 1
2 at all less values of , TIR occurs.
1
2
At point B
4
1 sin " 1 sin 90
1 1 2 3
2

1 3
2 " sin
1 1 2 4
3

1 6 ' "
EN 2
1 ( 1 1) A1
At point A
6 (1.5 1) A1
4
A1 = 12° 1 sin sin '
117. 20 = (C1+ C2) V V = 2 volt. 3
Q2 = C2V = 16 C = 16
118. For simple microscope, 4
sin sin "
3 2
D 4
m 1
f0 3
LL
4 1 7
sin cos cos "
D 3 4
6 1
f0
4 7 7
sin sin 1
25 3 4 3
5
f0
121. For no bending, n1 = n2
A

f0 = 5 cm 14 4
For compound microscope, 10.8 10 1.8 10
1.2 2
1.45 2
D
m On solving,
f0 fe 9 × 10–14 = 25l2
= 6 × 10–7
60 25 = 600 nm
12
5 fe hc
122. mc2
fe = 25 cm
A h
119. At minimum deviation r1 r2 m=
2 c
Also given i = 2r1 = A 123. Let initial activity be A0
Now 1.sin i 3 sinr1 t1
A = A0 e
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

.....(i)
A
1sin A 3 sin A
2 A 0e t2
.....(ii)
5
A A A
2sin cos 3 sin (i) (ii)
2 2 2
t 2 t1
5= e
A 3 A
cos 30
2 2 2 n5 1
A = 60° t2 t1

t2 t1
n5
220 Physics Gutka
124. KEmax = hn – f
h
1 131.
mv 2 h p
2
p pe m e ve
2 h
v e pp m p vp
m
Given hn1 = 2f m e ve me
hn2 = 10 f 2 mp
m p 4v e 8
v1 h 1 Ans. (4)
v2 h 2 132. K2 4K 1

v1 2 1 1 2 1
mv 2 4 mv12
v2 10 3 2 2
125. Stopping potential changes linearly with frequency of incident
radiation. v2 2v1
126. For 1st line
P = mv
1 1 1 P2 = mv2 = 2mv1
= Rz2
1 22 32 P1 = mv1
1 5 P 2mv1 mv1
= Rz2 .....(i) % change = 100 100 100%
1 36 P1 mv1
For 3rd line
t
133. R R 0e
1 2 1 1
Rz
3 22 52 EN nR nR 0 t
1 21 – is slope of straight line
Rz2 .....(ii)
3 100 3
(ii) + (i) 20
1 21 36
= × = 1.512 = 15.12 × 10–1 n2
3 100 5 t1/2 4.62
x 15
LL
134. Energy of -ray [Er] = h
127. A= N ln 2
N = nNA t1/2 h h
Momentum of -ray P
3
C
1.5 10
N= NA Total momentum is conserved.
198
P PNu 0
ln 2
A

A = N
t1/2 Where PNu = Momentum of decayed nuclei

1 Curie = 3.7 × 1010 Bq P PNu

A = 365 Bq
hv
128. We know velocity of electron in nth shell of hydrogen atom is PNu
given by
C
2 2
2 kZe 2 1 1 PNu 1 h
v v K.E. of nuclei = Mv 2
nh n 2 2M 2M C
129. Energy of H-atom is E = – 13.6 Z2/n2 Loss in internal energy
for H-atom Z = 1 & for ground state, n = 1 2
1 h h
12 = Eg + K.ENa h h 1
E = – 13.6 × 2 = – 13.6 eV 2M C 2MC2
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

1
Now for carbon atom (single ionised), Z = 6 3N 0
135. N0e– t1

Z 2 4
E = – 13.6 2 = – 13.6 (given)
n N0
n2 = 62 n= 6 N0e– t2

2
IA ln(3/4) = – t1 .....(i)
130. F= ln(1/2) = – t2 .....(i)
C
ln(3/4) – ln(1/2) = (t2–t 1) .....(i)
FC 2.5 10 6 3 108
I= = 25 W/cm2 ln(3 / 2)
A 30 t
 Physics Gutka 221
Ek E k EL 143. According to gates
136.
by Demorgan's law
hc 7
Ek E L = 27.5 KeV – 12.42 10 eVm A B A.B
k 0.071 10 9 m
By observation.
EL = (27.5 - 17.5) keV = 10 keV

137. N N0e t I RS = 35 I1
I2
Nd = N0 – N
22V VZ = 15V RL = 90
Nd = N0 (1 – e– t) 144.

Nd t
f 1 e
N0 Voltage across RS = 22 – 15 = 7V

df 7 1
e t
Current through RS = I = = A
dt 35 5

h 15 1
138. Current through 90W = I2 = = A
mv 90 6
P = a 1 1 1
mPvP = mava Current through zener = – = A
5 6 30
mPvP = 4mpva (ma = 4mP) Power through zener diode
vP P = VI
4 (Option 2) is correct
v 1
EN P = 15 × = 0.5 watt
139. Back to back diode will not the make a transistor 30
P = 5 × 10–1 watt
ic
ib 0 0
A 0
1 1 0
D1 Y
145. 1
B 0 1
D2 1 0
140. 5
146.
LL
(4) Conceptual
147. i = i0 cos( t)
X Y i = i0 at t = 0
5V
Here only D1 will work and we know i0
i at t
for silicon diode, potential drop on D1 will be 0.7V 2 4

5 0.7 1
A

I = = 0.43 A t
10 4 4(2 f) 8f

141. y= AB + AB 1
t 2.5 ms
400
y = AB . AB
IC 2 10 3
y = A+B . A+B 148.
IB 10 10 6
y = A . A + A B + A.B + B B
1
10 3
y = AB + A B 5
= 2 × 10 2
––
A B Y = AB + AB = 200
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65

0 0 1 dV 1 1
149. Rd
0 1 0 di di 5 1 10 3
1 0 0 dv 0.75 0.65
1 1 1
100
25
34 8
4
hc 6.6 10 3 10 7
142. 6.54 10
E 1.9 1.6 10 19
= 654 nm
Red color
222 Physics Gutka
I I2
A A·B
R
I1 152.
Y
RL Vz B
150. Vi=50V
z
Y A·B B

A B Y
5 0 0 1
Voltage across RL = 5V i2
RL 0 1 0
Also voltage across R = 50 – 5 = 45 volt 1 0 1
v 45 1 1 1
By v = iR R
i ii i2

45
50
R 153. I 50mA
5 1000
90mA
RL
R=1000
Current in zener diode is maximum when
RL(i 2 0 and ii = i)
50V
45
So R 500 Vi 100V R 50V
90mA
B 2000
IC Vz=50V
151. 24 ; RC 1000
IB
V 0.6 EN
0.6
IC 50
1000 I 25mA
IC = 6 × 10–4 2000
IC 6 10 4 IZ I1000 I 2000 = 50 – 25 = 25 mA
IB 25 A
24
LL
A

Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\12 NOTE.P65
 Physics Gutka 223

QUESTIONS FOR PRACTICE

1. The radius of the shortest orbit in a one electron 5. The diffusion current in semiconductors is
proportional to :–
system is 18 pm. It may be ( ; / %&
18 pm ; ) (1) Applied electric field
( {= )
(1) Hydrogen ( ) (2) Deuterium ( ) (2) Square of the applied electric field
(3) He +
(4) Li
++
( {= )
(3) Concentration gradient of charge carrier
2. A particle moves on the X–axis according to the ( )
equation x = A + B sin t. The motion is simple (4) Potential gradient of applied field
harmonic with amplitude – ( {= )
6. The width of the depletion layer of a junction
(1) A (2) B (3) A + B (4) A2 B2 ( ; ) :–
(1) Decreases with light doping
3. For the given system :–
( ? ? )
(2) Increases with heavy doping
(1) x1x2 = f2
( <+ <+ )
(3) Is independent of applied voltage
(2) x1x2 = 2f2

(3) x1x2 = 3f2

EN (
(4) is decreased under forward bias
)

( )
(4) None of these 7. To get an output 1 from the following circuit, the
input ABC must be ( 1
4. Which match is incorrect ( ):–
LL
, ABC ,)

(1) LED
(1) 101 (2) 011 (3) 110 (4) 111
A

8. In the following circuit each resistance has value

R. The net resistance between A and B is :–

(2) Solar cell

(3) Photoconductor
(1) R/4 (2) R (3) R/3 (4) R/6
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

9. An equiconvex lens of focal length

20 cm is cut as shown in figure.
The focal length of part 1 will be
20
(4) Unipolar Transistor 1
:–
(1) 20 cm (2) 40 cm (3) 10 cm (4) 5 cm
224 Physics Gutka

10. The measurement 2·3456789 km is rounded to 15. A FCC solid of an element (atomic mass 60) has a
4 significant figures. The value of measurement cubic edge of 4Å. If Avogadro's number is
will be written as ( 2·3456789 4 6 × 1023 mole–1, then the density of the solid is –
) ? ( [; =60)
(1) 2·3457 (2) 2·346 ? , 4Å ; [;
6 × 1023 –1 ] ? –
(3) 2·345 (4) 2·3456
(1) 6.25 g/cc (2) 6.25 kg/m3
11. Thermistor is a semiconductor device whose (3) 6.25× 10 g/cc (4) None of these
–30

temperature coefficient of resistance is ( , 16. 'Fast' breeder reactor is one in which

; ) (' ' ] )
(1) Large & negative ( ) (1) Breeding rate is very fast
( )
(2) Small & negative ( )
(2) Fast neutrons are used to cause fissions
(3) Large & positive ( / ) (
(4) Small & positive ( / ) )
(3) Release of energy is very fast
12. The effective resistance between A and B for the ( )
shown circuit is– EN (4) Thermal neutrons are used to cause fissions
( ; ;
)
17. The temperature profile of a frozen lake is most
appropriately represented by :–
A B /; – ( > )

(1) 2R (2) 5 1 R
LL

(3) R (4) 3 1R (1) (2)

13. In above problem, the current through the resistor

2R nearest to the battery is –
A

2R / –
(3) (4)
E E E E
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2R 4R 8R R
18. Tick the incorrect statement ( )
14. Which pair is not correct ( ; )? (1) If source moves towards a observer than
(1) Unit of charge – Faraday observed wavelength increases.
( – ) ( ]
(2) Relative density – Hygrometer /; <+ )
(2) Static frictional force is a self adjusting force.
( ? – )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

( ? )
(3) Polarisation – Transverse waves (3) Spin of photon is 1
( – ) ( 1 )
(4) Kirchoff's I and II law – Conservation of (4) Quality of musical sound depends upon the
Charge and energy number of present harmonics.
( [;
( I II – )
)
 Physics Gutka 225

19. Determine the magnitude of angular momentum 24. A weightless rubber balloon has 555g of water in
of an electron if = 7 ( =7 ] it. Its weight in water will be :–
; ) ( 555
(1) 7 (2) 42 (3) 7 (4) 56 )
(1) 555 g (2) 111 g
20. Hyd roge n at om i s ex cite d by mea ns o f a (3) 1100 g (4) Zero ( ;)
monocromatic radiations of wavelength 975Å. In
emission spectrum the number of possible lines are 25. Amplitude of a wave is represented by
(975 Å /; H
( – 2)
a= 2 the resonance will occur when
( –4 3)
[; )
(1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 5 (4) 6 ( – 2)
( a= 2
21. Two particles of mass MA and MB and there ( –4 3)
velocities are vA and vB respectively collides. After )
collision they inter changes their velocities then
(1) = 2, 3 (2) =2
ratio of MA/MB is:– MA MB
(3) = 1, 3 (4) = 1, 2
% vA vB ]
MA/MB 26. The variation of induced emf. (Einduced) with time (t)
in a coil if a short bar magnet is moved along its
) EN axis with a constant velocity is best represented as
vA vB (v A vB )
(1) v (2) v (3) (v vA ) (4) 1
B A B

22. A woman is carrying a bucket of water in one hand

and a piece of plastic in other. After transfering
the plastic piece to the bucket (in which it floats)
the woman will carry :–
LL

( ,

( ; ) )
( , + ,
(1) Same load as before ] (E )
( ) ; &)
A

(2) Less load as before

( )
(3) More load as before (1) (2)
( )
(4) Either less or more load, depending on the
density of the plastic ( ?
; ; ) (3) (4)
23. Two pieces of a solid substance when immersed
in liquid have equal upthrust on them. Then both 27. The displacement current flows in the dielectric of
pieces :– a capacitor when the potential difference across
+ ] = /; /
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

its plates :–(

] ) )
(1) Have equal weight in air ( ) (1) Becomes zero ( ; )
(2) Have equal volumes ( ) (2) Has assumed a constant value
(3) Have equal density ( ) ( )
(4) Are floated to the same depth
(3) In increasing with time ( ; <+ )
( )
(4) None of these ( )
226 Physics Gutka

28. The speed of electrons in the second orbit of Be3+ 33. Most of the radiation emitted by the surface of a
ions will be :– frying pan kept on a stove is :–
(Be3+ ; ) ( [ <+
)
c 2c 3c 4c
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Visible ( ; )
137 137 137 137
29. A small bar magnet is dropped so that it falls (2) Infrared ( )
vertically through coil. The graph obtained for (3) Ultraviolet ( )
voltage produced across the coil is given by :– (4) Microwaves ( )
34. Suppose the distance between the atoms of a
diatomic gas remains constant. Its specific heat at
constant volume per gm mole is :–
(
] ,
)
(, + ; 3 5
(1) R (2) R (3) 2R (4) 3R
2 2
) 35. The graph represents
EN current voltage
behaviour of a water
(1) (2) voltameter. Select the
correct alternative :–
( ,
, :–)
(3) (4) (1) Ohm's law is not valid for low voltage
LL
( , ; )
(2) Ohm's law is obeyed for voltages greater than E1
30. The two head lamps of a car are in parallel. They (E1 , )
together consumes 48W with the help of a 6V (3) Electrolytes does not obey Ohm's law
battery. The resistance of each bulb is : ( ; )
( (Head Lamp) (4) None of these ( )
A

6V , 48 [ 36. When triton captures a proton, it becomes (

) ] ] ; :
3 3 2 (1) Neutron ( ) (2) Meson ( )
(1) (2) (3) 3 (4)
8 2 3 (3) –particle ( – ) (4) Deutron ( )
31. The heart does 1 joule of work in each heart beat.
37. A person whose nearest distance of distinct vision is
The power of the heart is :– ( ; / 45 cm uses a reading lens of 15 cm focal length.
;1 ; ) He obtains a magnification of :(
1 45 cm , 15 cm
(1) 1 W (2) 1·2W (3) W (4) 1MW
1.2 <+ , )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

32. To provide electric power in satellite, we use( (1) 4 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 1

) 38. If the velocity of sound in air is 336 m/s. The

maximum length of a closed pipe that would
(1) Solar cookers ( )
produce a just audible sound will be: (
(2) Solar furnace ( )
336 m/s ; ;/
(3) Solar panels ( )
, )
(4) Solar power plants ( =) (1) 3.2 cm (2) 4.2 m (3) 4.2 cm (4) 3.2 m
 Physics Gutka 227

39. A man X can hear upto 10 kHz, another man

Y upto 2 kHz. A note of frequency 500 Hz is
produced before them from a stretched string then
both will hear sounds of :(, X 10 kHz
Y, 2 kHz ;
500 Hz [
/ )
(1) different pitch but same quality (1) R2 P0 (2) 2 R2 P0
( ) (3) 4 R2 P0 (4) 8 R2 P0
(2) same pitch but different quality
( ) 44. The shape of a spot of light produced when bright
sunshine passes perpendicularly through a square
(3) same pitch and same quality
hole of very small size is –
( )
(1) Square, because the hole is square.
(4) different pitch and different quality
(2) Round, because it is an image of the sun.
( )
40. Excitation energy of a hydrogen like ion in its first 45. A converging lens produces a
excitation state is 40.8 eV. Energy needed to real image of an object. Figure
remove the electron from the ion in ground state is shows the object as seen from the
( ; lens. The image as seen from the
lens will be
40.8 eV ,

(1) 27.2 eV
,
(2) 40.8 eV
EN
)
(1) (2)
(3) 13.6 eV (4) 54.4 eV
41. Frequency of the signal emitted by a rocket is
4 × 107 Hz. If apparent frequency observed on
earth is 3.2 × 107 Hz. Then velocity with rocket is
LL
(3) (4)
moving away is :–
4 ×107 Hz
46. In transistor action of a semiconductor material,
3.2×107 Hz ] ) the hole has a finite life. Its life is :–
9 1 18 2 (1) 1 min (2) 1 sec
(1) c (2) c (3) c (4) c (3) 1 ms (4) From a few s to several
41 5 41 5
A

42. The electric field in a region is given by 47. The two binary inputs ‘A’ & ‘B’ are to be
compared. The Boolean expression for the output
A ˆ when ‘A’ and ‘B’ are equal is given by –
E i . Then a suitable SI unit for A
x3 (1) AB AB (2) AB AB
N m3 (3) AB (4) AB
(1) (2) V–m2
C
(3) Both of them (4) None of them 48. The bandwith of the amplifier would be (see figure)
43. Two identical hemispheres each has radius R with
smooth surface are placed in contact and
evacuated. (assume perfect vacuum inside). Two Vmax
equal weights each w hang on two sides. The pulley Vmax
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

are frictionless and atmospheric pressure is P 0, for 2

what value of w the two hemispheres will seperate.
, R
, ( )
] w, , ? (1) ƒ3 –ƒ2 (2) ƒ4 – ƒ1
; P0 w , (3) ƒ3 – ƒ1 (4) ƒ4 – ƒ2
228 Physics Gutka

49. A and B in figure I and II represent two sets (shaded 53. Which of the following explains the reason why
area). The output represented by the set Y in there is no total eclipse of the sun?
figure III is realised by the logic gate
(1) Area of the sun covered by the moon
(2) Size of earth w.r.t. moon
(3) Direction of rotation of earth around sun
(4) Orbit of moon around earth

{ <
)
(1) OR (2) NOT (3) NOR (4) AND
54. In n-type Ge with arsenic (or boron in P type
50. The lens shown is made–up of two types
semiconductor) impurity, the ionization energy is
of transparent materials indicated by the about
shades. A point object is placed on its (1) 0.001eV (2) 0.01 eV
(3) 0.72 eV (4) 1.1 eV
axis. This will form
55. On the moon, astronaut inflate a rubber balloon with
(1) 1 image (2) 2 images hydrogen gas and release it at a height of h
(3) 3 images (4) No images metres. The balloon will (Note : there is no at-
51.
EN
A truck has to take a sharp turn to the left. The
C.G. of the truck can be altered by shifting a
concentrated load. To avoid toppling the load must
mosphere on the moon)
,
; h

be shifted.
(1) Up and left (2) Up and right )
(3) Down & left (4) Down and right (1) Fall down
LL
52. Spherical aberration is absent in – (2) First go up and finally come down
(1) Concave mirrors (2) Convex mirrors (3) Remain at the height of h metres
(3) Parabolic mirros (4) All of the above (4) Go upward

ANSWER KEY
A

Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A. 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 4
Q. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A. 4 1 2 4 3 2 3 2 4 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 4
Q. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
A. 1 3 1 2 3 4 2 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 1
HINT & SOLUTION
d
26. E induced
dt
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

flux increase Einduced negative time flux decrease , symmetric

graph
d
29. E induced
dt
flux increase Einduced negative velocity increase time flux decrease
non-symmetric graph
 Physics Gutka 229

Learning physics is similar to learning swimming– you have to learn by doing. You could read a book on swimming
and memorize every word in it, but when you jump into a pool the first time you are going to have problems.
Similarly, you could read a Physics book carefully, memorizing every formula in it, but when you finish, you still
haven’t learnt Physics. To learn Physics you have to go beyond passive reading; you have to interact with Physics
and experience it by doing questions.
To develop a systematic approach in solving Physics questions, you should follow the following steps :–
Step I : Read the question carefully
Before you can solve a question you need to know exactly what information it gives and what it
asks you to determine. Some information is given explicitly, as when a question states that a
body has a speed of 5 ms–1. Other information is implicit, for example, saying that a ball is
dropped from rest means its initial speed is zero. Some informations are hidden informations
such as the block leaves the contact that means normal force N=0 at that time. You should
search for missing important links which are "intermediate quantities" required for solving the
EN
questions but are neither given nor asked. These are links between known and unknown
quantities.
Step II : Sketch the system
A sketch helps you to acquire a physical feeling for the system.
Step III : Visualize the Physical Process
LL

Try to visualize what is happening in the system as if you were watching it in a movie. Your
sketch should help.
Step IV : Strategize
This may be the most difficult, but at the same time the most creative, part of the question
solving process. From your sketch and visualization, try to identify the physical processes at
A

work in the system. Then, develop a strategy– a game plan– for solving the question.
Step V : Identify appropriate equations
Once a strategy has been developed, find the specific equations that are needed to carry it out.
Step VI : Solve the equations
Use basic maths to solve the equations identified in the previous step.
Step VII : Check your answer
Once you have an answer, check to see if it makes sense:
(a) Does it has correct dimensions?
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

(b) Is the numerical value reasonable?

Step VIII : Explore Limits / Special Cases
You can learn a lot of Physics by checking various limits of your answer. For example, if you
have two masses in your system of colliding bodies m 1 and m2, you have to see what happens
in the special case when m1=0 or m1=m2 or m1>>>m2? Check to see whether your answer
and physical intuition agree.
230 Physics Gutka

,
<+ ; ;
/; <+ = ;
; > , ; /;;
; <+
,, ,
I : /; <+;
; ,
: , , 5
]
,%, ] ;
,
EN ;
N=0 ;+ [ , ,
] ] ; +;

II : , ; ;
;
III : ;
LL

; , ,
} ,
IV : ,
;
A

; ;
,,
V :
,
,
VI :

VII :
;
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

(a) (b)
VIII : [
,
, ; m1 m2 ,
m1=0 m1=m2 m1>>>m2 ; ;
, ,
 Physics Gutka 231

Ex.1 In a ballistic pendulum, an object of mass m is fired with an initial speed v0 at the bob of a pendulum. The bob has
a mass M, and is suspended by a rod of negligible mass. After the collision, the object and the bob stick together and
swing through an arc, eventually gaining a height h. Find the height h in terms of m, M, v0 and g. (ballistic)
]m , v0 M .;
+} , > % h
m, M, v0 g h )
• Sketch the System ( ; )

Initially only the object of mass m is moving with a speed v0 in the positive x–direction. Immediately after the
collision, the bob and object move together with a new speed v1, which is determined by momentum conservation.
Finally the pendulum continues to swing to the right untill its speed decreases to zero and it comes to rest at
the height h.( m / x- v0
v1 , >
? ; h ; )

EN
• Strategy ( )
There is a completely inelastic collision between the bob and object. Momentum is conserved during this
LL

collision, but kinetic energy is not. After the collision, the remaining kinetic energy is converted into gravitational
potential energy, which determines how high the bob and object will rise. ( /; %
] ;
] )
A

m
Sol. Linear momentum conservation ( ; ) mv0 = (m+M)v1 v1 = v0
m M

1 1 m
Kinetic energy just after collision ( ) K= M m v12 = mv 20
2 2 m M

1 m
Kinetic energy after collision is equal to the gain in mv 20 = (m+M)gh
2 m M

gravitational potential energy at the height h,

]h ; )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

2
m v 20
Solve for height h ( h ) h=
m M 2g

* A ballistic pendulum is often used to measure the speed of a rapidly moving object such as a bullet.

( % )
232 Physics Gutka

Ex.2 Two particles of masses m1 and m2 are moving on a smooth horizontal plane in opposite direction, collide
elastically (head on) with velocity u1 and u2 . Find their final velocities after collision ( {
u1 u2 m1 m2 ( ) ,)
• Sketch the system ( ; )

• Strategy )
Because there is no external force along the line of impact, the linear momentum of the system must be
conserved. In elastic collision, kinetic energy before collision must be equal to kinetic energy after collision or
seperation speed
by using definition of e = approach speed , we can, solve this question. (

% ; ; : ] ]

: ; e e )

Sol. By momentum conservation ( ) m1u1–m2u2=m1v1+m2v2

EN v2 v1
coefficient of restitution ( ) e =1 =
u1 u2

m1 m2 2m2 2m1 m1 m2
Solve for v1 & v2 (v1 v2 ) v1 u1 u2 , v2
m1 m2
u1
m1 m2
u2
m1 m2 m1 m2

• Exploration of limits / special case ( / )

Case I : m1 = m2 then v1 = – u2 , v2 = u1i.e. particles exchange their velocities ( ; )
LL

Case II : m1>>> m2 then v1 u1 , v 2 2u1 u2 Case III : m2 >>> m1 then v 2 u2 , v 1 u1 2u 2

Ex.3 A lens produces a real image that is twice as large as the object and is located 15 cm from the lens. Find the focal
length of the lens. ( 15
)
• Sketch the system ( ; )
A

Because the image is real, the lens must be convex, and the object must be outside the focal point.

%
• Strategy ( )
Z:\NODE02\B0BA-BB\GUTKA\13 NOTE.P65

v 1 1 1
To find f, we have to solve two equations m= &
u v u f

v 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1
Sol m= 2 u=– = –7.5 cm and f = 5 cm
u 2 f v u 15 7.5 15 15 5
Check your answer with your intuition. As expected for a convex lens, the focal length is positive.
( ,] ] / )